Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Looking for valuable information, such as essential points on shooting (Tutorials)
This website introduces convenient functions, ways of usage, and setting examples. Refer to the
website when you set up your camera. (Another window will open.)
ZV-E10 lens compatibility information
This website provides the lens compatibility information. (Another window will open.)
How to use the “Help Guide”
Names of parts/Basic operations
Identifying parts
Basic operations
Using the control wheel
Using MENU items
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)
How to use the keyboard
Icons and indicators
List of icons on the monitor
Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback)
DISP Button
Preparing the camera
Checking the camera and the supplied items
E PZ 16–50mm F3.5–5.6 OSS (Power zoom)
Charging the battery pack
Inserting/removing the battery pack
Charging the battery pack while it is inserted in the camera
1
Charging by connecting to a computer
Battery life and number of recordable images
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)
Notes on the battery pack
Notes on charging the battery pack
Inserting a memory card (sold separately)
Inserting/removing a memory card
Memory cards that can be used
Notes on memory card
Attaching/removing a lens
Attaching accessories
Mount Adaptor
LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor
LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor
Setting language, date and time
In-Camera Guide
Shooting
Shooting still images
Focusing
Focus Mode
Auto focus
Focus Area
Focus Area Limit
Phase detection AF
Focus Standard
AF/MF control
AF w/ shutter (still image)
AF On
Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)
AF in Focus Mag. (still image)
2
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
Focus Hold
Focus Frame Color
Pre-AF (still image)
AF Area Auto Clear
Disp. cont. AF area
AF Micro Adj.
Manual focus
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Focus Magnifier
MF Assist (still image)
Focus Magnif. Time
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
Peaking Setting
Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)
Drive Mode
Cont. Shooting
Self-timer
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
Indicator during bracket shooting
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
Bracket Settings
Taking pictures of yourself by monitoring the screen
Self-portrait/ -timer
Interval shooting
Interval Shoot Func.
3
Using touch functions
Touch Operation
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Shutter
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking
Selecting still image size/image quality
File Format (still image)
JPEG Quality (still image)
JPEG Image Size (still image)
Aspect Ratio (still image)
Panorama: Size
Panorama: Direction
Selecting a shooting mode for still image shooting
Shoot Mode (still image)
Intelligent Auto
Superior Auto
Superior Auto Img. Extract.
About Scene Recognition
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
Shutter Priority
Manual Exposure
Bulb shooting
Sweep Panorama
Scene Selection
Recall Camera Set.
Controlling the exposure/metering modes
Exposure Comp.
Dial/Wheel Ev Comp
Exposure Set. Guide
4
Exposure step
Metering Mode
Face Priority in Multi Metering
AE lock
Exp.comp.set
Zebra Setting
Switching the shooting style
Product Showcase Set
Background Defocus
Correcting brightness and contrast automatically
D-Range Optimizer (DRO)
Auto HDR
Selecting the ISO sensitivity
ISO
Using the zoom
The zoom features available with this product
Zoom Range
Zoom Lever Speed
Custom Key Z. Speed
Remote Zoom Speed
About zoom scale
White balance
White Balance
Priority Set in AWB
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
Setting how to process images
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Soft Skin Effect
Color Space (still image)
5
Shutter settings
Release w/o Lens
Release w/o Card
Silent Shooting (still image)
e-Front Curtain Shutter
Reducing blur
SteadyShot (still image)
Lens compensation
Lens Comp.
Noise reduction
Long Exposure NR (still image)
High ISO NR (still image)
Face detection
Regist. Faces Priority
Face Registration (New Registration)
Face Registration (Order Exchanging)
Face Registration (Delete)
Using the flash
Using flash (sold separately)
Flash Mode
Flash Comp.
FEL lock
External Flash Set.
Wireless Flash
Recording movies
Shooting movies
Shooting Slow-motion/Quick-motion movies (S&Q Settings)
Livestreaming video and audio (USB Streaming) (movie)
Selecting a shooting mode
Shoot Mode (movie)
6
Shoot Mode (S&Q)
Setting the image quality and recording format
Movie recording formats
File Format (movie)
Record Setting (movie)
Settings for movie recording
Proxy Recording
Audio Recording
Audio Level Display
Audio Rec Level
Audio Out Timing
Wind Noise Reduct.
Picture Profile
Gamma Disp. Assist
Auto Slow Shutter (movie)
Initial Focus Mag. (movie)
AF Transition Speed (movie)
AF Subj. Shift Sens. (movie)
SteadyShot (movie)
SteadyShot Settings (movie)
TC/UB Settings
TC/UB Disp. Switch
Marker Display (movie)
Marker Settings (movie)
Emph disp dur REC (movie)
REC Lamp
Movie w/ shutter
4K Output Select (movie)
Viewing
7
Viewing images
Playing back still images
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)
Rotating an image (Rotate)
Playing back panoramic images
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position
Playing back movies
Volume Settings
Photo Capture
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)
Display as Group
Cont. PB for Interval
PB Speed for Interval
Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)
Protecting data
Protecting images (Protect)
Setting Rating function
Rating
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Designating images for printing (DPOF)
Specifying images to be printed (Specify Printing)
Deleting images
Deleting a displayed image
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
Delete confirm.
Viewing images on a TV
8
Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable
Customizing the camera
Customization features of the camera
Registering frequently used functions
Camera Set. Memory
Customizing the functions of the ring/dial
Dial/Wheel Setup
Dial / Wheel Lock
Customizing MENU (My Menu)
Add Item
Sort Item
Delete Item
Delete Page
Delete All
Display From My Menu
Checking images before/after recording
Auto Review
Aperture Preview
Shot. Result Preview
Live View Display
Monitor settings
Grid Line
Monitor Brightness
Display Quality
Bright Monitoring
Memory card settings
Format
File/Folder Settings (still image)
File Settings (movie)
Display Media Info.
9
Select REC Folder
New Folder
Recover Image DB
Camera settings
Audio signals
Power Setting Option
NTSC/PAL Selector
HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution
HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60p compatible models)
HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display
HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie)
HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)
HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI
USB Connection
USB LUN Setting
USB Power Supply
Language
Date/Time Setup
Area Setting
Version
Initializing the camera
Setting Reset
Using network functions
Functions available with a smartphone (Imaging Edge Mobile)
Connecting the camera and a smartphone
Smartphone Connect
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the QR Code
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the SSID and password
Cnct. while Power OFF
Using a smartphone as a remote commander
10
Transferring images to a smartphone
Selecting images on the smartphone to transfer
Send to Smartphone Func.
Reading location information from a smartphone
Location Info. Link Set.
Using a remote commander with Bluetooth communication
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
Changing the network settings
Airplane Mode
Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.
Wi-Fi Settings: Display Wi-Fi Info.
Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset
Bluetooth Settings
Edit Device Name
Security(IPsec)
Reset Network Set.
Using a computer
Recommended computer environment
Connecting/disconnecting the camera
Connecting to a computer
Disconnecting the camera from the computer
Managing/editing images on a computer
Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)
Importing images to the computer
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)
Livestreaming video and audio (USB Streaming) (movie)
List of MENU items
Using MENU items
11
Camera Settings1
File Format (still image)
JPEG Quality (still image)
JPEG Image Size (still image)
Aspect Ratio (still image)
Panorama: Size
Panorama: Direction
Long Exposure NR (still image)
High ISO NR (still image)
Color Space (still image)
Lens Comp.
Shoot Mode (still image)
Superior Auto Img. Extract.
Drive Mode
Bracket Settings
Interval Shoot Func.
Recall Camera Set.
Camera Set. Memory
Focus Mode
Focus Area
Focus Area Limit
Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)
AF w/ shutter (still image)
Pre-AF (still image)
Focus Frame Color
AF Area Auto Clear
Disp. cont. AF area
AF Micro Adj.
Exposure Comp.
ISO
12
Metering Mode
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Exposure step
Flash Mode
Flash Comp.
Exp.comp.set
Wireless Flash
External Flash Set.
White Balance
Priority Set in AWB
D-Range Optimizer (DRO)
Auto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Picture Profile
Soft Skin Effect
Focus Magnifier
Focus Magnif. Time
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
AF in Focus Mag. (still image)
MF Assist (still image)
Peaking Setting
Product Showcase Set
Face Registration (New Registration)
Face Registration (Order Exchanging)
Face Registration (Delete)
Regist. Faces Priority
Self-portrait/ -timer
Camera Settings2
Shoot Mode (movie)
13
Shoot Mode (S&Q)
Livestreaming video and audio (USB Streaming) (movie)
File Format (movie)
Record Setting (movie)
Shooting Slow-motion/Quick-motion movies (S&Q Settings)
Proxy Recording
AF Transition Speed (movie)
AF Subj. Shift Sens. (movie)
Auto Slow Shutter (movie)
Initial Focus Mag. (movie)
Audio Recording
Audio Rec Level
Audio Level Display
Audio Out Timing
Wind Noise Reduct.
SteadyShot (movie)
SteadyShot Settings (movie)
Marker Display (movie)
Marker Settings (movie)
Emph disp dur REC (movie)
REC Lamp
Movie w/ shutter
Silent Shooting (still image)
e-Front Curtain Shutter
Release w/o Lens
Release w/o Card
SteadyShot (still image)
Zoom Range
Zoom Lever Speed
Custom Key Z. Speed
14
Remote Zoom Speed
DISP Button
Zebra Setting
Grid Line
Exposure Set. Guide
Live View Display
Auto Review
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)
Dial/Wheel Setup
Dial/Wheel Ev Comp
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Shutter
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking
Dial / Wheel Lock
Audio signals
Network
Smartphone Connect
Send to Smartphone Func.
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)
Airplane Mode
Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.
Wi-Fi Settings: Display Wi-Fi Info.
Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset
Bluetooth Settings
Location Info. Link Set.
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
Edit Device Name
Security(IPsec)
15
Reset Network Set.
Playback
Protecting images (Protect)
Rotating an image (Rotate)
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
Rating
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Specifying images to be printed (Specify Printing)
Photo Capture
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position
Cont. PB for Interval
PB Speed for Interval
Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
Display as Group
Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)
Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)
Setup
Monitor Brightness
Gamma Disp. Assist
Volume Settings
Delete confirm.
Display Quality
Power Setting Option
NTSC/PAL Selector
Cleaning Mode
Touch Operation
16
TC/UB Settings
HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution
HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60p compatible models)
HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display
HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie)
HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)
HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI
4K Output Select (movie)
USB Connection
USB LUN Setting
USB Power Supply
Language
Date/Time Setup
Area Setting
Format
Select REC Folder
New Folder
File/Folder Settings (still image)
File Settings (movie)
Recover Image DB
Display Media Info.
Version
Setting Reset
My Menu
Add Item
Sort Item
Delete Item
Delete Page
Delete All
Display From My Menu
17
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Precautions/This product
Precautions
On cleaning
Cleaning the image sensor
Cleaning Mode
Number of recordable images
Recordable movie times
Using the AC Adaptor/battery charger abroad
License
Specifications
Trademarks
If you have problems
Troubleshooting
Warning messages
18
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
How to use the “Help Guide”
The “Help Guide” is a “Web Instruction Manual” that has been designed to describe the functions and operating methods
of this camera. Use the “Help Guide” to search for any information that you require in order to make full use of the
camera.
(The “Help Guide” screens shown on this page are for reference only. They may differ from the actual onscreen display
of your model.)
Hint
The “Startup Guide” supplied with the camera describes basic operating methods and precautions for use. Please refer to the
“Startup Guide” in combination with this “Help Guide.”
Finding your desired information
Method A: Searching by keyword
Enter a search keyword (“white balance,” “focus area,” etc.), and use the search results to display the description page
that you want to view. If you enter two or more keywords by separating them with spaces (blanks), you can search for
pages that contain all of those keywords.
Method B: Viewing the table of contents
Select a heading from the table of contents to display the description page.
Screen displayed on a computer
Screen displayed on a smartphone
19
Viewing information about related features
“Related Topic” at the bottom of each page lists sections that contain information related to the description page currently
being displayed. For a deeper understanding of the currently displayed page, refer to the listed sections as well.
Printing all the pages of the “Help Guide”
To print all the pages, click the [
Printable PDF] button in the upper right corner of the top page. When the PDF file
appears, use the printing menu of the browser to print it out.
This function is not available for certain languages.
Printing only the currently displayed page (only on a computer)
To print only the page currently being displayed, click the [
Print] button at the top of that page. When the printing
screen appears, specify your printer.
20
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
21
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Identifying parts
When the lens is removed
Shutter button1.
For shooting: W/T (zoom) lever
For viewing: (Index) lever/Playback zoom lever
2.
Self-timer lamp/Recording lamp3.
Lens release button4.
Lens5.
Mount6.
Image sensor*7.
Lens contacts*8.
Do not directly touch these parts.
*
22
ON/OFF (Power) switch1.
Internal microphone*2.
Multi Interface Shoe**3.
Image sensor position mark
The image sensor is the sensor that converts light into an electric signal. The position of the image sensor is
indicated by
(Image sensor position mark). When you measure the exact distance between the camera and
the subject, refer to the position of the horizontal line.
If the subject is closer than the minimum shooting distance of the lens, the focus cannot be confirmed. Make sure
you put enough distance between the subject and the camera.
4.
Hooks for shoulder strap
Attach both ends of the strap onto the camera.
5.
23
Still/Movie/S&Q button6.
MOVIE (Movie) button7.
C1 button (Custom button 1)/
(Background Defocus) button8.
Control dial9.
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth antenna (built-in)10.
(Microphone) jack
When an external microphone is connected, the built-in microphone turns off automatically. When the external
microphone is a plugin-power type, the power of the microphone is supplied by the camera.
11.
USB Type-C terminal**12.
Charge lamp13.
HDMI micro jack14.
(Headphones) jack15.
Do not cover this part during movie recording. Doing so may cause noise or lower the volume.
*
For details on compatible accessories for the Multi Interface Shoe and the USB Type-C terminal, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony
dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. Accessories for the Accessory Shoe can also be used. Operations with other manufactures’
accessories are not guaranteed.
**
MENU button1.
For shooting: Fn (Function) button
For viewing: (Send to Smartphone) button
You can display the screen for [Send to Smartphone] by pressing this button.
2.
Control wheel3.
Center button4.
(Delete) button/ (Product Showcase Set) button5.
(Playback) button6.
Access lamp7.
Monitor/Touch panel8.
24
You can adjust the monitor to an easily viewable angle and shoot from any position.
(A): Approx. 176°
(B): Approx. 270°
You may not be able to adjust the monitor angle depending on the type of a tripod you use. In such a case,
release the tripod screw once to adjust the monitor angle.
Do not apply excessive force when opening, closing, or rotating the monitor. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Connection plate cover
Use this when using an AC-PW20 AC Adaptor (sold separately). Insert the connection plate into the battery
compartment, and then pass the cord through the connection plate cover as shown below.
Make sure that the cord is not pinched when you close the cover.
1.
Tripod socket hole
Supports 1/4-20 UNC screws
Use a tripod with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise, you cannot firmly secure the camera, and
damage to the camera may occur.
2.
Speaker3.
Battery/memory card cover4.
Memory card slot5.
25
Using the wind screen (supplied)
Use the wind screen to reduce wind noise picked up by the internal microphone when recording a movie.
Attach the wind screen to the Multi Interface Shoe.
Note
When attaching the wind screen, make sure that the wind screen does not get caught in the Multi Interface Shoe.
When attaching a lens, make sure that the wind screen does not get caught in the lens mount.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Battery insertion slot6.
Battery lock lever7.
26
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Using the control wheel
You can select setting items by turning or pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel. Your selection is
determined when you press the center of the control wheel.
The DISP (Display Setting),
(Exposure Comp.), / (Drive Mode), and ISO (ISO) functions are assigned to
the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel. In addition, you can assign selected functions to the
left/right/bottom side and the center of the control wheel.
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel or by
turning the control wheel.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
27
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Using MENU items
You can change settings related to all the camera operations including shooting, playback, and operating method. You
can also execute camera functions from the MENU.
Related Topic
Add Item
Display From My Menu
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the MENU button to display the menu screen.
1
Select the desired setting you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel or by
turning the control wheel, and then press the center of the control wheel.
Select a MENU tab (A) at the top of the screen, and press the left/right side of the control wheel to move to
another MENU tab.
You can move to the next MENU tab by pressing the Fn button.
You can go back to the previous screen by pressing the MENU button.
2
Select the desired setting value, and press the center of the control wheel to confirm your selection.
3
28
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
You can use the custom key function to assign the functions you use most frequently to easily operable keys. This lets
you skip the process of selecting items from MENU, so you can recall the functions more quickly. You can also assign
[Not set] to easily operable keys to prevent accidental operation.
You can separately assign functions to custom keys for the still image shooting mode (
Custom Key), movie shooting
mode (
Custom Key), and playback mode ( Custom Key).
Assignable functions vary depending on the keys.
You can assign functions to the following keys.
Hint
You can recall functions more quickly by using the Function menu to configure each setting directly from the Fn button, along with
the custom keys. Refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.
The following is the procedure for assigning the [Eye AF] function to the
(Product Showcase Set) button.
MOVIE Button1.
Custom Button 12.
Fn/
Button3.
Center Button /Left Button/Right Button/Down Button4.
Button5.
MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key].
If you want to assign a function to recall while shooting movies, select [
Custom Key]. If you want to assign a
function to recall while playing back images, select [
Custom Key].
1
Move to the [Rear] screen using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then, select [
Button] and press
the center of the control wheel.
2
Press the left/right side of the control wheel until [Eye AF] is displayed. Select [Eye AF], and then press the
center.
3
29
Hint
You can also assign shooting functions to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold
button.
Related Topic
Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
If you press the (Product Showcase Set) button in the still image shooting mode and eyes are detected,
[Eye AF] will activate, and the camera will focus on the eyes. Shoot images while holding down the
(Product Showcase Set) button.
30
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)
The Function menu is a menu of 12 functions that is displayed at the bottom of the screen when you press the Fn
(Function) button in the shooting mode. You can access frequently used functions more quickly by registering them to
the function menu.
Hint
You can register twelve functions to the Function menus for still image shooting and movie shooting, respectively.
You can recall functions more quickly by using the custom key function to assign frequently used functions to desired keys, along
with the function menu. Refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.
Press the Fn (Function) button in shooting mode.
1
Select the desired function by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.
2
Select the desired setting by turning the control wheel, and press the center of the control wheel.
3
31
To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens
Select the desired function in step 2, then press the center of the control wheel. The dedicated setting screen for the
function will appear. Follow the operating guide (A) to adjust settings.
To change the functions in the function menu (Function Menu Set.)
The following is the procedure for changing [Drive Mode] in the still image function menu to [Grid Line].
To change the movie function menu, select a movie function menu item in Step 2.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Some functions can be fine-tuned using the control dial.
MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Function Menu Set.].1.
Select
(Drive Mode) from among the twelve still image function menu items using the top/bottom/left/right
side of the control wheel, and then press the center.
2.
Move to the [Display/Auto Review] screen using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then, select [Grid Line] and
press the center of the control wheel.
(Grid Line) will be displayed in the former location of (Drive Mode) in the function menu.
3.
32
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
How to use the keyboard
When manual character entry is required, a keyboard is displayed on the screen.
Move the cursor on desired key using the control wheel, then press the center to enter.
To cancel input, select [Cancel].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Input box
The characters you entered are displayed.
1.
Switch character types
Each time you press this key, the character type will switch between alphabet letters, numerals and symbols.
2.
Keyboard
Each time you press this key, the characters corresponding to that key will be displayed one-by-one in order.
For example: If you want to enter “abd”
3.
Press the key for “abc” once to display “a.”1.
Press “
” (the right-pointing arrow in the “Move cursor” area, marked as No.5).2.
Press the key for “abc” twice to display “b.”3.
Press the key for “def” once to display “d.”4.
Finalize
Finalizes the entered characters.
4.
Move cursor
Moves the cursor in the input box to the right or left.
5.
Delete
Deletes the character preceding the cursor.
6.
(upward-pointing arrow)
Switches the next character to a capital or lowercase letter.
7.
(space)
Enters a space.
8.
33
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
List of icons on the monitor
The displayed contents and their positions shown below are just a guideline, and may differ from the actual display.
Descriptions are given below the indications of the icons.
Icons on the shooting screen
Shooting mode/Scene recognition
Shooting mode
Shooting mode ( Recall Camera Set.)
Scene Recognition icons
Scene Selection
1.
Camera settings
NO CARD
Memory card status
100/1h30m
Remaining number of recordable images/Recordable time of movies
Writing data / Number of images left to write
Aspect ratio of still images
24M / 21M / 20M / 16M / 12M / 11M / 10M / 8.0M / 6.0M / 5.3M / 5.1M / 4.0M
Image size of still images
RAW
RAW recording
X.FINE FINE STD
JPEG Quality
XAVC S 4K XAVC S HD
File format of movies
Record setting of movies
120p 60p 30p 24p 100p 50p 25p
Frame rate of movies
2.
34
Proxy Recording
120fps 60fps 30fps 15fps 8fps 4fps 100fps 50fps 25fps 12fps 6fps 3fps 2fps 1fps
Frame rate for slow/quick motion shooting
Flash charge in progress
Setting Effect OFF
SteadyShot off/on, Camera shake warning
SteadyShot focal length / Camera shake warning
Smart Zoom/ClearImage Zoom/Digital Zoom
PC remote
Bright Monitoring
Silent Shooting
Remote control
Connected to Wi-Fi/Disconnected from Wi-Fi
No audio recording of movies
Wind Noise Reduct.
Gamma Disp. Assist
Touch Shutter
Focus Cancel
Tracking Cancel
Spot Focus
Performing [Spot Focus]
Bluetooth connection available / Bluetooth connection unavailable
Connected to smartphone / Not connected to smartphone
Obtaining location information / Location information cannot be obtained
Airplane Mode
Overheating warning
Database file full / Database file error
Product Showcase Set
USB Streaming
: Not Connect / USB Streaming : Standby / USB Streaming : Output
USB streaming status
Battery3.
35
Remaining battery
Remaining battery warning
USB power supply
Shooting settings
Drive Mode
Flash Mode/Wireless Flash
±0.0
Flash Comp.
Focus Mode
Focus Area
File Format
Metering Mode
7500K A5 G5
White Balance (Auto, Preset, Underwater Auto, Custom, Color temperature, Color filter)
D-Range Optimizer/Auto HDR
+3 +3 +3
Creative Style/Contrast, saturation, and sharpness
Picture Effect
Face/Eye Priority in AF
Soft Skin Effect
4.
Focus indicator/exposure settings
Focus indicator
1/250
Shutter speed
F3.5
Aperture value
Background Defocus
Exposure compensation/Metered Manual
ISO400
ISO AUTO
ISO 400
ISO sensitivity
AE lock/FEL lock
5.
Guides/other
Tracking Cancel
Guide display for tracking
Select Focus Point On/Off
Guide display for setting Focus Area
6.
36
Icons on the playback screen
Single-image playback
Histogram display
Focus Cancel
Guide display for canceling focusing
Control wheel function
Control dial function
Bracket indicator
Spot metering area
Exposure Setting Guide
Shutter speed indicator
Aperture indicator
Histogram
Digital level gauge
STBY REC
Movie recording standby/Movie recording in progress
1:00:12
Actual movie recording time (hours: minutes: seconds)
Audio Level Display
REC Control
00:00:00.00
Time code (hours: minutes: seconds. frames)
00 00 00 00
User Bit
37
Basic information
View Mode
Rating
Protect
DPOF
DPOF set
3/7
File number/Number of images in the view mode
Remaining battery
Display as Group
Proxy movie included
1.
Camera settings
Refer to “Icons on the shooting screen.”
2.
Shooting settings
Picture Effect error
Auto HDR error
35mm
Lens focal length
HLG
HDR recording (Hybrid Log-Gamma)
Refer to “Icons on the shooting screen” for other icons displayed in this area.
3.
Image information
Latitude/longitude information
2021-1-1 10:37PM
Date of recording
100-0003
Folder number - file number
C0003
Movie file number
Histogram (Luminance/R/G/B)
4.
38
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
39
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback)
You can change the display contents on the screen.
Histogram display
A histogram shows the luminance distribution, displaying how many pixels there are by luminance. It shows darker
toward the left and brighter toward the right.
The histogram changes depending on the exposure compensation.
A peak at the right or left end of the histogram indicates that the image has an overexposed or underexposed area,
respectively. You cannot correct such defects using a computer after shooting. Perform exposure compensation before
shooting as necessary.
Press the DISP (Display Setting) button.
Each time you press the DISP button, the screen display changes.
The displayed contents and their position are just a guideline, and may differ from the actual display.
During shooting
Display All Info. → No Disp. Info. → Histogram → Level → Graphic Display → Display All Info.
During playback
Display Info. → Histogram → No Disp. Info. → Display Info.
If the image has an overexposed or underexposed area, the corresponding section will blink on the histogram
display (overexposed/underexposed warning).
The settings for playback are also applied in [Auto Review].
1
40
(A): Pixel count
(B): Brightness
Note
[Histogram] is not displayed during panorama shooting.
The information in the histogram display does not indicate the final photograph. It is information about image displayed on the
screen. The final result depends on the aperture value, etc.
The histogram display is extremely different between shooting and playback in the following cases:
When the flash is used
When shooting a low luminance subject such as a night scene
Hint
To change the display modes that are switched when you press the DISP button, select MENU →
(Camera Settings2) →
[DISP Button] and change the setting.
Related Topic
DISP Button
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
41
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
DISP Button
Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected using DISP (Display Setting) in shooting mode.
Menu item details
Graphic Display :
Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows the shutter speed and aperture value.
Display All Info. :
Shows recording information.
No Disp. Info. :
Does not show recording information.
Histogram :
Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
Level :
Indicates whether the product is level in both the front-back (A) and horizontal (B) directions. When the product is level in
either direction, the indicator turns to green.
Note
If you tilt the product forward or backward by a large degree, the level error will be great.
The product may have a margin of error of almost ±1° even when the inclination is corrected by the level.
Related Topic
Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → desired setting → [Enter].
The items marked with
(check mark) are available.
1
42
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Checking the camera and the supplied items
The number in parentheses indicates the number of pieces.
Camera (1)
AC Adaptor (1)
The type of the AC Adaptor may differ depending on the country/region.
Power cord (mains lead) (1)* (supplied in some countries/regions)
NP-FW50 Rechargeable Battery Pack (1)
USB Type-C cable (USB 2.0) (1)
Wind screen (1) (Attached to the wind screen adaptor)
Wind screen adaptor (1)
Shoulder Strap (1)
Body Cap (1)
Only for the ZV-E10
Startup Guide (1)
Reference Guide (1)
Multiple power cords may be supplied with your camera. Use the appropriate one that matches your country/region.
*
43
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
44
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
E PZ 16–50mm F3.5–5.6 OSS (Power zoom)
Specifications
Focal length: 16 mm – 50 mm
Equivalent 35 mm-format focal length
*1
: 24 – 75 mm
Lens groups – elements: 8 – 9
Angle of view
*1
: 83° – 32°
Minimum focus
*2
: 0.25 – 0.3 m (0.82 – 1 ft.)
Maximum magnification: 0.215×
Minimum aperture: f/22 – f/36
Filter diameter: 40.5 mm
Dimensions (max. diameter × height): Approx. 64.7 mm × 29.9 mm (Approx. 2 5/8 inches × 1 3/16 inches)
Mass: Approx. 116 g (Approx. 4.1 oz.)
SteadyShot: Available
Supplied items
Lens (1), Front Lens Cap (1)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Zooming/Focusing ring1.
Zooming lever2.
Mounting index3.
Lens contacts*4.
Do not touch this part directly.
*
The values for equivalent 35 mm-format focal length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image
sensor.
*1
Minimum focus is the shortest distance from the image sensor to the subject.
*2
45
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Inserting/removing the battery pack
To remove the battery pack
Make sure that the access lamp is not lit, and turn off the camera. Then, slide the lock lever (A) and remove the battery
pack. Be careful not to drop the battery pack.
Open the battery/memory card cover by sliding the switch on it.
1
Insert the battery pack while pressing the lock lever (A) with the tip of the battery until the battery locks into
place.
2
Close the cover, and then slide the switch towards the LOCK side.
3
46
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
47
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Charging the battery pack while it is inserted in the camera
Note
If the charge lamp flashes when the battery pack is not fully charged, remove the battery pack or disconnect the USB cable from
the camera and then re-insert it to recharge.
If the charge lamp on the camera flashes when the AC Adaptor is connected to the wall outlet (wall socket), this indicates that
charging is temporarily stopped because the temperature is outside the recommended range. When the temperature gets back
within the appropriate range, the charging resumes. We recommend charging the battery pack at an ambient temperature of
between 10°C to 30°C (50ºF to 86ºF).
Use a nearby wall outlet (wall socket) when using the AC Adaptor/Battery Charger. If any malfunction occurs, disconnect the plug
from the wall outlet (wall socket) immediately to disconnect from the power source.
If you use the product with a charge lamp, note that the product is not disconnected from the power source even when the lamp
turns off.
If you turn on the camera, power will be supplied from the wall outlet (wall socket) and you will be able to operate the camera.
However, the battery pack will not be charged.
When you use a completely new battery pack or a battery pack that has not been used for a long time, the charge lamp may flash
quickly when the battery is charged. If this happens, remove the battery pack or disconnect the USB cable from the camera and
then re-insert it to recharge.
Do not continuously or repeatedly charge the battery pack without using it if it is already fully charged or close to fully charged.
Doing so may cause a deterioration in battery performance.
Turn the power off.
1
Connect the camera with the battery pack inserted to the AC Adaptor (supplied) using the USB cable, and
connect the AC Adaptor to the wall outlet (wall socket).
Charge lamp on the camera (orange)
Lit: Charging
Off: Charging finished
Flashing: Charging error or charging paused temporarily because the camera is not within the proper temperature
range
Charging time (Full charge): The charging time is approximately 150 min.
The above charging time applies when charging a fully depleted battery pack at a temperature of 25 °C (77 °F).
Charging may take longer depending on conditions of use and circumstances.
The charge lamp turns off when charging is completed.
If the charge lamp lights up and then immediately turns off, the battery pack is fully charged.
2
48
When charging is finished, disconnect the AC Adaptor from the wall outlet (wall socket).
Be sure to use only genuine Sony brand battery packs, USB cables (supplied) and AC Adaptors (supplied).
Related Topic
Notes on the battery pack
Notes on charging the battery pack
Using the AC Adaptor/battery charger abroad
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
49
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Charging by connecting to a computer
The battery pack can be charged by connecting the camera to a computer using a USB cable.
Note
If the product is connected to a laptop computer that is not connected to a power source, the laptop battery level decreases. Do
not leave the product connected to a laptop computer for an extended period of time.
Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB connection has been established
between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or
waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.
Proper operation cannot be guaranteed on all types of computers.
Charging cannot be guaranteed with a custom-built computer, modified computer, or a computer connected through a USB hub.
The camera may not operate correctly when other USB devices are used at the same time.
Related Topic
Notes on the battery pack
Notes on charging the battery pack
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Turn off the product, and connect to the USB terminal of the computer.
1
50
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Battery life and number of recordable images
Number of images when shooting still images
Approx. 440 images
Battery life when shooting movies
The above estimates for battery life and number of recordable images apply when the battery pack has been fully
charged. The battery life and number of images may decrease depending on the conditions of use.
The battery life and number of recordable images are estimates based on shooting with the default settings under the
following conditions:
Using the battery pack at an ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F).
Using a Sony SDXC memory card (U3) (sold separately)
Using a E PZ 16-50mm F3.5-5.6 OSS lens
The numbers of recordable still images are based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the following conditions:
(CIPA: Camera & Imaging Products Association)
One picture is taken every 30 seconds.
The power is turned on and off once every ten times.
The zoom is switched alternately between the W and T ends.
The number of minutes for movie shooting is based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the following
conditions:
The image quality is set to XAVC S HD 60p 50M /50p 50M.
Actual shooting (movies): Battery life based on repeated shooting, zooming, shooting stand-by, turning on/off, etc.
Continuous shooting (movies): No operations other than starting and ending shooting are performed.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Actual shooting of movies Approx. 80 min.
Continuous shooting of movies Approx. 125 min.
51
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)
Use the supplied AC adaptor to shoot and play back images while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). This
conserves the camera's battery power.
Note
The camera will not activate if there is no remaining battery. Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the camera.
If you use the camera while power is being supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket), make sure that the icon that shows that
powering via USB is in progress (
) is displayed on the monitor.
Do not remove the battery pack while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). If you remove the battery pack, the
camera will be turned off.
Do not remove the battery pack while the access lamp is lit. The data in the memory card may be damaged.
As long as the power is on, the battery pack will not be charged even if the camera is connected to the AC Adaptor.
Under certain conditions, power may be supplied from the battery pack supplementarily even if you are using the AC adaptor.
Do not remove the USB cable while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). Before you remove the USB cable, turn off
the camera.
Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the continuous recording time may be shortened while power is supplied
from a wall outlet (wall socket).
When using a mobile charger as a power source, confirm that it is fully charged before use. Also, be careful of the remaining
power on the mobile charger during use.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Insert the battery pack into the camera.
1
Connect the camera to the wall outlet (wall socket) with a USB cable and the AC adaptor (supplied).
2
52
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Notes on the battery pack
Notes on using the battery pack
Be sure to use only battery packs specified for this product.
The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.
Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.
Do not leave the battery pack in extremely hot places, such as in a car or under direct sunlight.
Charging the battery pack
Charge the battery pack (supplied) before using the product for the first time.
The charged battery pack will discharge little by little even if you do not use it. Charge the battery pack each time
before you use the product so that you do not miss any opportunities to shoot images.
Do not charge battery packs except battery packs specified for this product. Doing so can result in leaks,
overheating, explosions, electric shocks, burns, or injuries.
If the charge lamp flashes when the battery pack is not fully charged, remove the battery pack or disconnect the USB
cable from the camera and then reinsert it to recharge.
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 °F and 86 °F).
The battery pack may not be effectively charged in temperatures outside this range.
When you connect this product and a laptop computer that is not connected to a power source, the laptop’s battery
charge may decrease. Do not charge this product using the laptop computer for too long.
Do not turn on/restart a computer, wake a computer from sleep mode, or turn off a computer while this product is
connected to the computer via USB cable. Doing so may cause a malfunction of this product. Disconnect the product
and the computer before performing the above operations.
We do not guarantee charging if you are using a self-built or modified computer.
When charging is finished, disconnect the AC Adaptor from the wall outlet (wall socket) or disconnect the USB cable
from the camera. Not doing so may result in a shorter battery life.
Remaining battery indicator
The remaining battery indicator appears on the screen.
A: Battery level high
B: Battery exhausted
It takes about one minute for the correct remaining battery indicator to appear.
The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.
If the remaining battery indicator does not appear on the screen, press the DISP (Display Setting) button to display it.
Effective use of the battery pack
Battery performance decreases in low temperature environments. So in cold places, the operational time of the
battery pack is shorter. To ensure longer battery pack use, we recommend putting the battery pack in your pocket
close to your body to warm it up, and insert it in the product immediately before you start shooting. If there are any
metal objects such as keys in your pocket, be careful of causing a short-circuit.
The battery pack will run down quickly if you use the flash or continuous shooting function frequently, turn the power
on/off frequently, or set the monitor very bright.
We recommend preparing spare battery packs and taking trial shots before taking the actual shots.
53
If the battery terminal is dirty, you may not be able to turn on the product or the battery pack may not be properly
charged. In that case, clean the battery by lightly wiping off any dust using a soft cloth or a cotton swab.
How to store the battery pack
To maintain the battery pack’s function, charge the battery pack and then fully discharge it in the camera at least once a
year before storing it. Store the battery in a cool, dry place after removing it from the camera.
On battery life
The battery life is limited. If you use the same battery repeatedly, or use the same battery for a long period, the
battery capacity decreases gradually. If the available time of the battery is shortened significantly, it is probably time
to replace the battery pack with a new one.
The battery life varies according to how the battery pack is stored and the operating conditions and environment in
which each battery pack is used.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
54
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Notes on charging the battery pack
The supplied AC Adaptor is dedicated to this product. Do not connect with other electronic devices. Doing so may
cause a malfunction.
Make sure to use a genuine Sony AC Adaptor.
If the product's charge lamp flashes while charging, remove the battery pack being charged, and then insert the
same battery pack firmly back into the product. If the charge lamp flashes again, this may indicate a faulty battery or
that a battery pack other than the specified type has been inserted. Check that the battery pack is the specified type.
If the battery pack is the specified type, remove the battery pack, replace it with a new or different one and check that
the newly inserted battery is charging correctly. If the newly inserted battery is charging correctly, the previously
inserted battery may be faulty.
If the charge lamp flashes even if the AC Adaptor is connected to the product and the wall outlet (wall socket), this
indicates that charging has stopped temporarily and is on standby. Charging stops and enters standby status
automatically when the temperature is outside of the recommended operating temperature. When the temperature
returns to the appropriate range, charging resumes and the charge lamp lights up again. We recommend charging
the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F).
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
55
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Inserting/removing a memory card
Explains how to insert a memory card (sold separately) to the product.
Hint
When you use a memory card with the camera for the first time, it is recommended that you format the card on the camera for
more stable performance of the memory card.
Open the battery/memory card cover by sliding the switch on it.
1
Insert the memory card.
With the notched corner facing in the direction illustrated, insert the memory card until it clicks into place. Insert
the memory card correctly. Not doing so may cause a malfunction.
2
Close the cover, and then slide the switch to the locked position.
3
56
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Memory cards that can be used
When using microSD memory cards or Memory Stick Micro media with this camera, be sure to use the appropriate
adaptor.
SD memory cards
Memory Stick media
Note
When an SDHC memory card is used to record an XAVC S movie over extended periods of time, the recorded movies will be
divided into files 4 GB in size.
Charge the battery pack sufficiently before attempting to recover the database files on the memory card.
Related Topic
Notes on memory card
Number of recordable images
Recordable movie times
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Recording format Supported memory card
Still image SD/SDHC/SDXC card
XAVC S 4K 60Mbps*
XAVC S HD 50Mbps or lower*
XAVC S HD 60Mbps
SDHC/SDXC card (Class 10, or U1 or faster)
XAVC S 4K 100Mbps*
XAVC S HD 100Mbps
SDHC/SDXC card (U3)
Including when recording proxy movies at the same time
*
Recording format Supported memory card
Still image Memory Stick PRO Duo, Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo
XAVC S 4K 60Mbps*
XAVC S HD 50Mbps or lower*
XAVC S HD 60Mbps
Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo
XAVC S 4K 100Mbps*
XAVC S HD 100Mbps
Including when recording proxy movies at the same time
*
58
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Notes on memory card
If you repeatedly shoot and delete images for a long time, fragmentation of data in a file in the memory card may
occur, and movie recording may be interrupted in the middle of shooting. If this happens, save your images to a
computer or other storage location, then execute [Format] using this camera.
Do not remove the battery pack or the memory card, disconnect the USB cable, or turn the camera off while the
access lamp is lit up. This may cause the data on the memory card to become damaged.
Be sure to back up the data for protection.
Not all memory cards are guaranteed to operate correctly.
Images recorded on an SDXC memory card cannot be imported to or played on computers or AV devices that are
not compatible with exFAT when connected using a USB cable. Make sure that the device is compatible with exFAT
before connecting it to the camera. If you connect your camera to an incompatible device, you may be prompted to
format the card. Never format the card in response to this prompt, as doing so will erase all data on the card. (exFAT
is the file system used on SDXC memory cards.)
Do not expose the memory card to water.
Do not strike, bend or drop the memory card.
Do not use or store the memory card under the following conditions:
High temperature locations such as in a car parked under the sun
Locations exposed to direct sunlight
Humid locations or locations with corrosive substances present
If the memory card is used near areas with strong magnetization, or used in locations subject to static electricity or
electrical noise, the data on the memory card may become damaged.
Do not touch the terminal section of the memory card with your hand or a metal object.
Do not leave the memory card within the reach of small children. They might accidentally swallow it.
Do not disassemble or modify the memory card.
The memory card may be hot just after it has been used for a long time. Be careful when you handle it.
Memory card formatted with a computer is not guaranteed to operate with the product. Format the memory card
using this product.
Data read/write speeds differ depending on the combination of the memory card and the equipment used.
Do not press down hard when writing in the memo space on the memory card.
Do not attach a label on the memory card itself nor on a memory card adaptor.
If the write-protect switch or delete-protect switch of a memory card is set to the LOCK position, you cannot record or
delete images. In this case, set the switch to the record position.
To use a Memory Stick Micro media or microSD memory card with this product:
Be sure to insert the memory card into a dedicated adaptor. If you insert a memory card into the product without a
memory card adaptor, you might not be able to remove it from the product.
When inserting a memory card into a memory card adaptor, be sure that the memory card is inserted in the
correct direction and then insert it as far as it will go. If the card is not inserted properly, it may result in a
malfunction.
About Memory Stick PRO Duo media and Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo media:
This Memory Stick is equipped with MagicGate function. MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses
encryption technology.
Data recording/playback that requires MagicGate functions cannot be performed with this product.
High-speed data transfer using a parallel interface is supported.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
59
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Attaching/removing a lens
Turn off the camera before attaching or removing the lens.
Remove the body cap (A) from the camera and the rear lens cap (B) from the rear of the lens.
It is recommended that you attach the front lens cap when you have done shooting.
1
Mount the lens by aligning the two white index marks (mounting indexes) on the lens and camera.
Hold the camera with the lens mount facing down to prevent dust and debris from entering the camera.
2
While pushing the lens lightly toward the camera, turn the lens slowly in the direction of the arrow until it
clicks into the locked position.
3
60
To remove the lens
Keep pressing the lens release button (A) and turn the lens in the direction of the arrow until it stops.
After removing the lens, attach the body cap to the camera and the lens caps to the front and rear of the lens to prevent
dust and debris from entering the camera and lens.
Lens hood
We recommend that you use the lens hood to prevent light outside the shooting frame from affecting the image. Attach
the lens hood so that the indexes on the lens and lens hood are aligned.
(There may be no lens hood index on some lenses.)
Note
When attaching/removing the lens, work quickly in a dust-free location.
Do not press the lens release button when attaching a lens.
Do not use force when attaching a lens.
A Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is required to use an A-mount lens (sold separately). When using the Mount Adaptor, refer to
the operating manual supplied with the Mount Adaptor.
When you use a lens with a tripod socket, attach a tripod to the tripod socket of the lens to help balance the weight of the lens.
When carrying the camera with a lens attached, hold both the camera and the lens firmly.
Do not hold the part of the lens that is extended for zoom or focus adjustment.
Attach the lens hood properly. Otherwise, the lens hood may not have any effect or may be partially reflected in the image.
Remove the lens hood when using the flash as the lens hood blocks the flash light and may appear as a shadow on the image.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Be sure to hold the lens straight when attaching it.
61
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Mount Adaptor
Using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately), you can attach an A-mount lens (sold separately) to this product.
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the Mount Adaptor.
Note
When a setting other than [Continuous Shooting: Lo] is selected for [Cont. Shooting], the focus is locked during the first shot,
even if [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
You may not be able to use the Mount Adaptor or auto-focus with certain lenses. Consult your Sony dealer or local authorized
Sony service facility on compatible lenses.
The sound of the lens and the product in operation may be recorded during movie recording.
You can turn the sound off by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → [Off].
It may take a long time or may be difficult for the product to focus, depending on the lens used or the subject.
Related Topic
LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor
LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
62
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor
If you use the LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) or LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following
functions are available.
Autofocus:
Available with SAM/SSM lens only
AF system:
Phase Detection AF
AF/MF select:
Can be changed using the operating switch on the lens.
Focus Mode:
Single-shot AF/Continuous AF
When using a Mount Adaptor in the movie mode, adjust the aperture value and the focus manually.
Available focus area:
[Wide]/[Zone]/[Center]/[Flexible Spot]/[Expand Flexible Spot]/[Tracking]
Related Topic
Focus Area
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
63
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor
If you use the LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following functions are available.
Autofocus:
Available
AF system:
Phase Detection AF, which is controlled by the dedicated AF sensor inside the Mount Adaptor
AF/MF select:
Lenses that do not support DMF (with a focus mode switch): Can be changed using the focus mode switch on the lens.
Lenses that support DMF (with a focus mode switch): Can be changed using the focus mode switch on the lens. When
the focus mode switch on the lens is set to AF, you can change the focusing method by operating the camera.
Other lenses (without a focus mode switch): Can be changed by operating the camera.
Focus Mode:
Single-shot AF/Continuous AF/Automatic AF/DMF*
Available focus area:
Wide/Center/Flexible Spot/Tracking
Related Topic
Focus Area
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Only available when using lenses that support Direct Manual Focus.
*
64
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Setting language, date and time
The setting screen for language, date and time is displayed automatically when you turn on this product for the first time,
initialize this product or when the internal rechargeable backup battery has discharged.
On maintaining the date and time
This camera has an internal rechargeable battery for maintaining the date and time and other settings regardless of
whether the power is on or off, or whether the battery pack is charged or discharged.
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack into the camera, and leave the product
for 24 hours or more with the power off.
If the clock resets every time the battery pack is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out.
Consult your service facility.
Hint
To set the date and time or geographic location again after the date and time setting is finished, select MENU →
(Setup) →
[Date/Time Setup] or [Area Setting].
Note
If the date and time setting is canceled halfway, the setting screen for the date and time appears every time you turn on the
camera.
Related Topic
Turn on the camera.
The language setting screen will appear and then setting screen for date and time will appear.
1
Select your language, and then press the center of the control wheel.
2
Check that [Enter] is selected on the screen, then press the center.
3
Select your desired geographic location, and then press the center.
4
Select a setting item using the top/bottom side of the control wheel or by turning the control wheel, then
press the center.
5
Set [Daylight Savings], [Date/Time], and [Date Format] using the top/bottom/left/right sides, then press the
center.
Midnight is indicated as 12:00 AM, and noon as 12:00 PM when you set [Date/Time].
Change the values using the top/bottom when you set [Date/Time].
6
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to set other items, then select [Enter] and press the center.
7
65
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
In-Camera Guide
The [In-Camera Guide] displays descriptions of MENU items, Fn (Function) items, and settings.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Select the MENU or Fn item for which you want to see a description, and then press the
(Delete) button
(A).
The descriptions of the item are displayed.
1
67
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Shooting still images
To shoot images with the focus locked on the desired subject (Focus-lock)
Shoots images with the focus locked on the desired subject in auto focus mode.
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button (A) to select the still image shooting mode.
Each time you press the button, the shooting mode switches in the order of still image shooting mode, movie
recording mode, and slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Shoot Mode] → desired shooting mode.
2
Adjust the monitor angle, and hold the camera.
3
When a zoom lens is mounted, enlarge images by rotating the zoom ring.
When using a power zoom lens, you can also enlarge images using the W/T (zoom) lever on the camera.
4
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
A green focusing frame is displayed around the area that is in focus.
5
Press the shutter button fully down.
6
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → [Single-shot AF] or [Automatic AF].1.
Place the subject within the AF area and press the shutter button halfway down.2.
68
Hint
When the camera cannot focus automatically, the green focusing frame is not displayed. Either recompose the shot or change
the focus setting.
The beep indicating that focus has been achieved sounds when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF], [Automatic AF], or
[DMF].
Note
An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do not remove the memory card while the icon is
displayed.
When the subject is moving, you cannot lock the focus even if [Focus Mode] has been set to [Automatic AF].
Related Topic
Using MENU items
Playing back still images
Auto Review
Focus Mode
Focus Area
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
The focus is locked.
If it is difficult to focus on the desired subject, set [Focus Area] to [Center] or [Flexible Spot].
Keep pressing the shutter button halfway down, and place the subject back in the original position to re-compose the
shot.
3.
Press the shutter button down fully to take the picture.4.
69
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Focus Mode
Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.
Menu item details
(Single-shot AF):
The product locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.
(Automatic AF):
[Single-shot AF] and [Continuous AF] are switched according to the movement of the subject. When the shutter button is
pressed halfway down, the product locks the focus when it determines that the subject is motionless, or continues to
focus when the subject is in motion. During continuous shooting, the product automatically shoots with Continuous AF
from the second shot.
(Continuous AF):
The product continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use this when the subject is
in motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera focuses.
(DMF):
You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than
when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.
(Manual Focus):
Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using auto focus, use manual focus.
Focus indicator
(lit):
The subject is in focus and the focus is locked.
(flashing):
The subject is not in focus.
(lit):
The subject is in focus. The focus will be adjusted continuously according to the movements of the subject.
(lit):
Focusing is in progress.
Subjects on which it is difficult to focus using auto focus
Dark and distant subjects
Subjects with poor contrast
Subjects seen through glass
Fast-moving subjects
Reflective light or shiny surfaces
Flashing light
Back-lit subjects
Continuously repetitive patterns, such as the facades of buildings
Subjects in the focusing area with different focal distances
Hint
In [Continuous AF] mode, you can lock the focus by pressing and holding the button that has been assigned the [Focus Hold]
function.
When you set the focus to infinity in the manual focus mode or the direct manual focus mode, make sure that the focus is on a
sufficiently distant subject by checking the monitor.
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → desired setting.
1
70
Note
[Automatic AF] is available only when you are using a lens that supports phase detection AF.
When [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] is set, the angle of view may change little by little while focusing. This does not affect
the actual recorded images.
Only [Continuous AF] and [Manual Focus] are available when recording movies or recording slow-motion/quick-motion movies.
Related Topic
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Manual Focus
MF Assist (still image)
Phase detection AF
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
71
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Focus Area
Selects the focusing area. Use this function when it is difficult to focus properly in the auto focus mode.
Menu item details
Wide :
Focuses on a subject covering the whole range of the screen automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway
down in the still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed around the area that is in focus.
Zone :
Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.
Center :
Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. Use together with the focus-lock function to create the
composition you want.
Flexible Spot :
Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a
narrow area.
Expand Flexible Spot :
If the product cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority
area for focusing.
Tracking:
When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus
area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to [Continuous AF]. Point the cursor at [Tracking] on the
[Focus Area] setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the control
wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a zone, flexible spot or
expand flexible spot.
Examples of the focusing frame display
The focusing frame differs as follows.
When focusing on a larger area
When focusing on a smaller area
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area] → desired setting.
Only [Wide], [Zone], [Flexible Spot: L], [Tracking: Zone], and [Tracking: Flexible Spot L] are displayed as options
in the default settings. To select other types of focus areas, add a check mark to the focus areas you want to
use with the [Focus Area Limit] function.
1
72
When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], the focusing frame may switch between “When focusing on a larger
area” and “When focusing on a smaller area” depending on the subject or situation.
When you attach an A-mount lens with a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA3 or LA-EA5) (sold separately), the focusing frame
for “When focusing on a smaller area” may be displayed.
When focus is achieved automatically based on the whole range of the monitor
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [Focus Area] setting is disabled and the focusing
frame is shown by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority on and around the center area.
To move the focus area
When [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot], if pressing the button to which [Focus
Standard] is assigned, you can shoot while moving the focusing frame using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the
control wheel. To return the focusing frame to the center of the monitor, press the
(Delete) button while moving
the frame. To change the shooting settings using the control wheel, press the button to which [Focus Standard] is
assigned.
You can move the focusing frame quickly by touching and dragging it on the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On],
and set [Func. of Touch Operation] to [Touch Focus] beforehand.
To track the subject temporarily (Tracking On/Tracking On + AF On)
You can temporarily change the [Focus Mode] setting to [Continuous AF] and the [Focus Area] setting to [Tracking] for as
long as you press and hold down the custom key to which you have assigned [Tracking On] or [Tracking On + AF On] in
advance. The [Focus Area] setting before you activated [Tracking On] or [Tracking On + AF On] will switch to the
equivalent [Tracking] setting.
For example:
This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF], [Automatic AF], [Continuous AF], or [DMF].
[Focus Area] before you activate [Tracking
On]/[Tracking On + AF On]
[Focus Area] while [Tracking On]/[Tracking On + AF
On] is active
[Wide] [Tracking: Wide]
[Flexible Spot: S] [Tracking: Flexible Spot S]
[Expand Flexible Spot] [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]
73
Note
[Focus Area] is locked to [Wide] in the following situations:
Each mode in scene selection
The focus area may not light up during continuous shooting or when the shutter button is pressed all the way down at once.
When movie recording mode or slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode is selected or during movie recording, [Tracking]
cannot be selected as the [Focus Area].
You cannot execute functions assigned to the control wheel or the
(Delete) button while moving the focusing frame.
Related Topic
Focus Area Limit
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
Touch Operation
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
74
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Focus Area Limit
By limiting the types of available focus area settings in advance, you can more quickly select settings for [Focus Area].
The available settings are limited to [Wide], [Zone], [Flexible Spot: L], [Tracking: Zone], and [Tracking: Flexible Spot
L] in the default settings.
Hint
When you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a desired key by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [
Custom Key], the focus area changes every time you press the assigned key. By limiting the types of selectable focus areas
with [Focus Area Limit] in advance, you can more quickly select the focus area setting you want.
If you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a custom key, it is recommended that you limit the types of focus areas with [Focus Area
Limit].
Note
Types of focus areas that do not have a check mark cannot be selected using MENU or the Fn (function) menu. To select one,
add a check mark using [Focus Area Limit].
Related Topic
Focus Area
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area Limit] → Add check marks to the focus areas that you
want to use, and then select [OK].
The types of focus areas marked with
(check mark) will be available as settings.
1
75
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Phase detection AF
When there are phase detection AF points within the auto focus area, the product uses the combined autofocus of the
phase detection AF and contrast AF.
Note
Phase detection AF is available only when an applicable lens is attached. If you use a lens that does not support phase detection
AF, you cannot use the following functions.
Automatic AF
AF Transition Speed
AF Subj. Shift Sens.
Also, even if you use a previously purchased applicable lens, the phase detection AF might not function unless you update the
lens. For details on compatible lenses, visit the Sony web site in your area, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony
service facility.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
76
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Focus Standard
If you assign [Focus Standard] to the desired custom key, you can recall useful functions such as moving the focusing
frame quickly, etc., depending on the focus area settings.
When [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Zone], [Tracking: Flexible
Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]:
Pressing the key moves the position of the focusing frame using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide], [Center], [Tracking: Wide] or [Tracking: Center]:
The camera focuses on the center of the screen when you press the key.
Note
You cannot set the [Focus Standard] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button].
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Focus Area
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → the desired key, and then assign the
[Focus Standard] function to the key.
To use the [Focus Standard] function while shooting movies, select MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [
Custom Key] → the desired key, and then assign [Focus Standard] to the key.
1
Press the key to which [Focus Standard] is assigned.
What you can do by pressing the key varies depending on the setting for [Focus Area].
2
77
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
AF/MF control
You can easily switch the focusing mode from auto to manual and vice versa while shooting without changing your
holding position.
Menu item details
AF/MF Control Hold :
Switches the focusing mode while the button is held down.
AF/MF Ctrl Toggle :
Switches the focusing mode until the button is pressed again.
Note
You cannot set the [AF/MF Control Hold] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button] of the control wheel.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → desired button → [AF/MF
Control Hold] or [AF/MF Ctrl Toggle].
1
78
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
AF w/ shutter (still image)
Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select [Off] to adjust the focus
and the exposure separately.
Menu item details
On:
The auto focus operates when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
The auto focus does not operate even if you press the shutter button halfway down.
Useful method to micro-adjust the focus
When an A-mount lens is attached, activating the auto focus function with a button other than the shutter button lets you
focus more precisely in combination with manual focusing.
Related Topic
AF On
Pre-AF (still image)
Focus Magnifier
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ AF w/ shutter] → desired setting.
1
Set [
AF w/ shutter] to [Off].1.
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → assign the [AF On] and [Focus
Magnifier] functions to the desired keys.
2.
Press the key to which the [AF On] function is assigned.3.
Press the key to which the [Focus Magnifier] function is assigned, and then rotate the focus ring for micro-
adjustments of the focus.
4.
Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.5.
79
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
AF On
You can focus without pressing the shutter button halfway down. The settings for [Focus Mode] will be applied.
Hint
Set [
AF w/ shutter] to [Off] when you do not want to perform auto focusing using the shutter button.
Set [
AF w/ shutter] and [ Pre-AF] to [Off] to focus at a specific shooting distance predicting the position of the subject.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
AF w/ shutter (still image)
Pre-AF (still image)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU→
(Camera Settings2)→[ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] →desired key, then assign the [AF
On] function to the key.
1
Press the key to which you have assigned the [AF On] function while auto-focus shooting.
2
80
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)
[Face/Eye AF Set.] is used to determine whether or not the camera focuses with priority on faces/eyes.
There are two methods for performing [Eye AF], with some differences between their specifications. Select the
appropriate method according to your purpose.
Item [Eye AF] via [Face/Eye AF Set.]
[Eye AF] via a custom key
Details can be found here.
Subject detection
The camera will detect faces/eyes with greater
priority.
The camera will detect faces/eyes
exclusively.
Advance
preparation
Select [Face/Eye AF Set.] → [Face/Eye Priority in
AF] → [On].
Assign [Eye AF] to the desired key using [
Custom Key] or [ Custom Key].
How to perform
[Eye AF]
Press the shutter button halfway down.
Press the key to which you have assigned
the [Eye AF] function*.
Specifications
When the camera detects a face or eye inside
or around the designated focus area, it
focuses on the face or eye with greater
priority.
If the camera does not detect any faces or
eyes inside or around the designated focus
area, it will focus on another detectable
subject.
The camera focuses exclusively on
faces or eyes anywhere on the screen,
regardless of the setting for [Focus
Area].
The camera will not automatically focus
on another subject if no face or eye is
detected anywhere on the screen.
Focus mode Follows the setting designated with [Focus Mode]
Follows the setting designated with [Focus
Mode]
Focus area Follows the setting designated with [Focus Area]
The focus area temporarily becomes the
entire screen, regardless of the setting for
[Focus Area].
How the following
functions under
[Face/Eye AF Set.]
work
Subject
Detection
Right/Left Eye
Select
Face/Eye
Frame Display
Animal Eye
Display
Follows the setting designated with each menu
item
Follows the setting designated with each
menu item
Regardless of whether [Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.] is set to [On] or [Off], you can use [Eye AF] via a custom key while
you are pressing the custom key to which you have assigned [Eye AF].
*
81
Hint
Maintaining focus on a moving eye or face (Eye AF + Tracking)
If you adjust the settings under [Face/Eye AF Set.] to focus on faces or eyes, the focusing frame will automatically move to a face
or eye when faces or eyes are detected while tracking subjects with the tracking function.
Menu item details
Face/Eye Priority in AF :
Sets whether or not to detect faces or eyes inside the focusing area and focus on the eyes (Eye AF) when autofocus is
activated. ([On]/[Off])
(Note: The camera operations are different when using the custom key to execute [Eye AF].)
Subject Detection :
Selects the target to be detected.
[Human]: Detects human faces/eyes.
[Animal]: Detects animal eyes. Animal faces are not detected.
Right/Left Eye Select :
Specifies the eye to be detected when [Subject Detection] is set to [Human]. If [Right Eye] or [Left Eye] is selected, only
the selected eye is detected. When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], [Right/Left Eye Select] cannot be used.
[Auto]: The camera detects eyes automatically.
[Right Eye]: The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
[Left Eye]: The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
Face/Eye Frame Display :
Sets whether or not to display the face/eye detection frame when a human face or eyes are detected. ([On]/[Off])
Animal Eye Display :
Sets whether or not to display the eye detection frame when the eye of an animal is detected. ([On]/[Off])
Face detection frame
When the product detects a face, the gray face detection frame appears. When the product determines that autofocus is
enabled, the face detection frame turns white. Up to 8 faces of your subjects can be detected.
In case you have registered the priority order for each face using [Face Registration], the product automatically selects
the first prioritized face and the face detection frame over that face turns white. The face detection frames of other
registered faces turn reddish-purple.
Eye detection frame
A white eye detection frame appears when an eye is detected and the camera determines that autofocusing is possible,
depending on the settings.
The eye detection frame is displayed when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal].
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Face/Eye AF Set.] → desired setting item.
1
82
[Eye AF] by custom key
The Eye AF function can also be used by assigning [Eye AF] to a custom key. The camera can focus on eyes as long as
you are pressing the key. This is useful when you want to temporarily apply the Eye AF function to the entire screen
regardless of the setting for [Focus Area]. The camera does not focus automatically if no faces or eyes are detected.
(Note: When you try to focus on eyes by pressing the shutter button halfway down, the camera only detects faces or
eyes inside or around the focus area designated with [Focus Area]. If the camera detects no faces or eyes, it performs
normal auto-focusing.)
[Switch Right/Left Eye] by custom key
When [Subject Detection] is set to [Human] and [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Right Eye] or [Left Eye], you can switch
the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
When [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], you can temporarily switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom
key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
The temporary left/right selection is cancelled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to
automatic eye detection.
Pressing the center of the control wheel
Stopping pressing the shutter button halfway down (only during still image shooting)
Stopping pressing the custom key to which [AF On] or [Eye AF]
is assigned (only during still image shooting)
Pressing the MENU button
Hint
When [Right/Left Eye Select] is not set to [Auto], or you execute [Switch Right/Left Eye] using the custom key, the eye detection
frame appears. Even when [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], if [Face/Eye Frame Display] is set to [On], the eye detection
frame will appear over detected eyes during movie shooting.
If you want the face or eye detection frame to disappear within a certain period of time after the camera has focused on the face
or eye, set [AF Area Auto Clear] to [On].
Note
When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the following functions cannot be used.
Right/Left Eye Select
Eye detection when shooting movies
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Regist. Faces Priority
Soft Skin Effect
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → desired key, then assign the [Eye
AF] function to the key.
1.
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Face/Eye AF Set.] → [Subject Detection] → desired setting.2.
Point the camera at the face of a human or animal, and press the key to which you have assigned the [Eye AF]
function.
To shoot a still image, press the shutter button while pressing the key.
3.
83
The [Eye AF] function may not function properly under certain conditions, such as in the following situations.
When the person is wearing sunglasses.
When the front hair covers the person’s eyes.
In low-light or back-lit conditions.
When the eyes are closed.
When the subject is in the shade.
When the subject is out of focus.
When the subject is moving too much.
If the subject is moving too much, the detection frame may not be displayed correctly over their eyes.
When the camera cannot focus on human eyes, it will detect and focus on the face instead. The camera cannot focus on eyes
when no human faces are detected.
The product may not detect faces at all or may accidentally detect other objects as faces in some conditions.
The eye detection frame is not displayed when the Eye AF function is unavailable.
You cannot use the face/eye detection function in the following situations:
When using a zoom function other than the optical zoom
When the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama]
When the shooting mode is set to [Landscape], [Night Scene], or [Sunset] in scene selection
When [Picture Effect] is set to [Posterization]
When using the focus magnifier function
When shooting movies with [
Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p]
When [
Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps] during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [ Record Setting] is set to [30p 100M]/[25p 100M] or [30p 60M]/[25p 60M],
and [
4K Output Select] is set to [Memory Card+HDMI]
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On]
Even if [Face/Eye Frame Display] or [Animal Eye Display] is set to [Off], a green focusing frame will be displayed over faces or
eyes that are in focus.
To detect animal eyes, arrange the composition so that both eyes and the nose of the animal are within the angle of view. Once
you focus on the animal’s face, the animal’s eyes will be detected more easily.
Even when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the eyes of some types of animals cannot be detected.
Related Topic
Focus Mode
Focus Area
AF Area Auto Clear
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
84
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
AF in Focus Mag. (still image)
You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While
the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.
Hint
Use of a tripod is recommended to accurately identify the location you want to magnify.
You can check the auto-focusing result by magnifying the displayed image. If you want to readjust the focus position, adjust the
focus area on the magnified screen and then press the shutter button halfway down.
Note
If you enlarge an area at the edge of the screen, the camera may not be able to focus.
The exposure and white balance cannot be adjusted while the displayed image is being magnified.
[
AF in Focus Mag.] is unavailable in the following situations:
In [Sweep Panorama] mode
During movie shooting
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and the shooting mode is set to other than [Program Auto], [Aperture Priority],
[Shutter Priority], or [Manual Exposure].
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting].
When using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately).
While the displayed image is being magnified, the following functions are unavailable:
[Eye AF]
[
Pre-AF]
[Face/Eye Priority in AF]
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ AF in Focus Mag.] → [On].
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].
2
Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the position using
top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.
The magnification scale changes each time you press the center.
3
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
The camera will focus on the position of
(plus mark) in the center of the screen.
4
Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.
The camera exits the magnified display after shooting.
5
85
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
This camera has the function of tracking which tracks the subject, and keeps marking it with the focusing frame.
You can set the start position to track by selecting from focusing areas, or by specifying by touch operation. The required
function varies depending on the setting method.
For the examples of usage, etc. of tracking function, refer to the following URL.
For still image shooting:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/zv/zv-e10/l/still_tracking.php
For movie shooting:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/zv/zv-e10/l/movie_tracking.php
You can refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.
Setting the start position to track by focusing area ([Tracking] under [Focus Area])
The selected focusing frame is set as the start position to track, and the tracking starts by pressing the shutter button
halfway down.
This function is available in still image shooting mode.
This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
Setting the start position to track by touch operation ([Touch Tracking] under [Func. of Touch
Operation])
You can set the subject to track by touching it on the monitor.
This function is available in still image shooting mode and movie shooting mode.
This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF], [Automatic AF], [Continuous AF], or [DMF].
Changing the setting for [Focus Area] to [Tracking] temporarily ([Tracking On]/[Tracking On + AF
On] under [
Custom Key])
Even when [Focus Area] is not set to [Tracking], you can temporarily change the setting for [Focus Area] to [Tracking]
and the setting for [Focus Mode] to [Continuous AF]. Press and hold the key to which you have assigned the [Tracking
On]/[Tracking On + AF On] function.
Assign the [Tracking On]/[Tracking On + AF On] function to a desired key using [
Custom Key] in advance.
This function is available in still image shooting mode.
This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF], [Automatic AF], [Continuous AF], or [DMF].
Related Topic
Focus Mode
Focus Area
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
87
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Focus Hold
Locks the focus while the key to which the Focus Hold function has been assigned is pressed.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU→
(Camera Settings2)→[ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] →assign the [Focus Hold]
function to the key of your choice.
1
Focus and press the key to which the [Focus Hold] function has been assigned.
2
Press the shutter button while holding down the key.
3
88
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Focus Frame Color
You can specify the color of the frame indicating the focusing area. If the frame is difficult to see because of the subject,
make it more visible by changing its color.
Menu item details
White:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in white.
Red:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in red.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Frame Color] → desired color.
1
89
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Pre-AF (still image)
The product automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down. During focusing operations,
the screen may shake.
Menu item details
On:
Adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Note
[
Pre-AF] is available only when an E-mount lens is mounted.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Pre-AF] → desired setting.
1
90
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
AF Area Auto Clear
Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is
achieved.
Menu item details
On:
The focus area disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.
Off:
The focus area is displayed all the time.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [AF Area Auto Clear] → desired setting.
1
91
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Disp. cont. AF area
You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], in
[Continuous AF] mode.
Menu item details
On:
Displays the focus area that is in focus.
Off:
Does not display the focus area that is in focus.
Note
When [Focus Area] is set to one of the following, the focusing frames in the area that is in focus turn green:
[Center]
[Flexible Spot]
[Expand Flexible Spot]
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Disp. cont. AF area] → desired setting.
1
92
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
AF Micro Adj.
Allows you to adjust the auto-focusing position and register an adjusted value for each lens when using A-mount lenses
with an LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately).
Use this function only when adjustments are needed. Note that the auto focus function may not be performed at a proper
position when using this adjustment.
Hint
It is recommended that you adjust the position under actual shooting conditions. Set [Focus Area] to [Flexible Spot] and use a
bright subject with high contrast when you adjust.
Note
When you attach a lens for which you have already registered a value, the registered value appears on the screen. [±0] appears
for lenses for which a value has not yet been registered.
If [-] is displayed as the value, then a total of 30 lenses have been registered and no new lens can be registered. To register a
new lens, attach a lens for which the registration can be erased, and set its value to [±0], or reset the values of all the lenses
using [Clear].
The [AF Micro Adj.] supports Sony, Minolta, or Konica-Minolta lenses. If you perform [AF Micro Adj.] with lenses other than the
supported lenses, the registered settings for the supported lenses may be affected. Do not perform [AF Micro Adj.] with an
unsupported lens.
You cannot set [AF Micro Adj.] individually for a Sony, Minolta, and Konica-Minolta lens of the same specification.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [AF Micro Adj.].
1
Select [AF Adjustment Set.] → [On].
2
[amount] → desired value.
The larger the value you select, the farther the autofocused position will be from the product. The smaller the
value you select, the closer the autofocused position will be to the product.
3
93
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Manual Focus
When it is difficult to focus properly in the autofocus mode, you can adjust the focus manually.
Note
The displayed focus distance is just a reference.
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
Peaking Setting
MF Assist (still image)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → [Manual Focus].
1
Rotate the focusing ring to achieve sharp focus.
When you shoot a still image, you can display the focus distance on the screen by rotating the focusing ring.
The focus distance is not displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is attached.
2
94
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Direct manual focus (DMF)
You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than
when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.
Related Topic
Peaking Setting
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → [DMF].
1
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus automatically.
2
Keep the shutter button pressed halfway down, and then rotate the focusing ring to achieve a sharper
focus.
When you rotate the focusing ring, the focus distance is displayed on the screen.
The focus distance is not displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is attached.
3
Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.
4
95
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Focus Magnifier
You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.
Unlike with [
MF Assist], you can magnify the image without operating the focus ring.
To use the focus magnifier function by touch operation
You can magnify the image and adjust the focus by touching the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.
When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can perform [Focus Magnifier] by double-tapping the area to focus on.
Hint
While using the focus magnifier function, you can move the magnified area by dragging it on the touch panel.
To exit the focus magnifier function, double-tap the monitor again. When [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the focus magnifier
function is ended by pressing the shutter button halfway down.
Related Topic
MF Assist (still image)
Focus Magnif. Time
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
AF in Focus Mag. (still image)
Touch Operation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].
1
Press the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the area you want to enlarge using
top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.
Each time you press the center, the magnification scale will change.
You can set the initial magnification by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Initial Focus Mag.].
2
Confirm the focus.
Press the
(Delete) button to bring the magnified position into the center of an image.
When the focus mode is [Manual Focus]
, you can adjust the focus while an image is magnified. If [ AF in
Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled when the shutter button is pressed
halfway down.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway down while an image is magnified during the auto-focusing,
different functions are performed depending on the [
AF in Focus Mag.] setting.
When [
AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [On]: Auto-focusing is performed again.
When [
AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off]: The [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled.
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings1) →
[Focus Magnif. Time].
3
Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.
4
96
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
97
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
MF Assist (still image)
Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier. This works in Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus shooting.
Hint
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif.
Time].
Note
You cannot use [
MF Assist] when shooting movies. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.
[
MF Assist] is not available when a Mount Adaptor is attached. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.
Related Topic
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Focus Magnif. Time
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ MF Assist] → [On].
1
Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.
The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing the center of the control wheel.
2
98
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Focus Magnif. Time
Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the [
MF Assist] or [Focus Magnifier] function.
Menu item details
2 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 2 seconds.
5 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 5 seconds.
No Limit:
Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
MF Assist (still image)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif. Time] → desired setting.
1
99
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.
Menu item details
x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x5.9:
Displays a 5.9-times enlarged image.
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.
1
100
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Peaking Setting
Sets the peaking function, which enhances the outline of in-focus areas during shooting with Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus.
Menu item details
Peaking Display:
Sets whether to display peaking.
Peaking Level:
Sets the level of enhancement of in-focus areas.
Peaking Color:
Sets the color used to enhance in-focus areas.
Note
Since the product recognizes sharp areas as in focus, the effect of peaking differs, depending on the subject and lens.
The outline of in-focus ranges is not enhanced on devices connected via HDMI.
Related Topic
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Peaking Setting] → desired setting.
1
101
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Drive Mode
Select the appropriate mode for the subject, such as single shooting, continuous shooting or bracketing shooting.
Menu item details
Single Shooting :
Normal shooting mode.
Cont. Shooting :
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Self-timer :
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was
pressed.
Self-timer(Cont) :
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed.
Cont. Bracket :
Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of exposure.
Single Bracket :
Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degrees of exposure.
WB bracket :
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color
temperature and color filter.
DRO Bracket :
Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Sports Action] in scene selection, [Single Shooting] cannot be performed.
Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Self-timer
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Select / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel → desired setting.
You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].
1
Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
2
102
103
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Cont. Shooting
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Menu item details
Continuous Shooting: Hi+ :
Images are shot continuously at the maximum speed while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Continuous Shooting: Hi / Continuous Shooting: Mid/ Continuous Shooting: Lo:
Subjects are easier to track because the subject is displayed in real time on the monitor during shooting.
Hint
To continuously adjust the focus and exposure during continuous shooting, set as follows:
[Focus Mode]: [Continuous AF]
Note
The shooting speed during continuous shooting becomes slower when [e-Front Curtain Shutter] is set to [Off] in [Continuous
Shooting: Hi], [Continuous Shooting: Mid] or [Continuous Shooting: Lo] mode.
When the F-value is greater than F11 in [Continuous Shooting: Hi+], [Continuous Shooting: Hi] or [Continuous Shooting: Mid]
mode, the focus is locked to the setting in the first shot.
The subject is not displayed in real time on the monitor when shooting in [Continuous Shooting: Hi+] mode.
Continuous shooting is unavailable in the following situations:
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
The shooting mode is set to each mode in scene selection (other than [Sports Action]).
[Picture Effect]
is set to one of the following: [Soft Focus] [HDR Painting] [Rich-tone Mono.] [Miniature] [Watercolor] [Illustration]
[DRO/Auto HDR] is set to [Auto HDR].
The speed of continuous shooting decreases when you shoot with a flash.
Related Topic
Focus Mode
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Cont. Shooting].
You can also set the continuous shooting by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].
1
Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
2
104
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Self-timer
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was
pressed. Use the 5-second/10-second self-timer when you are going to be in the picture, and use the 2-second self-timer
to reduce camera-shake caused by pressing the shutter button.
Menu item details
The mode determines the number of seconds until a picture is taken after the shutter button is pressed.
Self-timer: 10 Sec
Self-timer: 5 Sec
Self-timer: 2 Sec
Hint
Press the shutter button again or press
/ (Drive Mode) on the control wheel to stop the count of the self-timer.
Press
/ (Drive Mode) on the control wheel and select (Single Shooting) to cancel the self-timer.
Set [Audio signals] to [Off] to turn off the beeping sound during the self-timer countdown.
To use the self-timer in bracket mode, select bracket mode under drive mode, then select MENU →
(Camera Settings1) →
[Bracket Settings] → [Selftimer during Bracket].
Note
The self-timer is unavailable in the following situations:
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
The shooting mode is set to [Sports Action] in scene selection.
Related Topic
Audio signals
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Self-timer].
You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU→
(Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].
1
Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
2
Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and a picture is taken after the designated number of seconds have
elapsed.
3
105
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Self-timer(Cont)
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed. You can choose the best from multiple shots.
Menu item details
For example, three images are shot when 10 seconds have elapsed after the shutter button is pressed when [Self-
timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.] is selected.
Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 5 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 5 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 5 Img.
Hint
Press the shutter button again or press
/ (Drive Mode) on the control wheel to stop the count of the self-timer.
Press
/ (Drive Mode) on the control wheel and select (Single Shooting) to cancel the self-timer.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Self-timer(Cont)].
You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU→
(Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].
1
Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
2
Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and pictures are taken after the designated number of seconds has
elapsed. The designated number of pictures are taken continuously.
3
106
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Cont. Bracket
Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then to lighter. You can select
an image that suits your purpose after recording.
Menu item details
For example, the camera shoots a total of three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 0.3
EV when [Cont. Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected.
Note
The last shot is shown on the auto review.
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other
than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.
When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.
Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
Each mode in scene selection
[Sweep Panorama]
When the flash is used, the product performs flash bracket shooting, which shifts the amount of flash light even if [Cont. Bracket]
is selected. Press the shutter button for each image.
Related Topic
Bracket Settings
Indicator during bracket shooting
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Cont. Bracket].
You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU→
(Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].
1
Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
2
Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
The base exposure is set at the first shot.
Keep pressing and holding the shutter button until bracket shooting is finished.
3
107
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Single Bracket
Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then to lighter. You can select
the image that suits your purpose after recording.
Since a single picture is taken each time you press the shutter button, you can adjust the focus or the composition for
each shot.
Menu item details
For example, when [Single Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected, three images are shot one at a time with the exposure
value shifted up and down in increments of 0.3 EV.
Note
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other
than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.
When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.
Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
Each mode in scene selection
[Sweep Panorama]
Related Topic
Bracket Settings
Indicator during bracket shooting
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Single Bracket].
You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].
1
Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
2
Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
Press the shutter button for each image.
3
108
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Indicator during bracket shooting
On the [Display All Info.] or [Histogram] screen, you can use the bracket indicator to confirm the bracket shooting
settings.
Ambient light* bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV
Flash bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.7 EV steps
Flash compensation -1.0 EV
Note
During bracket shooting, guides equal to the number of images to be shot are displayed over/under the bracket indicator.
When you start single bracket shooting, the guides will disappear one by one as the camera records images.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Ambient light: A generic term for non-flash light including natural light, electric bulb and fluorescent lighting. Whereas the flash light blinks for a
moment, ambient light is constant, so this kind of light is called "ambient light."
*
109
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
WB bracket
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color
temperature and color filter.
Menu item details
White Balance Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the white balance (within the range of 10MK
-1*
).
White Balance Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the white balance (within the range of 20MK
-1*
).
*
MK
-1
is the unit that indicates the capability of color temperature conversion filters and indicates the same value as
"mired."
Note
The last shot is shown on the auto review.
Related Topic
Bracket Settings
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [WB bracket].
You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU→
(Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].
1
Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
2
Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
3
110
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
DRO Bracket
You can record a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer value.
Menu item details
DRO Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 2, and Lv 3).
DRO Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 3, and Lv 5).
Note
The last shot is shown on the auto review.
Related Topic
Bracket Settings
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [DRO Bracket].
You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU→
(Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].
1
Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
2
Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
3
111
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Bracket Settings
You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance
bracketing.
Menu item details
Selftimer during Bracket:
Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released
if using the self-timer.
(OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order:
Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
(0→-→+/-→0→+)
Related Topic
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → select bracket shooting mode.
You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → desired setting.
2
112
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Self-portrait/ -timer
You can change the angle of the monitor and shoot images while watching the monitor.
Hint
If you want to use a drive mode other than the 3-second self-timer mode, first set [Self-portrait/ -timer] to [Off], and then face the
monitor forward.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Self-portrait/ -timer] → [On].
1
Open the monitor transversely, face it forward, and then point the lens at yourself.
2
Press the shutter button. Alternatively, touch the subject on the monitor.
The product starts the self-timer shooting after three seconds.
3
113
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Interval Shoot Func.
You can automatically shoot a series of still images with the shooting interval and number of shots that you set in
advance (Interval shooting). You can then create a movie from the still images produced by interval shooting using the
computer software Imaging Edge Desktop (Viewer). You cannot create a movie from the still images on the camera.
For details on interval shooting, refer to the support page for Imaging Edge Desktop.
https://www.sony.net/disoft/help/
Menu item details
Interval Shooting:
Sets whether to perform interval shooting. ([On]/[Off])
Shooting Start Time:
Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59
seconds)
Shooting Interval:
Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second
to 60 seconds)
Number of Shots:
Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9999 shots)
AE Tracking Sensitivity:
Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select
[Low], exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. ([High]/[Mid]/[Low])
Silent Shoot. in Interval:
Sets whether or not to perform silent shooting during interval shooting. ([On]/[Off])
Shoot Interval Priority:
Sets whether or not to prioritize the shooting interval when the exposure mode is [Program Auto] or [Aperture Priority]
and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for [Shooting Interval]. ([On]/[Off])
Hint
If you press the shutter button during interval shooting, interval shooting will end and the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.
To go back to the normal shooting mode, select MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval
Shooting] → [Off].
If you press a key to which one of the following functions has been assigned at the moment when shooting starts, the function will
remain active during interval shooting even without you holding down the button.
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval Shooting] → [On].
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → Select the item you want to set and the
desired setting.
2
Press the shutter button.
When the time set for [Shooting Start Time] has elapsed, shooting will start.
When the number of shots set for [Number of Shots] is completed, the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.
3
114
[AEL hold]
[
AEL hold]
[AF/MF Control Hold]
If you set [Display as Group] to [On], still images shot with the interval shooting function will be displayed in groups.
Still images shot with interval shooting can be played back continuously on the camera. If you intend to create a movie using the
still images, you can preview the result.
Note
You may not be able to record the set number of images depending on the remaining battery level and the amount of free space
on the recording medium. Supply power via USB while shooting, and use a memory card with sufficient space.
When the shooting interval is short, the camera may get hot easily. Depending on the ambient temperature, you may not be able
to record the set number of images because the camera may stop recording to protect the equipment.
During interval shooting (including the time between pressing the shutter button and the start of shooting), you cannot operate the
dedicated shooting setting screen or MENU screen. However, you can adjust some settings such as the shutter speed with using
the customized dial or control wheel.
During interval shooting, auto review is not displayed.
[Silent Shoot. in Interval] is set to [On] in the default settings, regardless of the setting for [
Silent Shooting].
Interval shooting is unavailable in the following situations:
The shooting mode is set to other than [Program Auto], [Aperture Priority], [Shutter Priority], or [Manual Exposure]
Related Topic
Cont. PB for Interval
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)
Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
115
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Touch Operation
Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.
Menu item details
On:
Activates the touch operation.
Off:
Deactivates the touch operation.
Related Topic
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Shutter
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Touch Operation] → desired setting.
1
116
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Shutter
The camera automatically focuses on the point you touch and shoots a still image.
Set MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] to [On] in advance.
Hint
You can operate the shooting functions below by touching the monitor:
Shooting burst images using the touch shutter
When [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting], you can record burst images while touching the monitor.
Shooting burst images of sports scenes using the touch shutter
When the shooting mode is set to [Sports Action] in scene selection, you can record burst images while touching the monitor.
Shooting continuous bracket images using the touch shutter
The product shoots three images while automatically shifting the exposure from base, to darker, and then to lighter. When
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Bracket], keep touching the monitor until the shooting ends. After the recording you can select the
image you prefer.
Note
The [Touch Shutter] function is unavailable in the following situations:
During movie recording
During slow-motion/quick-motion recording
When the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama]
When [Focus Mode] is [Manual Focus]
When [Focus Area] is [Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Expand Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Tracking: Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]
While using the digital zoom function
While using the [ClearImage Zoom]
Related Topic
Touch Operation
Select MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Shutter].
1
Touch the icon inside the rectangle in the top right of the monitor while the shooting screen is
displayed.
The mark to the left of the icon turns orange, and the touch shutter function is activated.
To cancel [Touch Shutter], touch the
icon again.
The touch shutter function is canceled when the camera is restarted.
2
Touch the subject to focus on.
When the subject you touched is in focus, a still image is recorded.
3
117
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
118
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus
[Touch Focus] allows you to specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. This function is available
when [Focus Area] is set to a parameter other than [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]
. Select MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [On] beforehand.
Specifying the position where you want to focus in the still image mode
You can specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. After touching the monitor and specifying a
position, press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
Specifying the position where you want to focus in the movie recording mode (spot focus)
The camera will focus on the touched subject.
Hint
In addition to the touch focus function, touch operations such as the following are also available.
When [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible
Spot], the focusing frame can be moved using touch operations.
When the [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus], the focus magnifier can be used by double-tapping the monitor.
Note
The touch focus function is not available in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].
When using the digital zoom
When using the LA-EA4
Related Topic
Touch Operation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Focus].
1
Touch the monitor.
Touch the subject to focus.
To cancel focusing with touch operations, touch the
(Focus Cancel) icon or press the center of the control
wheel.
1.
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.
2.
Touch the subject on which you want to focus before or during recording.
When you touch the subject, the focus mode temporarily switches to manual focus and the focus can be adjusted
using the focus ring.
To cancel spot focus, touch the
(Focus Cancel) icon or press the center of the control wheel.
1.
119
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
120
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking
You can use touch operations to select a subject you want to track in the still image and movie recording modes.
Select MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [On] in advance.
Hint
To cancel tracking, touch the
(Tracking Cancel) icon or press the center of the control wheel.
Note
[Touch Tracking] is unavailable in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] in scene selection.
When shooting movies with [
Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p].
When the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].
When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On]
Related Topic
Touch Operation
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Tracking].
1
Touch the subject that you want to track on the monitor.
Tracking will start.
2
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.
3
121
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
File Format (still image)
Sets the file format for still images.
Menu item details
RAW:
Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to process images on a computer for
professional purposes.
RAW & JPEG:
A RAW image and a JPEG image are created at the same time. This is suitable when you need two image files, a JPEG
for viewing, and a RAW for editing.
JPEG:
The image is recorded in the JPEG format.
About RAW images
To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software Imaging Edge Desktop is needed. With Imaging
Edge Desktop, you can open a RAW image file, then convert it into a popular image format such as JPEG or TIFF, or
readjust the white balance, saturation or contrast of the image.
You cannot apply [Auto HDR] or [Picture Effect] functions with RAW images.
RAW images shot by the camera are recorded in the compressed RAW format.
RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel. However, resolution is limited to 12 bits
in the following shooting modes:
[
Long Exposure NR]
[BULB]
[Cont. Shooting]
(including continuous shooting in [Superior Auto] mode)
[
Silent Shooting]
Note
If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that you record in JPEG format.
You cannot add DPOF (print order) registration marks to RAW images.
Related Topic
JPEG Quality (still image)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ File Format] → desired setting.
1
122
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
JPEG Quality (still image)
Selects the JPEG image quality when [
File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG] or [JPEG].
Menu item details
Extra fine/Fine/Standard:
Since the compression rate increases from [Extra fine] to [Fine] to [Standard], the file size decreases in the same order.
This allows more files to be recorded on one memory card, but the image quality is lower.
Related Topic
File Format (still image)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ JPEG Quality] → desired setting.
1
123
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
JPEG Image Size (still image)
The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The
smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.
Menu item details
When [
Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2
When [
Aspect Ratio] is set to 4:3
When [
Aspect Ratio] is set to 16:9
When [
Aspect Ratio] is set to 1:1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ JPEG Image Size] → desired setting.
1
Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)
L: 24M 6000×4000 pixels
M: 12M 4240×2832 pixels
S: 6.0M 3008×2000 pixels
Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)
L: 21M 5328×4000 pixels
M: 11M 3776×2832 pixels
S: 5.3M 2656×2000 pixels
Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)
L: 20M 6000×3376 pixels
M: 10M 4240×2400 pixels
S: 5.1M 3008×1688 pixels
Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)
L: 16M 4000×4000 pixels
M: 8.0M 2832×2832 pixels
S: 4.0M 2000×2000 pixels
124
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Aspect Ratio (still image)
Menu item details
3:2:
Same aspect ratio as 35 mm film
4:3:
The aspect ratio is 4:3.
16:9:
The aspect ratio is 16:9.
1:1:
The horizontal and vertical ratio is equal.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Aspect Ratio] → desired setting.
1
126
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Panorama: Size
Sets the image size when shooting panoramic images. The image size varies depending on the [Panorama: Direction]
setting.
Menu item details
When [Panorama: Direction] is set to [Up] or [Down]
Standard: 3872×2160
Wide: 5536×2160
When [Panorama: Direction] is set to [Left] or [Right]
Standard: 8192×1856
Wide: 12416×1856
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Panorama: Size] → desired setting.
1
127
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Panorama: Direction
Sets the direction to pan the camera when shooting panoramic images.
Menu item details
Right:
Pan the camera from the left to the right.
Left:
Pan the camera from the right to the left.
Up:
Pan the camera from the bottom to the top.
Down:
Pan the camera from the top to the bottom.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Panorama: Direction] → desired setting.
1
128
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Shoot Mode (still image)
You can set the shooting mode for still image shooting according to the subject you wish to shoot or the function you
wish to adjust.
Menu item details
Auto mode:
Allows you to shoot still images of any subject under any conditions with good results by setting the values determined
appropriate by the camera. Select
(Intelligent Auto) or (Superior Auto).
Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value (F value)).
Also you can select various settings using the menu.
Aperture Priority:
Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot when you want to blur the background, etc.
Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot fast-moving subjects etc., by manually adjusting the shutter speed.
Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot still images with the desired exposure by adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the
aperture value (F value)).
Recall Camera Set.:
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or numeric settings registered in advance.
Sweep Panorama:
Allows you to shoot a panoramic image by compositing the images.
Scene Selection:
Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene.
Related Topic
Intelligent Auto
Superior Auto
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
Shutter Priority
Manual Exposure
Recall Camera Set.
Sweep Panorama
Scene Selection
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the still image shooting mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Shoot Mode] → desired shooting mode.
2
129
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Intelligent Auto
The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition.
Note
The product will not recognize the scene when you shoot images with zoom functions other than optical zoom.
The product may not properly recognize the scene under certain shooting conditions.
For [Intelligent Auto] mode, most of the functions are set automatically, and you cannot adjust the settings on your own.
Related Topic
About Scene Recognition
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the still image shooting mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Shoot Mode] → [Intelligent Auto].
2
Point the camera at the subject.
When the camera recognized the scene, the icon for the recognized scene appears on the screen.
3
Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
4
130
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Superior Auto
The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition. This mode takes clear images of dark or backlit scenes.
For low-lit or backlit scenes, if necessary the camera may shoot multiple images and create a composite image, etc., to
record higher quality images than in Intelligent Auto mode.
Note
When the product is used to create composite images, the recording process takes longer than usual. In this case, the shutter
sound is heard multiple times, but only one image is recorded.
The product will not recognize the scene when you use zoom functions other than optical zoom.
The product may not properly recognize a scene under some shooting conditions.
When [
File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the product cannot create a composite image.
For [Superior Auto] mode, most of the functions are set automatically, and you cannot adjust the settings on your own.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the still image shooting mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Shoot Mode] → [Superior Auto].
2
Point the camera to the subject.
When the camera recognizes a scene, scene recognition icon appears on the screen. If necessary, appropriate
shooting function for the recognized scene and the number of times the shutter is released also appear.
3
Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
When the camera shoots multiple images, it automatically chooses and saves the appropriate image. You can also
save all the images by setting the [Superior Auto Img. Extract.].
4
131
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Superior Auto Img. Extract.
Sets whether or not to save all the images that were shot continuously in [Superior Auto].
Menu item details
Auto:
Saves one appropriate image selected by the product.
Off:
Saves all of the images.
Note
Even if you set [Superior Auto Img. Extract.] to [Off] with [Hand-held Twilight] selected as the scene recognition mode, one
combined image is saved.
When [
File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the shooting function will be limited.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Superior Auto Img. Extract.] → desired setting.
1
132
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
About Scene Recognition
Scene Recognition operates in [Intelligent Auto] or [Superior Auto] in the still image shooting mode, or [Intelligent Auto] in
the movie recording mode.
This function allows the product to automatically recognize the shooting conditions and shoot the image.
Scene Recognition
When the product recognizes certain scenes, the following icons and guides are displayed on the first line:
(Portrait)
(Infant)
(Night Portrait)
(Night Scene)
(Backlight Portrait)
(Backlight)
(Landscape)
(Macro)
(Spotlight)
(Low Light)
(Night Scene using a tripod)
(Hand-held Twilight)
Image processing
[Cont. Shooting]/[Slow Sync.]/[Auto HDR]/[Daylight Sync.]/[Slow Shutter]/[Hand-held Twilight]
Related Topic
Intelligent Auto
Shoot Mode (movie)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
133
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Program Auto
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
You can set shooting functions such as [ISO].
Program Shift
When you are not using a flash, you can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing
the appropriate exposure set by the camera.
Turn the control dial to select the aperture value and shutter speed combination.
(Program Auto) on the screen changes to (Program Shift) when you turn the control dial.
To cancel program shift, set the shooting mode to a mode other than [Program Auto], or turn off the camera.
Note
According to the brightness of the environment, the program shift may not be used.
Set the shooting mode to a mode other than [Program Auto] or turn off the camera to cancel the setting you made.
When the brightness changes, the aperture (F-value) and shutter speed also change while maintaining the shift amount.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the still image shooting mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Shoot Mode] → [Program Auto].
2
Set the shooting functions to your desired settings.
3
Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
4
134
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Aperture Priority
You can shoot by adjusting the aperture and changing the range in focus, or by defocusing the background.
Note
The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.
Related Topic
Aperture Preview
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the still image shooting mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Shoot Mode] → [Aperture Priority].
2
Select the desired value by turning the control dial.
Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject are blurred.
Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus.
If the aperture value you have set is not suitable for appropriate exposure, the shutter speed on the shooting
screen will blink. If this happens, change the aperture value.
3
Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.
4
135
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Shutter Priority
You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by adjusting the shutter speed, for example, at the
instant of the movement with high speed shutter, or as a trailing image with low speed shutter.
Hint
Use a tripod to prevent camera-shake when you have selected a slow shutter speed.
When you shoot indoor sports scenes, set the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.
Note
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in shutter speed priority mode.
When [
Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] and the shutter speed is 1 second(s) or longer, noise reduction will be done after
shooting for the same amount of time that the shutter was open. However, you cannot shoot any more while noise reduction is in
progress.
The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.
Related Topic
Long Exposure NR (still image)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the still image shooting mode.
1
MENU→
(Camera Settings1)→[ Shoot Mode]→[Shutter Priority].
2
Select the desired value by turning the control dial.
If proper exposure cannot be obtained after setup, the aperture value on the shooting screen blinks. If this
happens, change the shutter speed.
3
Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.
4
136
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Manual Exposure
You can shoot with the desired exposure setting by adjusting both the shutter speed and aperture.
Hint
You can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing the set exposure value (Manual shift).
Assign [AEL hold] or [AEL toggle] to a desired key using [
Custom Key] or [ Custom Key], and then turn the control dial or
control wheel while pressing that key.
Note
The Metered Manual indicator does not appear when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].
When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the Metered Manual, the Metered Manual indicator flashes.
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.
The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the still image shooting mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Shoot Mode] → [Manual Exposure].
2
Select the desired shutter speed by turning the control wheel.
Select the desired aperture value by turning the control dial.
You can switch the functions of the control dial and the control wheel using MENU →
(Camera Settings2)
→ [Dial/Wheel Setup].
You can also set [ISO] to [ISO AUTO] in manual exposure mode. The ISO value automatically changes to
achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.
When [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO], the ISO value indicator will blink if the value you have set is not suitable for
appropriate exposure. If this happens, change the shutter speed or aperture value.
When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO]
, use MM (Metered Manual)* to check the exposure value.
Toward +: Images become brighter.
Toward -: Images become darker.
0: Appropriate exposure analyzed by the product.
3
Indicates under/over for appropriate exposure.
*
Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
4
137
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Bulb shooting
You can shoot a trailing image of the movement of a subject with long exposure.
Bulb shooting is suitable for shooting trails from stars or fireworks, etc.
Hint
When shooting fireworks, etc., focus at infinity in manual focus mode. If you use a lens whose infinity point is unclear, adjust the
focus on the fireworks in the area you want to focus on in advance.
In order to perform bulb shooting without causing the image quality to deteriorate, we recommend that you start shooting while
the camera is cool.
During bulb shooting, images tend to blur. It is recommended that you use a tripod or a Bluetooth remote commander (sold
separately). When using a Bluetooth remote commander, you can start bulb shooting by pressing the shutter button on the
remote commander. To stop bulb shooting, press the shutter button on the remote commander again.
Note
The longer the exposure time, the more noise will be visible on the image.
When [
Long Exposure NR] is set to [On], noise reduction is performed after shooting for the same duration that the shutter
was open. You cannot shoot while noise reduction is in progress.
You cannot set the shutter speed to [BULB] in the following situations:
[Auto HDR]
[Picture Effect] is set to [HDR Painting] or [Rich-tone Mono.].
When [Drive Mode] is set to the following:
[Cont. Shooting]
[Self-timer(Cont)]
[Cont. Bracket]
[
Silent Shooting]
If you use the above functions when the shutter speed is set to [BULB], the shutter speed is temporarily set to 30 seconds.
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the still image shooting mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Shoot Mode] → [Manual Exposure].
2
Turn the control wheel counterclockwise until [BULB] is indicated.
3
Set the aperture value (F-value) by turning the control dial.
4
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
5
Press and hold the shutter button for the duration of the shooting.
As long as the shutter button is pressed, the shutter remains open.
6
138
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Sweep Panorama
Allows you to create a single panoramic image from multiple images shot while panning the camera.
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the still image shooting mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Shoot Mode] → [Sweep Panorama].
2
Point the camera at the subject.
3
While pressing the shutter button halfway down, aim the camera at one end of the desired panoramic
composition.
You can change the shooting direction prior to shooting using the control dial.
(A) This part will not be shot.
4
Press the shutter button fully down.
5
Pan the camera to the end of the guide in the direction of the arrow on the monitor.
6
140
Note
If the entire angle of the panoramic shot is not achieved within the set time, a gray area occurs in the composite image. If this
happens, move the product faster to record the full panoramic image.
When [Wide] is selected for [Panorama: Size], the entire angle of the panoramic shot may not be achieved within the given time.
If this happens, try shooting after changing [Panorama: Size] to [Standard].
Since several images are stitched together, the stitched part may not be recorded smoothly in some cases.
When a light source such as a fluorescent light flickers, the brightness and color of a stitched image may not be consistent.
When the whole angle of panoramic shooting and the AE/AF locked angle are very different in brightness and focus, the shooting
may not be successful. If this happens, change AE/AF locked angle and shoot again.
The following situations are not suited for shooting Sweep Panorama:
Moving subjects.
Subjects that are too close to the product.
Subjects with continuously similar patterns, such as the sky, beach, or a lawn.
Subjects with constant change such as waves or water falls.
Subjects with brightness widely different from its surroundings such as the sun or a light bulb.
The Sweep Panorama shooting may be interrupted in the following situations:
When the camera is panned too fast or too slow.
When the camera shakes too much.
Continuous shooting is performed during shooting Sweep Panorama and the shutter sound keeps beeping until shooting is
finished.
The following functions are not available with Sweep Panorama:
Face/Eye Priority in AF
Face Priority in Multi Metering
DRO/Auto HDR
Picture Effect
Picture Profile
Soft Skin Effect
Long Exposure NR
Tracking function
Other zoom functions than the optical zoom
Drive Mode
Bright Monitoring
The values of the settings for some functions are fixed with Sweep Panorama, as follows:
[ISO] is fixed to [ISO AUTO].
[Focus Area] is fixed to [Wide].
[
High ISO NR] is fixed to [Normal].
[Flash Mode] is fixed to [Flash Off].
(B) Guidance bar
141
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
142
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Scene Selection
Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene.
Menu item details
Portrait:
Blurs background and sharpens the subject. Accentuates the skin tones softly.
Sports Action:
Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The product shoots
images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
Macro:
Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.
Landscape:
Shoots the entire range of a scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors.
Sunset:
Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the still image shooting mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Shoot Mode] → select the desired mode in scene selection.
2
143
Night Scene:
Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere.
Hand-held Twilight:
Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken, and image processing is
applied to reduce subject blur, camera-shake, and noise.
Night Portrait:
Shoots night scene portraits using the flash (sold separately).
Anti Motion Blur:
Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product shoots burst images and
combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.
Hint
To change the scene, rotate the control dial on the shooting screen and select a new scene.
Note
Under the following settings, the shutter speed is slower, so use of a tripod, etc. is recommended to prevent the image from
blurring:
[Night Scene]
[Night Portrait]
In the [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] mode, the shutter clicks 4 times and an image is recorded.
If you select [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] with [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], [
File Format] becomes [JPEG]
temporarily.
Reducing blur is less effective even in [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] when shooting the following subjects:
144
Subjects with erratic movement.
Subjects that are too close to the product.
Subjects with continuously similar patterns, such as the sky, a beach, or a lawn.
Subjects with constant change such as waves or water falls.
In the case of [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur], block noise may occur when using a light source that flickers, such as
fluorescent lighting.
The minimum distance that you can come close to a subject does not change even if you select [Macro]. For the minimum in-
focus range, refer to the minimum distance of the lens attached to the product.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
145
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Recall Camera Set.
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with [
Camera Set.
Memory] in advance.
You can recall registered settings individually in the still image shooting mode, the movie recording mode, and the slow-
motion/quick-motion recording mode.
Hint
Settings registered to a memory card using another camera of the same model name can be recalled with this camera.
Note
If you set [
Recall Camera Set.] after completing the shooting settings, the registered settings are given priority and the
original settings may become invalid. Check the indicators on the screen before shooting.
Related Topic
Camera Set. Memory
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the desired shooting mode.
1
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Shoot Mode] → [ Recall Camera Set.] → select the setting
number you want to recall.
In the movie recording mode or the slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode, perform the following procedure.
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Shoot Mode] or [ Shoot Mode] → [ Recall Camera Set.].
2
146
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Exposure Comp.
Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure). Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can
make the entire image brighter or darker if you adjust [Exposure Comp.] to the plus side or minus side, respectively
(exposure compensation).
Hint
Only a value between -3.0 EV and +3.0 EV with the equivalent image brightness appears on the screen when shooting. If you set
an exposure compensation value outside this range, the image brightness on the screen will not be affected, but the value will be
reflected in the recorded image.
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.
Note
You cannot perform the exposure compensation in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
Each mode in scene selection
When using [Manual Exposure], you can perform the exposure compensation only when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].
If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use the flash, you may not be able to get a satisfactory
effect.
Related Topic
(Exposure Comp.) on the control wheel → press the left/right side of the control wheel or turn the
control wheel, and select the desired setting.
+ (over) side:
Images become brighter.
- (under) side:
Images become darker.
You can also select MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Comp.].
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -5.0 EV to +5.0 EV.
You can confirm the exposure compensation value that you set on the shooting screen.
1
147
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Dial/Wheel Ev Comp
You can adjust the exposure compensation using the control dial or the control wheel.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not assign the exposure compensation function to the control dial or control wheel.
Wheel:
Assigns the exposure compensation function to the control wheel.
Dial:
Assigns the exposure compensation function to the control dial.
Note
If you assign the exposure compensation function to the control dial, the function that was originally assigned can be managed
using the control wheel, and vice versa.
When the shooting mode is set to [Manual Exposure] and ISO is set to [ISO AUTO], [Dial/Wheel Ev Comp] is disabled.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Dial/Wheel Ev Comp] → desired setting.
1
149
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Exposure Set. Guide
You can set whether to display a guide when you change the exposure.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not display the guide.
On:
Displays the guide.
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Exposure Set. Guide] → desired setting.
1
150
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Exposure step
You can adjust the setting increment for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values.
Menu item details
0.3EV
/ 0.5EV
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Exposure step] → desired setting.
1
151
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Metering Mode
Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for determining the exposure.
Menu item details
Multi:
Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the
entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-
weighted metering).
Spot:
Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on the back-lit subject or when
the contrast of the background and the subject is strong.
Entire Screen Avg.:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position
of the subject changes.
Highlight:
Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the
subject while avoiding overexposure.
Hint
When [Multi] is selected and [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is set to [On], the camera measures brightness based on detected
faces.
When [Metering Mode] is set to [Highlight] and the [D-Range Optimizer] or [Auto HDR] function is activated, the brightness and
the contrast will be corrected automatically by dividing the image into small areas and analyzing the contrast of light and shadow.
Make settings based on the shooting circumstances.
Note
[Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], or each mode in scene selection
When using a zoom function other than the optical zoom
In [Highlight] mode, the subject may be dark if a brighter part exists on the screen.
Related Topic
AE lock
Face Priority in Multi Metering
D-Range Optimizer (DRO)
Auto HDR
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Metering Mode] → desired setting.
1
152
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Sets whether the camera measures brightness based on detected faces when [Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].
Menu item details
On:
The camera measures brightness based on detected faces.
Off:
The camera measures brightness using the [Multi] setting, without detecting faces.
Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto] or [Superior Auto], [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is locked to [On].
When [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is set to [On] and [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal] under [Face/Eye AF Set.], [Face Priority in
Multi Metering] does not work.
Related Topic
Metering Mode
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Face Priority in Multi Metering] → desired setting.
1
153
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
AE lock
When the contrast between the subject and background is high, such as when shooting a backlit subject or a subject
near a window, meter the light at a spot where the subject appears to have the appropriate brightness and lock the
exposure before shooting. To reduce the brightness of the subject, meter the light at a spot brighter than the subject and
lock the exposure of the entire screen. To make the subject brighter, meter the light at a spot darker than the subject and
lock the exposure of the entire screen.
Hint
If you select the [AEL hold] function in [
Custom Key] or [ Custom Key], you can lock the exposure as long as you are
holding down the button. You cannot set the [AEL hold] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button].
Note
[
AEL hold] and [ AEL toggle] are not available when using zoom functions other than optical zoom.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → desired key, then assign
[AEL toggle] to the key.
1
Adjust the focus on the spot at which the exposure is adjusted.
2
Press the button to which [AEL toggle] is assigned.
The exposure is locked, and
(AE lock) is displayed.
3
Focus on the subject again and press the shutter button.
To cancel the exposure lock, press the button to which the [AEL toggle] function is assigned.
4
154
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Exp.comp.set
Sets whether to apply the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light, or just ambient light.
Menu item details
Ambient&flash:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light.
Ambient only:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control ambient light only.
Related Topic
Flash Comp.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Exp.comp.set] → desired setting.
1
155
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Zebra Setting
Sets a zebra pattern, which appears over part of an image if the brightness level of that part meets the IRE level that you
have set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust the brightness.
Menu item details
Zebra Display:
Sets whether to display the zebra pattern.
Zebra Level:
Adjusts the brightness level of the zebra pattern.
Hint
You can register values to check the correct exposure or overexposure as well as the brightness level for [Zebra Level]. The
settings for correct exposure confirmation and overexposure confirmation are registered to [Custom1] and [Custom2] respectively
in the default settings.
To check the correct exposure, set a standard value and the range for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear on
areas that fall within the range you set.
To check the overexposure, set a minimum value for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear over areas with a
brightness level equal to or higher than the value you set.
Note
The zebra pattern is not displayed on devices connected via HDMI.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Zebra Setting] → desired setting.
1
156
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Product Showcase Set
The camera settings are optimally configured for situations such as movie shooting for product reviews. The camera
tends to focus on objects that are closer to it.
Menu item details
On:
Shoots with optimal settings for product reviews. [Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.] is locked to [Off].
Off:
Shoots in the ordinary shooting mode.
Note
[Product Showcase Set] is not available in the following shooting modes:
[Sweep Panorama]
Each mode in scene selection
Settings for [Product Showcase Set] cannot be changed during movie recording.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the (Product Showcase Set) button to switch the [Product Showcase Set] function on or off.
You can also switch the [Product Showcase Set] function on or off by selecting MENU →
(Camera
Settings1) → [Product Showcase Set].
1
157
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Background Defocus
You can change the level of defocus in the background simply by pressing the button while shooting still images or
movies.
Note
[Background Defocus] is not available in the following shooting modes:
[Sweep Panorama]
Each mode in scene selection
[Background Defocus] mode is canceled, the camera returns to normal shooting mode, and the aperture returns to the former
value when you perform the following operations:
Turning the power off and back on again
Pressing the Still/Movie/S&Q button
Pressing the MENU button
Changing the aperture value using the control wheel while the shooting mode is set to [Aperture Priority] or [Manual Exposure]
Program shift
Manual shift
Exposure compensation
Even if you press the button, you cannot change the level of defocus while using [Manual Focus] or [Focus Magnifier] in the
[Background Defocus] mode.
Depending on the shooting mode and shooting conditions, the camera may be unable to obtain the optimal exposure due to the
locking of the aperture value in the [Background Defocus] mode.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the (Background Defocus) button repeatedly.
Once you press the button, the [Background Defocus] mode is activated and the background becomes defocused.
Afterwards, the level of defocus in the background switches between [Defocus] and [Clear] each time you press the
button.
The camera returns to normal shooting mode and the aperture returns to the former value when you press the
Still/Movie/S&Q button.
1
158
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
D-Range Optimizer (DRO)
By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast of light and shadow between the subject and
the background, and creates an image with the optimal brightness and gradation.
Menu item details
D-Range Optimizer: Auto:
Corrects the brightness automatically.
D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 ― D-Range Optimizer: Lv5:
Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5
(strong).
Note
In the following situations, [DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off]:
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off]
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off]
[DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off] when the shooting mode is set to the following modes in scene selection.
[Sunset]
[Night Scene]
[Night Portrait]
[Hand-held Twilight]
[Anti Motion Blur]
The [D-Range Optimizer] setting becomes [D-Range Optimizer: Auto] when a mode other than the above is selected in scene
selection.
When shooting with [D-Range Optimizer], the image may be noisy. Select the proper level by checking the recorded image,
especially when you enhance the effect.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [D-Range Optimizer].
1
Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.
2
159
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Auto HDR
Shoots three images using different exposures and combines the images with correct exposure, the bright parts of an
underexposed image, and the dark parts of an overexposed image to create images with a greater range of gradation
(High Dynamic Range). One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded.
Menu item details
Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto:
Corrects the brightness automatically.
Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ― Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV:
Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimization level from 1.0EV (weak) to
6.0EV (strong).
For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed with the following exposure levels:
-1.0 EV, correct exposure and +1.0 EV.
Hint
The shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the following:
Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.
Do not change the composition during shooting.
Note
This function is not available when the [
File Format] is [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].
[Auto HDR] is not available in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
Each mode in scene selection
[Auto HDR] is not available in the following situations:
When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].
You cannot start the next shot until the capture process is completed after you shoot.
You may not obtain the desired effect depending on the luminance difference of a subject and the shooting conditions.
When the flash is used, this function has little effect.
When the contrast of the scene is low or when product shake or subject blur occurs, you may not obtain good HDR images.
(Auto HDR error) will be displayed over the recorded image to inform you when the camera detects image blurring.
Change the composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [Auto HDR].
1
Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.
2
160
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
ISO
Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The larger the number, the higher
the sensitivity.
Menu item details
ISO AUTO:
Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
ISO 50 – ISO 51200:
Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.
Hint
You can change the range of ISO sensitivity that is set automatically in [ISO AUTO] mode. Select [ISO AUTO] and press the right
side of the control wheel, and set the desired values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum].
The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.
The available ISO settings will differ depending on whether you are shooting still images, shooting movies, or shooting slow-
motion/quick-motion movies.
When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 32000 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value larger than 32000,
the setting is automatically switched to 32000. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.
When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 32000 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller than 100, the
setting is automatically switched to 100. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.
The available range for ISO sensitivity varies depending on the setting for [Gamma] under [Picture Profile].
Note
[ISO AUTO] is selected when using the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
Each mode in scene selection
[Sweep Panorama]
When the ISO sensitivity is set to a value lower than ISO 100, the range for recordable subject brightness (dynamic range) may
decrease.
When you select [ISO AUTO] with the shooting mode set to [Program Auto], [Aperture Priority], [Shutter Priority], or [Manual
Exposure], the ISO sensitivity will be automatically adjusted within the set range.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
ISO (ISO) on the control wheel → select desired setting.
You can also select MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ISO].
You can change the value by 1/3 EV steps by turning the control wheel. You can change the value by 1 EV
steps by turning the control dial.
1
161
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
The zoom features available with this product
The zoom feature of the product provides a higher magnification zoom by combining various zoom features. The icon
displayed on the screen changes, according to the selected zoom feature.
When a power zoom lens is mounted:
When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted:
Note
The default setting for the [Zoom Range] is [Optical zoom only].
The default setting for the [
JPEG Image Size] is [L]. To use the smart zoom, change [ JPEG Image Size] to [M] or [S].
The Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom functions are not available when shooting in the following situations:
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
[
File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].
[
Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with the [
Frame Rate] set to [120fps]/[100fps]
You cannot use the Smart Zoom function with movies.
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [Focus Area] setting is disabled and the focusing frame is shown
by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority on and around the center area.
When you use the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function, [Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi].
When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function, the following functions are not available:
Face/Eye Priority in AF
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Tracking function
Optical zoom range
Zoom images in the zoom range of a lens.
When a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom bar of the optical zoom range is displayed.
When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom slider is fixed at the left end of the zoom bar while
the zoom position is in the optical zoom range (displayed as ×1.0).
1.
Smart Zoom range (
)
Zoom images without causing the original quality to deteriorate by partially cropping an image (only when [ JPEG
Image Size] is set to [M] or [S]).
2.
Clear Image Zoom range (
)
Zoom images using an image process with less deterioration. When you set [Zoom Range] to [ClearImage Zoom] or
[Digital Zoom], you can use this zoom function.
3.
Digital Zoom range (
)
You can magnify images using an image process. When you set [Zoom Range] to [Digital Zoom], you can use this
zoom function.
4.
162
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Zoom Range
You can select the zoom setting of the product.
Menu item details
Optical zoom only:
Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set [
JPEG Image Size] to [M]
or [S].
ClearImage Zoom
:
Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. Even if the zoom range exceeds the optical zoom, the product magnifies
images using an image process with less deterioration.
Digital Zoom
:
When the zoom range of the Clear Image Zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies images to the largest scale.
However, the image quality will deteriorate.
Note
Set [Optical zoom only] if you want to magnify images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate.
Related Topic
The zoom features available with this product
About zoom scale
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Range] → desired setting.
1
164
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Zoom Lever Speed
Sets the zoom speed when using the W/T (zoom) lever of the camera. This can be set separately for shooting standby
and movie recording.
Menu item details
Zoom Speed
:
Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Zoom Speed
:
Sets the zoom speed during movie recording. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Hint
If a high speed is set for shooting standby and a slow speed is set for movie recording, the angle of view can be changed quickly
during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.
Note
The zoom speed does not change when you operate the zoom ring of the lens or the zoom lever of the power zoom lens.
If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.
Even if the setting value of the zoom speed is the same, the actual zoom speed varies depending on the attached lens.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Lever Speed] → desired setting.
1
165
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Custom Key Z. Speed
Sets the zoom speed when using the custom key to which [Zoom Operation (T)] / [Zoom Operation (W)] is assigned.
This can be set separately for shooting standby and movie recording.
Menu item details
Fixed Speed
:
Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Fixed Speed
:
Sets the zoom speed during movie recording. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Hint
If a high speed is set for [Fixed Speed
] and a slow speed is set for [Fixed Speed ], the angle of view can be changed
quickly during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.
Note
The zoom speed does not change when you operate the zoom ring of the lens or the zoom lever of the power zoom lens.
If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key Z. Speed] → desired setting.
1
166
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Remote Zoom Speed
Sets the zoom speed when performing zoom operations using the remote commander (sold separately) or [Smartphone
Connect]. This can be set separately for shooting standby and movie recording.
Menu item details
Speed Type:
Sets whether or not to lock the zoom speed. ([Variable]/[Fix])
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby when [
Speed Type] is set to [Fix]. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during movie recording when [
Speed Type] is set to [Fix]. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Hint
When [
Speed Type] is set to [Variable], pressing the zoom lever on the remote commander will increase the zoom speed
(some remote commanders do not support variable zoom).
If [
Speed Type] is set to [Fix], a high speed is set for [ Fixed Speed ], and a slow speed is set for [ Fixed Speed
], the angle of view can be changed quickly during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.
Note
The zoom speed does not change when you operate the zoom ring of the lens or the zoom lever of the power zoom lens.
If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Remote Zoom Speed] → desired setting.
1
167
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
About zoom scale
The zoom scale that is used in combination with the zoom of the lens changes according to the selected image size.
When [
Aspect Ratio] is [3:2]
Related Topic
The zoom features available with this product
Zoom Range
JPEG Image Size (still image)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
JPEG Image Size Optical zoom only (smart zoom) ClearImage Zoom Digital Zoom
L: 24M - Approx. 2× Approx. 4×
M: 12M Approx. 1.4× Approx. 2.8× Approx. 5.7×
S: 6.0M Approx. 2× Approx. 4× Approx. 8×
168
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
White Balance
Corrects the tone effect of the ambient light condition to record a neutral white subject in white. Use this function when
the color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when you want to change the color tones on purpose
for photographic expression.
Menu item details
Auto / Daylight / Shade / Cloudy / Incandescent / Fluor.: Warm White /
Fluor.: Cool White / Fluor.: Day White / Fluor.: Daylight / Flash / Underwater Auto :
When you select a light source that illuminates the subject, the product adjusts the color tones to suit to the selected light
source (preset white balance). When you select [Auto], the product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the
color tones.
C.Temp./Filter:
Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for
photography.
Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:
Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.
Hint
You can display the fine adjustment screen and perform fine adjustments of the color tones as required by pressing the right side
of the control wheel. When [C.Temp./Filter] is selected, you can change the color temperature by turning the control dial instead
of pressing the right side of the control wheel.
If the color tones do not come out as you expected in the selected settings, perform [WB bracket] shooting.
(Ambience) or (White) is displayed only when [Priority Set in AWB] is set to [Ambience] or [White].
Note
[White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
Each mode in scene selection
If you use a mercury lamp or a sodium lamp as a light source, the accurate white balance will not be obtained because of the
characteristics of the light. It is recommended to shoot images using a flash or select [Custom 1] to [Custom 3].
Related Topic
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
Priority Set in AWB
WB bracket
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [White Balance] → desired setting.
1
169
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Priority Set in AWB
Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when [White Balance]
is set to [Auto].
Menu item details
Standard:
Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience:
Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
White:
Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.
Related Topic
White Balance
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AWB] → desired setting.
1
170
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
In a scene where the ambient light consists of multiple types of light sources, it is recommended to use the custom white
balance in order to accurately reproduce the whiteness. You can register 3 settings.
Note
The message [Capturing of the custom WB failed.] indicates that the value is in the unexpected range, for example when the
subject is too vivid. You can register the setting at this point, but it is recommended that you set the white balance again. When
an error value is set, the indicator
(custom white balance) turns orange on the recording information display. The indicator
will be displayed in white when the set value is in the expected range.
If you use a flash when capturing a basic white color, the custom white balance will be registered with the lighting from the flash.
Be sure to use a flash whenever you shoot with recalled settings that were registered with a flash.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [White Balance] → Select from among [Custom 1] to [Custom 3], and
then press the right side of the control wheel.
1
Select
(custom white balance set), and then press the center of the control wheel.
2
Hold the product so that the white area fully covers the white-balance capture frame, and then press the
center of the control wheel.
After the shutter sound beeps, the calibrated values (Color Temperature and Color Filter) are displayed.
You can adjust the position of the white-balance capture frame by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the
control wheel.
After capturing a standard white color, you can display the fine adjustment screen by pressing the right side of
the control wheel. You can finely adjust the color tones as needed.
3
Press the center of the control wheel.
The calibrated values will be registered. The monitor returns to the MENU display while retaining the memorized
custom white balance setting.
The registered custom white balance setting will remain memorized until overwritten by the another setting.
4
171
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Creative Style
Allows you to set the desired image processing and finely adjust contrast, saturation and sharpness for each image
style. You can adjust exposure (shutter speed and aperture) as you like with this function, unlike with the shooting mode
of scene selection, where the camera adjusts the exposure.
Menu item details
Standard:
For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
Vivid:
The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers,
spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
Portrait:
For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
Landscape:
The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also
stand out more.
Sunset:
For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
Black & White:
For shooting images in black and white monotone.
Sepia:
For shooting images in sepia monotone.
To set [Contrast], [Saturation] and [Sharpness]
[Contrast], [Saturation], and [Sharpness] can be adjusted for each image style preset such as [Standard] and
[Landscape].
Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left sides of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom sides
of the control wheel.
Contrast:
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Creative Style].
1
Select the desired style using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
2
To adjust
(Contrast), (Saturation) and (Sharpness), select the desired item using the right/left
sides, and then select the value using the top/bottom sides.
3
172
The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on
the image.
Saturation:
The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is
restrained and subdued.
Sharpness:
Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value
selected, the more the contours are softened.
Note
[Creative Style] is fixed to [Standard] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], or each mode in scene selection.
[Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
[Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].
When this function is set to [Black & White] or [Sepia], [Saturation] cannot be adjusted.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
173
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Picture Effect
Select the desired effect filter to achieve more impressive and artistic images.
Menu item details
Off:
Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
Toy Camera:
Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
Pop Color:
Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
Posterization:
Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
Retro Photo:
Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
Soft High-key:
Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
Partial Color:
Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
High Contrast Mono.:
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
Soft Focus:
Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effect.
HDR Painting:
Creates the look of a painting, enhancing the colors and details.
Rich-tone Mono.:
Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
Miniature:
Creates an image which enhances the subject vividly, with the background defocused considerably. This effect may often
be found in pictures of miniature models.
Watercolor:
Creates an image with ink bleed and blurring effects as if painted using watercolors.
Illustration:
Creates an illustration-like image by emphasizing the outlines.
Hint
You can perform detailed settings for some items using the left/right sides of the control wheel.
Note
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, setting the zoom scale larger makes [Toy Camera] less effective.
When [Partial Color] is selected, images may not retain the selected color, depending on the subject or shooting conditions.
You cannot check the following effects on the shooting screen, because the product processes the image after the shot. Also, you
cannot shoot another image until image processing is finished. You cannot use these effects with movies.
[Soft Focus]
[HDR Painting]
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Picture Effect] → desired setting.
1
174
[Rich-tone Mono.]
[Miniature]
[Watercolor]
[Illustration]
In the case of [HDR Painting] and [Rich-tone Mono.], the shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the
following:
Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.
Do not change the composition during shooting.
When the contrast of the scene is low or when significant camera-shake or subject blur has occurred, you may not be able to
obtain good HDR images. If the product detects such a situation,
(Picture Effect error) will appear on the recorded image to
inform you of this situation. Change the composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.
This function is not available in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
Each mode in scene selection
[Sweep Panorama]
When [
File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], this function is not available.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
175
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Soft Skin Effect
Sets the effect used for shooting the skin smoothly in the Face Detection function.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not use the [Soft Skin Effect] function.
On:
Uses the [Soft Skin Effect]. You can set the effect level by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel. ([On:
High]/[On: Mid]/[On: Low])
Note
[Soft Skin Effect] is not available when [
File Format] is [RAW].
[Soft Skin Effect] is not available for RAW images when the [
File Format] is [RAW & JPEG].
[Soft Skin Effect] is not available in the following situations.
When the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama]
When the shooting mode is set to [Landscape], [Sunset], or [Night Scene] in scene selection
When [Picture Effect] is set to [Posterization]
While using the digital zoom function
When recording movies, [Soft Skin Effect] is not available in the following situations.
[
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], and [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On].
[
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [ Record Setting] is set to [30p 100M] or [30p 60M], and [ 4K Output Select] is
set to [Memory Card+HDMI].
[
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], and [PC Remote] is set to [On].
[
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], and [Smartphone Connect] is in use.
[
File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD], and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].
When recording a movie with [
File Format] set to [XAVC S 4K], the effect is not applied to the image on the monitor during
recording, but it is applied to the recorded image.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Soft Skin Effect] → desired setting.
1
176
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Color Space (still image)
The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the range of color reproduction is called “color
space.” You can change the color space depending on the purpose of the image.
Menu item details
sRGB:
This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB] in normal shooting, such as when you intend to print
out the images without any modification.
AdobeRGB:
This color space has a wide range of color reproduction. When a large part of the subject is vivid green or red, Adobe
RGB is effective. The file name of the recorded image starts with “_.”
Note
[AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management and DCF2.0 option color space. Images may not be
printed or viewed in the correct colors if you use applications or printers that do not support Adobe RGB.
When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-Adobe RGB-compliant devices, the images will be
displayed with low saturation.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Color Space] → desired setting.
1
177
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Release w/o Lens
Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached.
Menu item details
Enable:
Releases the shutter when no lens is attached. Select [Enable] when attaching the product to an astronomical telescope,
etc.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when a lens is not attached.
Note
Correct metering cannot be achieved when you use lenses that do not provide a lens contact, such as the lens of an
astronomical telescope. In such cases, adjust the exposure manually by checking it on the recorded image.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Lens] → desired setting.
1
178
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Release w/o Card
Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted.
Menu item details
Enable:
Releases the shutter even if no memory card has been inserted.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when no memory card has been inserted.
Note
When no memory card has been inserted, the images shot will not be saved.
The default setting is [Enable]. It is recommended that you select [Disable] prior to actual shooting.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Card] → desired setting.
1
179
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Silent Shooting (still image)
You can shoot images without the shutter sound.
Menu item details
On:
You can shoot images without the shutter sound.
Off:
[
Silent Shooting] is deactivated.
Note
Use the [
Silent Shooting] function on your own responsibility, while taking sufficient consideration to the privacy and portrait
rights of the subject.
Even if [
Silent Shooting] is set to [On], it will not be completely silent.
Even if [
Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the operating sound of the aperture and focus will sound.
When shooting still images using the [
Silent Shooting] function with low ISO sensitivity, if you point the camera at a very bright
light source, high intensity areas on the monitor may be recorded in darker tones.
When the power is turned off, the shutter sound may beep in rare occasions. This is not a malfunction.
Image distortion caused by the movement of the subject or the camera may occur.
If you shoot images under instantaneous lightning or flickering lights, such as the flash light from other cameras or fluorescent
lighting, a striping effect may occur on the image.
If you want to turn off the beep that sounds when the subject is in focus or the self-timer operates, set [Audio signals] to [Off].
Even if [
Silent Shooting] is set to [On], you may hear the shutter sound under the following circumstances:
When you capture a standard white color for the custom white balance
When you register faces using [Face Registration]
You cannot select [
Silent Shooting] when the shooting mode is set to other than [Program Auto], [Aperture Priority], [Shutter
Priority], or [Manual Exposure].
When [
Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the following functions are not available:
Flash shooting
Auto HDR
Picture Effect
Long Exposure NR
e-Front Curtain Shutter
Superior Auto Img. Extract.
BULB shooting
After you turn the camera on, the time in which you can start recording is extended by approximately 0.5 seconds.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Silent Shooting] → desired setting.
1
180
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
e-Front Curtain Shutter
The electronic front curtain shutter function shortens the time lag between when the shutter button is pressed and the
shutter is released.
Menu item details
On:
Uses the electronic front curtain shutter function.
Off:
Does not use the electronic front curtain shutter function.
Note
When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large-aperture lens attached, out-of-focus circle produced by the bokeh effect may
get cut off because of the shutter mechanism. If this happens, set [e-Front Curtain Shutter] to [Off].
When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set this function to [Off]. If you set
this function to [On], the correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness will be uneven.
When you shoot at high shutter speeds, the image brightness may become uneven depending on the shooting environment. In
such cases, set [e-Front Curtain Shutter] to [Off].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [e-Front Curtain Shutter] → desired setting.
1
181
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
SteadyShot (still image)
Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.
Menu item details
On:
Uses [
SteadyShot].
Off:
Does not use [
SteadyShot].
We recommend that you set the camera to [Off] when using a tripod.
Note
You cannot set the SteadyShot function when you are using an A-mount lens (sold separately), or when the name of the attached
lens does not contain the letters “OSS,” such as “E16mm F2.8.”
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ SteadyShot] → desired setting.
1
182
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Lens Comp.
Compensates for shading in the corners of the screen or distortion of the screen, or reduces color deviation at the
corners of the screen caused by certain lens characteristics.
Menu item details
Shading Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically compensate for darkness in the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Chromatic Aberration Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically reduce color deviation at the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Distortion Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically compensate for distortion of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Note
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation compliant lens.
Darkness in the corners of the screen may not be corrected with [Shading Comp.], depending on the lens type.
Depending on the attached lens, [Distortion Comp.] is fixed to [Auto], and you cannot select [Off].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Lens Comp.] → desired setting.
1
183
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Long Exposure NR (still image)
When you set the shutter speed to 1 second(s) or longer (long exposure shooting), noise reduction is turned on for the
duration that the shutter is open. With the function turned on, the grainy noise typical of long exposures is reduced.
Menu item details
On:
Activates noise reduction for the same duration that the shutter is open. When noise reduction is in progress, a message
appears and you cannot take another picture. Select this to prioritize the image quality.
Off:
Does not activate noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.
Note
Noise reduction may not be activated even if [
Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] in the following situations:
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting] or [Cont. Bracket].
The shooting mode is set to [Sports Action], [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] in scene selection.
[
Long Exposure NR] cannot be set to [Off] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
Each mode in scene selection
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Long Exposure NR] → desired setting.
1
184
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
High ISO NR (still image)
When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that becomes more noticeable when the product
sensitivity is high.
Menu item details
Normal:
Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.
Low:
Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.
Off:
Does not activate high ISO noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.
Note
[
High ISO NR] is fixed to [Normal] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
Each mode in scene selection
[Sweep Panorama]
When [
File Format] is set to [RAW], this function is not available.
[
High ISO NR] does not work for RAW images when the [ File Format] is [RAW & JPEG].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ High ISO NR] → desired setting.
1
185
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Regist. Faces Priority
Sets whether to focus with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Registration].
Menu item details
On:
Focuses with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Registration].
Off:
Focuses without giving higher priority to registered faces.
Hint
To use the [Regist. Faces Priority] function, set as follows.
[Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.]: [On]
[Subject Detection] under [Face/Eye AF Set.]: [Human]
Related Topic
Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)
Face Registration (New Registration)
Face Registration (Order Exchanging)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Regist. Faces Priority] → desired setting.
1
186
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Face Registration (New Registration)
If you register faces in advance, the product can focus on the registered face as a priority.
Note
Up to eight faces can be registered.
Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask,
sunglasses, etc.
Related Topic
Regist. Faces Priority
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [New Registration].
1
Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
2
When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].
3
187
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Face Registration (Order Exchanging)
When multiple faces are registered to be given priority, the face registered first will be given priority. You can change the
priority order.
Related Topic
Regist. Faces Priority
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Order Exchanging].
1
Select a face to change the order of priority.
2
Select the destination.
3
188
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Face Registration (Delete)
Deletes a registered face.
Note
Even if you execute [Delete], the data for registered face will remain in the product. To delete the data for registered faces from
the product, select [Delete All].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Delete].
If you select [Delete All], you can delete all registered faces.
1
189
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Using flash (sold separately)
In dark environments, use the flash to light up the subject while shooting. Also use the flash to prevent camera-shake.
For details on the flash, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.
Note
The light of the flash may be blocked if the lens hood is attached and the lower part of a recorded image may be shaded.
Remove the lens hood.
When using the flash, stand 1 m or more away from the subject.
You cannot use the flash when recording movies. (You can use an LED light when using a flash (sold separately) with an LED
light.)
Before attaching/removing an accessory such as a flash to/from the Multi Interface Shoe, turn off the product first. When
attaching an accessory, make sure that the accessory is fixed securely to the product.
Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that applies voltage of 250 V or more or has the reverse
polarity of the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
When shooting with the flash and the zoom is set to W, the shadow of the lens may appear on the screen, depending on the
shooting conditions. If this happens, shoot away from the subject or set the zoom to T and shoot with the flash again.
The corners of a recorded image may be shaded, depending on the lens.
When using flash to shoot pictures of yourself, be careful not to look directly at the light, because the flash will go off at a close
distance.
For details on compatible accessories for the Multi Interface Shoe, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.
Attach the flash (sold separately) to the product.
1
Shoot after you have turned on the flash and it is fully charged.
(Flash charge icon) blinking: Charging is in progress
(Flash charge icon) lit up: Charging is finished
The available flash modes depend on the shooting mode and function.
2
190
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Flash Mode
You can set the flash mode.
Menu item details
Flash Off:
The flash does not operate.
Autoflash:
The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.
Fill-flash:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.
Slow Sync.:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a clear image of both the
subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.
Rear Sync.:
The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter. Rear sync shooting allows you
to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a moving car or a walking person.
Note
The default setting depends on the shooting mode.
Some [Flash Mode] settings are not available, depending on the shooting mode.
Related Topic
Using flash (sold separately)
Wireless Flash
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Flash Mode] → desired setting.
1
192
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Flash Comp.
Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV. Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light
only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.
Note
[Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
Each mode in scene selection
The higher flash effect (+ side) may not be visible due to the limited amount of flash light available, if the subject is outside the
maximum range of the flash. If the subject is very close, the lower flash effect (- side) may not be visible.
If you attach an ND filter to the lens or attach a diffuser or a color filter to the flash, the appropriate exposure may not be achieved
and images may turn out dark. In this case, adjust [Flash Comp.] to the desired value.
Related Topic
Using flash (sold separately)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Comp.] → desired setting.
Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower values (- side) makes the flash level
lower.
1
193
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
FEL lock
The flash level is automatically adjusted so that the subject gets the optimum exposure during normal flash shooting. You
can also set the flash level in advance.
FEL: Flash Exposure Level
Hint
By setting [FEL Lock hold], you can hold the setting while the button is pressed down. Also, by setting [FEL Lock/AEL hold] and
[FEL Lock/AEL tggle.], you can shoot images with the AE locked in the following situations.
When [Flash Mode] is set to [Flash Off] or [Autoflash].
When the flash cannot go off.
When using an external flash that is set to manual flash mode.
Note
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → desired button, then assign the [FEL Lock toggle]
function to the button.
1
Center the subject on which FEL is to be locked, and adjust the focus.
2
Press the button to which [FEL Lock toggle] is registered, and set the flash amount.
A pre-flash flashes.
The
(FEL lock) lights up.
3
Adjust the composition and shoot the image.
When you want to release the FEL lock, press the button to which the [FEL Lock toggle] is registered again.
4
194
The FEL lock cannot be set when a flash is not attached.
If a flash that does not support the FEL lock is attached, an error message is displayed.
When both AE and FEL lock are locked,
(AE lock/FEL lock icon) lights up.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
195
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
External Flash Set.
You can configure the settings of a flash (sold separately) attached to the camera using the monitor and control wheel of
the camera.
Update the software of your flash to the latest version before using this function.
For details on flash functions, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.
Menu item details
Ext. Flash Firing Set.:
Allows you to configure settings related to the firing of the flash, such as the flash mode, flash level, etc.
Ext. Flash Cust. Set.:
Allows you to configure other flash settings, wireless settings, and flash unit settings.
Hint
If you assign the [Ext. Flash Firing Set.] function to a key in advance by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [
Custom Key], you can call up the [Ext. Flash Firing Set.] screen simply by pressing that key.
You can adjust settings by operating the flash even while you are using [External Flash Set.].
You can also configure the settings for a Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately) attached to the camera.
Note
You can only use [External Flash Set.] to configure the settings of a flash (sold separately) or Wireless Radio Commander (sold
separately) manufactured by Sony and attached to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera.
You can only use [External Flash Set.] when the flash is attached directly to the camera. You cannot use this function when
shooting with an off-camera flash that is connected using a cable.
Only some of the functions of the attached flash are configurable using [External Flash Set.]. You cannot perform pairing with
other flashes, reset the flash, initialize the flash, etc. via [External Flash Set.].
[External Flash Set.] is unavailable under the following conditions:
When the flash is not attached to the camera
When a flash that does not support [External Flash Set.] is attached
During movie recording
In the movie recording mode or the slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode
Also, [External Flash Set.] may be unavailable depending on the state of the flash.
For details on flashes and Wireless Radio Commanders that are compatible with this function, refer to the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/dics/e10/
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Attach the flash (sold separately) to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera, and then turn on the camera
and the flash.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [External Flash Set.] → desired setting item.
2
Configure the setting using the control wheel of the camera.
3
196
197
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Wireless Flash
There are two methods for wireless flash shooting: light-signal flash shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to
the camera as a signal light, and radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication. To perform radio-signal
flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately). For details on how to set
each method, refer to the instruction manual of the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not use the wireless flash function.
On:
Uses the wireless flash function to make an external flash or flashes emit light at a distance from the camera.
Note
The off-camera flash may emit light after receiving a light signal from a flash used as the controller of another camera. If this
occurs, change the channel of your flash. For details on how to change the channel, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.
For the flash that is compatible with wireless flash shooting, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Wireless Flash] → [On].
1
Attach the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander to the Multi Interface Shoe.
When performing light-signal wireless flash shooting, set the attached flash as the controller.
When performing radio-signal wireless flash shooting with a flash attached to the camera, set the attached flash
as the commander.
2
Set up an off-camera flash that is set to wireless mode, or that is attached to the Wireless Radio Receiver
(sold separately).
You can perform a test flashing by assigning the [Wireless Test Flash] function to a custom key using [
Custom Key], and then pressing that key.
3
198
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Shooting movies
The start/stop movie recording function is assigned to the MOVIE (movie) button in the default settings. You can start
movie recording from the still image shooting mode by pressing the MOVIE button.
Hint
You can assign the start/stop movie recording function to a preferred key. MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom
Key] → set [Movie Shooting] to the preferred key.
When you want to specify the area to be focused on, set the area using [Focus Area].
To keep the focus on a face, arrange the composition so that the focusing frame and face detection frame overlap, or set the
[Focus Area] to [Wide].
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button (A) to select the movie recording mode.
Each time you press the button, the shooting mode switches in the order of still image shooting mode, movie
recording mode, and slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Shoot Mode] → desired shooting mode.
2
Press the MOVIE button to start recording.
3
Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
4
199
You can focus quickly while shooting movies by pressing the shutter button halfway down. (The sound of auto focus operation
may be recorded in some cases.)
To adjust the shutter speed and aperture value to the desired settings, switch to the movie recording mode and select the desired
shooting mode under [
Shoot Mode].
The following settings for still image shooting are applied to the movie shooting:
White Balance
Creative Style
Metering Mode
Face/Eye Priority in AF
Face Priority in Multi Metering
D-Range Optimizer
Lens Comp.
You can change the settings for ISO sensitivity, exposure compensation, and focus area while shooting movies.
When shooting movies, ISO values between ISO 100 and ISO 32000 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value larger than
ISO 32000, the setting is automatically switched to ISO 32000. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the
original setting.
When shooting movies, ISO values between ISO 100 and ISO 32000 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller than
ISO 100, the setting is automatically switched to ISO 100. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the
original setting.
While shooting movies, the recorded image can be output without the shooting information display by setting [HDMI Info. Display]
to [Off].
Note
The sound of the lens and the product in operation may be recorded during movie recording.
You can turn the sound off by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → [Off].
To prevent the operating sound of the zoom ring from being recorded during movie recording when a power zoom lens is used,
we recommend recording movies using the zoom lever of the lens. When you move the zoom lever of the lens, place your finger
lightly on the lever and operate it without flicking.
An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do not remove the memory card while the icon is
displayed.
The temperature of the camera tends to rise when shooting movies continuously, and you may feel that the camera is warm. This
is not a malfunction. Also, [Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.] may appear. In such cases, turn the power off and cool the
camera and wait until the camera is ready to shoot again.
If
(Overheating warning icon) appears, the temperature of the camera has risen. Turn the power off and cool the camera and
wait until the camera is ready to shoot again.
For the continuous shooting time of a movie recording, refer to “Recordable movie times.” When movie recording is finished, you
can record another movie by pressing the MOVIE button again. Recording may stop to protect the product, depending on the
temperature of the product or the battery.
When the movie recording mode or the slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode is selected or during movie recording, you
cannot select [Tracking] for [Focus Area].
In [Program Auto] mode when shooting movies, the aperture value and the shutter speed will be set automatically and cannot be
changed. For that reason, the shutter speed may become fast in a bright environment, and the motion of the subject may not be
recorded smoothly. By changing the shooting mode and adjusting the aperture value and the shutter speed, the motion of the
subject can be recorded smoothly.
In movie shooting mode, the following settings cannot be set in [Picture Effect]. When a movie recording starts, [Off] will be set
temporarily.
Soft Focus
HDR Painting
Rich-tone Mono.
Miniature
Watercolor
Illustration
The Face Detection function / Eye Detection function is not available in the following situations.
[
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [ Record Setting] is set to [30p 100M]/[25p 100M] or [30p 60M]/[25p 60M], and [
4K Output Select] is set to [Memory Card+HDMI].
200
[ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p 100M]/[100p 100M] or [120p 60M]/[100p 60M].
If you point the camera at an extremely strong light source while shooting a movie at low ISO sensitivity, the highlighted area in
the image may be recorded as a black area.
Related Topic
Shoot Mode (movie)
Movie w/ shutter
File Format (movie)
Recordable movie times
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Focus Area
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
201
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Shooting Slow-motion/Quick-motion movies (S&Q Settings)
You can record a moment that cannot be captured by the naked eye (slow-motion recording), or record a long-term
phenomenon into a compressed movie (quick-motion recording). For example, you can record an intense sports scene,
the moment when a bird starts to fly, a blooming flower, and a changing view of clouds or a starry sky.
The movie will be recorded in XAVC S HD format. Sound will not be recorded.
Menu item details
Record Setting:
Selects the frame rate of the movie.
Frame Rate:
Selects the shooting frame rate.
Playback speed
The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [
Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button (A) to select the slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode.
Each time you press the button, the shooting mode switches in the order of still image shooting mode, movie
recording mode, and slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Shoot Mode] → and select the desired setting of slow-
motion/quick-motion (Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).
2
Select MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [
Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
3
Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.
Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
4
Frame Rate Record Setting: 24p Record Setting: 30p Record Setting: 60p
120fps 5 times slower 4 times slower -
202
When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL
When [
Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps], you cannot set [ Record Setting] to [60p]/[50p].
Hint
For an estimation of recordable time, refer to “Recordable movie times.”
The bit-rate of a recorded movie varies depending on the settings for [
Frame Rate] and [ Record Setting].
Note
In slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this
happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.
During slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the following functions are not available.
[TC Run] under [TC/UB Settings]
[
TC Output] under [HDMI Settings]
[
4K Output Select]
Related Topic
Shoot Mode (S&Q)
Recordable movie times
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Frame Rate Record Setting: 24p Record Setting: 30p Record Setting: 60p
60fps 2.5 times slower 2 times slower Normal playback speed
30fps 1.25 times slower Normal playback speed 2 times quick
15fps 1.6 times quick 2 times quick 4 times quick
8fps 3 times quick 3.75 times quick 7.5 times quick
4fps 6 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick
2fps 12 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick
1fps 24 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick
Frame Rate Record Setting: 25p Record Setting: 50p
100fps 4 times slower -
50fps 2 times slower Normal playback speed
25fps Normal playback speed 2 times quick
12fps 2.08 times quick 4.16 times quick
6fps 4.16 times quick 8.3 times quick
3fps 8.3 times quick 16.6 times quick
2fps 12.5 times quick 25 times quick
1fps 25 times quick 50 times quick
203
204
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Livestreaming video and audio (USB Streaming) (movie)
You can connect a computer, etc. to the camera and use the camera video and audio for livestreaming or web-
conferencing services.
About USB cable connections
If the power of the camera is turned on while the USB cable is connected, [
USB Streaming] cannot be executed.
Unplug the USB cable, execute [
USB Streaming], and then reconnect the USB cable.
Hint
If you assign [
USB Streaming] to a custom key, you can launch [ USB Streaming] just by pressing the key.
The movie recording settings (focus, exposure, etc.) before executing [
USB Streaming] are applied to the livestreamed video.
Adjust the movie recording settings before you start streaming.
If you assign the shutter speed, ISO sensitivity, etc. to the control wheel or register them to the function menu, you can adjust
these values even during USB streaming.
If you assign [Product Showcase Set] or [Background Defocus] to [
Custom Key], you can use these functions even during
USB streaming.
The format of the streaming data is as follows.
Video format: MJPEG
Resolution: HD720 (1280×720)
Frame rate: 30 fps / 25 fps
Audio format: PCM, 48 kHz, 16 bit, 2 ch
During USB streaming, power is supplied to the camera from the computer. If you want to consume as little computer power as
possible, set [USB Power Supply] to [Off].
When using an external microphone, you can minimize deviations between your voice and the movements of your mouth by
connecting the microphone to the
(microphone) terminal of the camera.
Set the camera to a movie recording mode and set the exposure, focus, etc.
1
Select MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ USB Streaming].
[USB Streaming: Not Connect] will appear on the camera screen.
2
Follow the instructions on the screen to connect the camera to a computer or other device with a USB
cable.
[USB Streaming: Standby] will appear on the camera screen, and the camera will switch to the streaming standby
state.
Use a cable or adapter that matches the terminal on the device to be connected.
3
Start streaming from your livestreaming/web-conferencing service.
[USB Streaming: Output] will appear on the camera screen.
To exit [
USB Streaming], press the Still/Movie/S&Q button or the center of the control wheel. The camera
will return to the movie recording mode.
4
205
Note
You cannot do the following while [
USB Streaming] is running.
Recording the streaming video
Menu-screen operations
Transition to the playback screen
Capturing a custom white balance
PC Remote Function
Smartphone Connect
The following functions are disabled while [
USB Streaming] is running.
Power Save Start Time
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
206
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Shoot Mode (movie)
You can set the shooting mode for movie recording.
Menu item details
Intelligent Auto:
Allows you to shoot movies with automatic scene recognition.
Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
Recall Camera Set.:
Allows you to shoot after recalling often-used modes or numeric settings registered in advance.
Related Topic
About Scene Recognition
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the movie recording mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Shoot Mode] → desired shooting mode.
2
207
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Shoot Mode (S&Q)
You can set the shooting mode for slow-motion/quick-motion recording. You can change the shooting settings and
playback speed in [
S&Q Settings].
Menu item details
Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
Recall Camera Set.:
Allows you to shoot after recalling often-used modes or numeric settings registered in advance.
Related Topic
Shooting Slow-motion/Quick-motion movies (S&Q Settings)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Shoot Mode] → desired shooting mode.
2
208
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Movie recording formats
The following movie recording formats are available with this camera.
What is XAVC S?
Records movies in high definition such as 4K by converting them into MP4 movies using the MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 codec.
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 is capable of compressing images with higher efficiency. You can record high-quality images while
reducing the amount of data.
XAVC S recording format
XAVC S 4K:
Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps or approx. 60 Mbps
Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160).
XAVC S HD:
Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps, approx. 60 Mbps, approx. 50 Mbps, approx. 25 Mbps, or approx. 16 Mbps
Bit rate is the amount of data processed within a given period of time.
Related Topic
File Format (movie)
Record Setting (movie)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
209
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
File Format (movie)
Selects the movie file format.
Menu item details
XAVC S 4K:
Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160).
XAVC S HD:
Records movies in HD resolution (1920×1080).
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ File Format] → desired setting.
1
210
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Record Setting (movie)
Selects the frame rate and bit-rate for movie recording.
Menu item details
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]
MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Record Setting] → desired setting.
The higher the bit-rate, the higher the image quality.
1
Record Setting Bit-rate Description
30p 100M/ 25p 100M Approx. 100 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (30p/25p).
30p 60M/ 25p 60M Approx. 60 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (30p/25p).
24p 100M* Approx. 100 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).
24p 60M* Approx. 60 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC
*
Record Setting Bit-rate Description
60p 50M
/50p
50M
Approx. 50
Mbps
Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
60p 25M
/50p
25M
Approx. 25
Mbps
Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
30p 50M
/25p
50M
Approx. 50
Mbps
Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
30p 16M
/25p
16M
Approx. 16
Mbps
Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
24p 50M
*
Approx. 50
Mbps
Records movies in 1920×1080 (24p).
120p 100M/100p
100M
Approx. 100
Mbps
Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can record
movies in 120 fps or 100 fps.
You can create smoother slow-motion movies by using compatible editing
devices.
120p 60M/100p 60M
Approx. 60
Mbps
Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can record
movies in 120 fps or 100 fps.
You can create smoother slow-motion movies by using compatible editing
devices.
211
Note
Recording frame rates are indicated as the closest integer values. The actual corresponding frame rates are as follows:
24p: 23.98 fps, 30p: 29.97 fps, 60p: 59.94 fps, and 120p: 119.88 fps.
[120p]/[100p] cannot be selected for the following shooting modes.
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
Each mode in scene selection
The angle of view will be narrower under the following conditions:
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p]
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Record Setting] is set to [30p]
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC
*
212
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Proxy Recording
Sets whether to simultaneously record low-bit-rate proxy movies when recording movies. Since proxy movies are small
in file size, they are suitable for transferring to smartphones or uploading to websites.
Menu item details
On :
Proxy movies are simultaneously recorded.
Off :
Proxy movies are not recorded.
Hint
Proxy movies are recorded in the XAVC S HD format (1280×720) at 9 Mbps. The frame rate of the proxy movie is the same as
that of the original movie.
Proxy movies are not displayed on the playback screen (single-image playback screen or image index screen). (Proxy) is
displayed over movies for which a proxy movie was simultaneously recorded.
Note
Proxy movies cannot be played back on this camera.
Proxy recording is not available in the following situations.
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p]
Deleting/protecting movies that have proxy movies removes/protects both the original and proxy movies. You cannot
delete/protect only original movies or proxy movies.
Movies cannot be edited on this camera.
Related Topic
Movie recording formats
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
Memory cards that can be used
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Proxy Recording] → desired setting.
1
213
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Audio Recording
Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies. Select [Off] to avoid recording the sounds of the lens and the
camera operating.
Menu item details
On:
Records sound (stereo).
Off:
Does not record sound.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → desired setting.
1
214
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Audio Level Display
Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.
Menu item details
On:
Displays the audio level.
Off:
Does not display the audio level.
Note
The audio level is not displayed in the following situations:
When [Audio Recording] is set to [Off].
When DISP (Display Setting) is set to [No Disp. Info.].
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting
The audio level is also displayed while shooting stand-by in movie recording mode.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Level Display] → desired setting.
1
215
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Audio Rec Level
You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.
Menu item details
+:
Turns up the audio recording level.
-:
Turns down the audio recording level.
Reset:
Resets the audio recording level to the default setting.
Hint
When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record
more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a greater sound level to make
the sound easier to hear.
Note
Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.
[Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to movie mode.
[Audio Rec Level] is unavailable during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.
The [Audio Rec Level] settings are applied for both the internal microphone and the
(microphone) terminal input.
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Rec Level].
1
Select the desired level using the right/left sides of the control wheel.
2
216
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Audio Out Timing
You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio
during HDMI output.
Menu item details
Live:
Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.
Lip Sync:
Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.
Note
Using an external microphone may result in a slight delay. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the
microphone.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Out Timing] → desired setting.
1
217
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Wind Noise Reduct.
Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise by cutting the low-range sound of the input audio from the built-in microphone.
Menu item details
On:
Reduces wind noise.
Off:
Does not reduce wind noise.
Note
Setting this item to [On] where wind is not blowing sufficiently hard may cause normal sound to be recorded with too low volume.
When an external microphone (sold separately) is used, [Wind Noise Reduct.] does not function.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Wind Noise Reduct.] → desired setting.
1
218
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Picture Profile
Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc. For details on “Picture Profile,” refer to
https://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html.
Customizing the picture profile
You can customize the picture quality by adjusting picture profile items such as [Gamma] and [Detail]. When setting
these parameters, connect the camera to a TV or monitor, and adjust them while observing the picture on the screen.
Using the preset of the picture profile
The default settings [PP1] through [PP10] for movies have been set in advance in the camera based on various shooting
conditions.
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → desired setting.
PP1:
Example setting using [Movie] gamma.
PP2:
Example setting using [Still] gamma.
PP3:
Example setting of natural color tone using the [ITU709] gamma.
PP4:
Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard.
PP5:
Example setting using [Cine1] gamma.
PP6:
Example setting using [Cine2] gamma.
PP7:
Example setting using [S-Log2] gamma.
PP8:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3.Cine] under [Color Mode].
PP9:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3] under [Color Mode].
PP10:
Example setting for recording HDR movies using [HLG2] gamma.
HDR movie recording
The camera can record HDR movies when a gamma from [HLG], [HLG1] to [HLG3] is selected in the picture profile.
Picture profile preset [PP10] provides an example setting for HDR recording. Movies recorded using [PP10] can be
viewed with a wider range of brightness than usual when played back on a TV supporting Hybrid Log-Gamma (HLG).
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → the profile you want to change.
1
Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.
2
Select the item to change using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
3
Select the desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel and press in the center.
4
219
This way, even scenes with a wide range of brightness can be recorded and displayed faithfully, without looking under or
over-exposed. HLG is used in HDR TV program production, as defined in the international standard Recommendation
ITU-R BT.2100.
Items of the picture profile
Black Level
Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)
Gamma
Selects a gamma curve.
Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie.
(equivalent to HG4609G33)
Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to HG4600G30)
Cine3: Intensifies the contrast in light and shade more than [Cine1] and strengthens gradation in black.
Cine4: Strengthens the contrast in dark parts more than [Cine3].
ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709.
ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using [S-Log2] or [S-Log3].
S-Log2: Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will be processed after
shooting.
S-Log3: Gamma curve for [S-Log3] with more similar features to film. This setting is based on the assumption that the
picture will be processed after shooting.
HLG: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Equivalent to the HDR standard Hybrid Log-Gamma, ITU-R BT.2100.
HLG1: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Emphasizes noise reduction. However, shooting is restricted to a narrower
dynamic range than with [HLG2] or [HLG3].
HLG2: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Provides a balance of dynamic range and noise reduction.
HLG3: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Wider dynamic range than [HLG2]. However, noise may increase.
[HLG1], [HLG2], and [HLG3] all apply a gamma curve with the same characteristics, but each offers a different
balance between dynamic range and noise reduction. Each has a different maximum video output level, as follows:
[HLG1]: approx. 87%, [HLG2]: approx. 95%, [HLG3]: approx. 100%.
Black Gamma
Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.
[Black Gamma] is fixed at “0” and cannot be adjusted when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black stretch))
Knee
Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high intensity
areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.
[Knee] is disabled if [Mode] is set to [Auto] when [Gamma] is set to [Still], [Cine1], [Cine2], [Cine3], [Cine4],
[ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], [S-Log3], [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3]. To enable [Knee], set [Mode] to [Manual].
Mode: Selects auto/manual settings.
Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.
Auto Set: Settings when [Auto] is selected for [Mode
].
Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)
Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected for [Mode].
Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)
220
Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))
Color Mode
Sets type and level of colors.
In [Color Mode], only [BT.2020] and [709] are available when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].
Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].
Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1] or [Cine2].
Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when combined with ITU709
gamma)
ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with ITU709 gamma)
Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is set
to [S-Log2].
S-Gamut3.Cine: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when
[Gamma] is set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a color space that can easily be converted for digital
cinema.
S-Gamut3: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is
set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a wide color space.
BT.2020: Standard color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
709: Color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3] and movies are recorded with HDTV color
(BT.709).
Saturation
Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)
Color Phase
Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)
Color Depth
Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for
achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you
decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set [Color Mode] to [Black & White].
[R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
[G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
[B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
[C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
[M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
[Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)
Detail
Sets items for [Detail].
Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)
Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.
Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are set manually.))
V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to
the horizontal (H) side))
B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower
DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit level: unlikely to be limited))
Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening level))
Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)
To copy the settings to another picture profile number
221
You can copy the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → [Copy].
To reset the picture profile to the default setting
You can reset the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile settings at once.
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → [Reset].
Note
Since the parameters are shared for movie and still images, adjust the value when you change the shooting mode.
If you develop RAW images with shooting settings, the following settings are not reflected:
Black Level
Black Gamma
Knee
Color Depth
If you change [Gamma], the available ISO value range changes.
There may be more noise in dark parts depending on the gamma settings. It may improve by setting the lens compensation to
[Off].
When using S-Log2 or S-Log3 gamma, the noise becomes more noticeable compared to when using other gammas. If the noise
still is significant even after processing pictures, it may be improved by shooting with a brighter setting. However, the dynamic
range becomes narrower accordingly when you shoot with a brighter setting. We recommend checking the picture in advance by
test shooting when using S-Log2 or S-Log3.
Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In this case, perform
custom setup with a gamma other than [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], or [S-Log3] first, and then reselect [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2],
or [S-Log3] gamma.
Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] disables the [Black Level] setting.
If you set [Slope] to +5 in [Manual Set] under [Knee], [Knee] will be disabled.
S-Gamut, S-Gamut3.Cine, and S-Gamut3 are color spaces exclusive to Sony. However, this camera's S-Gamut setting does not
support the whole S-Gamut color space; it is a setting to achieve a color reproduction equivalent to S-Gamut.
Related Topic
Gamma Disp. Assist
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
222
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Gamma Disp. Assist
Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range.
Movies with the HLG gamma are assumed to be displayed on HDR-compatible monitors. They are therefore displayed in
low contrast during shooting, and may be difficult to monitor. However, you can use the [Gamma Disp. Assist] function to
reproduce contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when
playing back movies on the camera’s monitor.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not apply [Gamma Disp. Assist].
Auto:
Displays movies with an [S-Log2→709(800%)] effect when the gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [S-Log2], and with an [S-
Log3→709(800%)] effect when the gamma is set to [S-Log3]
. Displays movies with an [HLG(BT.2020)] effect when the
gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2] or [HLG3], and [Color Mode] is set to [BT.2020].
Displays movies with an [HLG(709)] effect when the gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2] or [HLG3],
and [Color Mode] is set to [709].
S-Log2→709(800%):
Displays movies with an S-Log2 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
S-Log3→709(800%):
Displays movies with an S-Log3 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
HLG(BT.2020):
Displays movies after adjusting the image quality of the monitor to a quality that is almost the same as when movies are
displayed on an [HLG(BT.2020)] compatible monitor.
HLG(709):
Displays movies after adjusting the image quality of the monitor to a quality that is almost the same as when movies are
displayed on an [HLG(709)] compatible monitor.
Note
Movies with the [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3] gamma are displayed with an [HLG(BT.2020)] effect or [HLG(709)] effect
depending on the movie’s gamma value and color mode. In other situations, movies are displayed according to the gamma
setting and color mode setting in [Picture Profile].
[Gamma Disp. Assist] is not applied to movies when displayed on a TV or monitor connected to the camera.
Related Topic
Picture Profile
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Gamma Disp. Assist].
1
Select the desired setting using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
2
223
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Auto Slow Shutter (movie)
Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the subject is dark.
Menu item details
On:
Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise
in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
Off:
Does not use Auto Slow Shutter. The recorded movie will be darker than when [On] is selected, but you can record
movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
Note
[
Auto Slow Shutter] does not function in the following situations:
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting
[Shutter Priority]
[Manual Exposure]
When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO]
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Auto Slow Shutter] → desired setting.
1
224
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Initial Focus Mag. (movie)
Sets the initial magnification scale for [Focus Magnifier] in the movie shooting mode.
Menu item details
x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x4.0:
Displays a 4.0-times enlarged image.
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.
1
225
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
AF Transition Speed (movie)
You can set the transition speed of the focus when the target of auto-focusing changes while shooting a movie.
Menu item details
7 (Fast) / 6 / 5 / 4 / 3 / 2 / 1 (Slow):
Select a faster value to focus on the subject more quickly.
Select a slower value to focus on the subject more smoothly.
Hint
You can use the touch focus function to intentionally transition the AF.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ AF Transition Speed] → desired setting.
1
226
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
AF Subj. Shift Sens. (movie)
You can set the sensitivity for shifting the focus to another subject when the original subject moves out of the focusing
area while shooting a movie.
Menu item details
5(Responsive) / 4 / 3 / 2 / 1(Locked on):
Select a higher value when you want to shoot a quick-moving subject, or when you want to shoot multiple subjects while
switching the focus continually.
Select a lower value when you want the focus to remain steady, or when you want to keep the focus on a particular
target without being affected by other subjects.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ AF Subj. Shift Sens.]→desired setting.
1
227
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
SteadyShot (movie)
Sets the [
SteadyShot] effect when shooting movies. When using a tripod (sold separately), setting [ SteadyShot]
to [Off] will result in a more natural image.
Menu item details
Active:
Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect using electronic SteadyShot.
Standard:
Provides a SteadyShot effect using lens-side SteadyShot. Use this setting under stable movie shooting conditions.
Off:
Does not use [
SteadyShot].
Note
If you set [
SteadyShot] to [Active], the angle of view will be narrower. It is recommended that you set [ SteadyShot] to
[Standard] when the focal length is 200 mm or more.
When a lens without a SteadyShot mechanism is attached, [Standard] cannot be selected.
If you intend to use the image stabilization function of the smartphone application Movie Edit add-on or the desktop application
Catalyst, set [
SteadyShot] to [Active] or [Off] on the camera.
The SteadyShot effect depends on the attached lens.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ SteadyShot] → desired setting.
1
228
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
SteadyShot Settings (movie)
You can shoot with an appropriate SteadyShot setting for the attached lens.
Menu item details
Auto:
Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
Manual:
Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal-length set using [
Focal Length]. (8mm-1000mm)
Check the focal-length index and set the focal-length.
Note
The SteadyShot function may not work optimally when the power has just been turned on or right after you point the camera
toward a subject.
When using a tripod, etc., make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because this can cause any malfunction when shooting.
[
SteadyShot Settings] will be unavailable when MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ SteadyShot] is set to [Off].
When the camera cannot obtain focal length information from the lens, the SteadyShot function does not work correctly. Set [
SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set [ Focal Length] to match the lens you are using. The currently set value for the
SteadyShot focal length will appear next to
(camera shake icon).
When using an SEL16F28 lens (sold separately) with a teleconverter, etc., set [
SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set the
focal length.
If a lens equipped with a SteadyShot switch is attached, the settings can only be changed using that switch on the lens. You
cannot switch the settings using the camera.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ SteadyShot] → [On].
1
[
SteadyShot Settings] → [ SteadyShot Adjust.] → desired setting.
2
229
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
TC/UB Settings
The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies.
Menu item details
TC/UB Disp. Setting:
Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
TC Preset:
Sets the time code.
UB Preset:
Sets the user bit.
TC Format:
Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
TC Run:
Sets the count up format for the time code.
TC Make:
Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
UB Time Rec:
Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
How to set the time code (TC Preset)
Note
When the monitor is flipped to shoot a self-portrait, the time code and user bit are not displayed.
How to reset the time code
How to set the user bit (UB Preset)
How to reset the user bit
MENU →
(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → setting value you want to change.
1
MENU →
(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].1.
Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
The time code can be set between the following range.
When [60p] is selected: 00:00:00.00 to 23:59:59.29
2.
When [24p] is selected, you can select the last two digits of the time code in multiples of four from 0 to 23 frames.
When [50p] is selected: 00:00:00.00 to 23:59:59.24
*
Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.3.
MENU →
(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].1.
Press the
(Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00.00).2.
MENU →
(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].1.
Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.2.
Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.3.
230
How to select the recording method for the time code (TC Format
*1
)
DF:
Records the time code in Drop Frame
*2
format.
NDF:
Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.
The setting is fixed to [NDF] when recording in 4K/24p or 1080/24p.
How to select the count up format for the time code (TC Run)
Rec Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The time code is recorded sequentially from
the last time code of the previous recording.
Free Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the camera operation.
The time code may not be recorded sequentially in the following situations even when the time code advances in
[Rec Run] mode.
When the recording format is changed.
When the recording medium is removed.
How to select how the time code is recorded (TC Make)
Preset:
Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.
Regenerate:
Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium and records the new time code
consecutively from the last time code. The time code advances in [Rec Run] mode regardless of the [TC Run] setting.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].1.
Press the
(Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).2.
MENU →
(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Format].1.
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*1
The time code is based on 30 frames per second. However, a gap between the actual time and the time code will occur during extended periods
of recording as the frame frequency of the NTSC image signal is approximately 29.97 frames per second. Drop frame corrects this gap to make
the time code and actual time equal. In drop frame, the first 2 frame numbers are removed every minute except for every tenth minute. The time
code without this correction is called non-drop frame.
*2
MENU →
(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Run].1.
MENU →
(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Make].1.
231
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
TC/UB Disp. Switch
Allows you to display the time code (TC) and user bit (UB) of a movie by pressing the key to which [TC/UB Disp. Switch]
function has been assigned.
Note
When the monitor is flipped while in a shooting mode, such as during self-portrait shooting, TC/UB information is not displayed. In
the playback mode, TC/UB information is displayed even when the monitor is flipped.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], [ Custom Key], or [ Custom Key] → assign
the [TC/UB Disp. Switch] function to the desired key.
1
Press the key to which [TC/UB Disp. Switch] is assigned.
Each time you press the key, the monitor display will switch from the movie recording time counter → time code
(TC) → user bit (UB), in that order.
2
232
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Marker Display (movie)
Sets whether or not to display markers set using [
Marker Settings] on the monitor while shooting movies.
Menu item details
On:
Markers are displayed. The markers are not recorded.
Off:
No marker is displayed.
Note
The markers are displayed during movie shooting standby, or while recording movies.
You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].
The markers are displayed on the monitor. (You cannot output the markers.)
Related Topic
Marker Settings (movie)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Display] → desired setting.
1
233
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Marker Settings (movie)
Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies.
Menu item details
Center:
Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen.
[Off]/[On]
Aspect:
Sets the aspect marker display.
[Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
Safety Zone:
Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV.
[Off]/[80%]/[90%]
Guideframe:
Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
[Off]/[On]
Hint
You can display several markers at the same time.
Place the subject on the cross point of the [Guideframe] to make a balanced composition.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Settings] → desired setting.
1
234
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Emph disp dur REC (movie)
Sets whether or not to display a red frame around the edges of the camera’s monitor while recording a movie. You can
easily check whether the camera is in standby or recording, even when you are looking at the camera monitor from an
angle or at a distance.
Menu item details
On:
Displays a red frame to indicate that recording is in progress.
Off:
Does not display a frame to indicate that recording is in progress.
Hint
The frame displayed by this function can also be output to an external monitor connected via HDMI. Set [HDMI Info. Display] to
[On].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Emph disp dur REC] → desired setting.
1
235
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
REC Lamp
You can choose whether or not the recording lamp lights up during recording.
Menu item details
On:
The recording lamp lights up during recording.
Off:
The recording lamp does not light up during recording.
Hint
Set [REC Lamp] to [Off] if the light of the recording lamp reflected by an object, such as glass, is captured by the camera.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [REC Lamp] → desired setting.
1
236
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Movie w/ shutter
You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button instead of the MOVIE (Movie) button.
Menu item details
On:
Enables movie recording using the shutter button when the camera is set to the movie recording mode or the slow-
motion/quick-motion recording mode.
Off:
Disables movie recording using the shutter button.
Hint
When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can still start or stop recording movies using the MOVIE button.
When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can use the shutter button to start or stop recording movies on an external
recording/playback device using [
REC Control].
Note
When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you cannot focus by pressing the shutter button halfway down during movie recording.
Related Topic
Shooting movies
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Movie w/ shutter] → desired setting.
1
237
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
4K Output Select (movie)
You can set how to record movies and perform HDMI output when your camera is connected to 4K-compatible external
recording/playback devices, etc.
Menu item details
Memory Card+HDMI:
Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(30p):
Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(24p):
Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(25p)
*
:
Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
Note
This item can be set only when the camera is in movie mode and connected to a 4K-compatible device.
When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p)] or [HDMI Only(25p)] is set, [HDMI Info. Display] will temporarily be set to [Off].
A 4K movie is not output to the connected 4K-compatible device during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.
When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p)] or [HDMI Only(25p)] is set, the counter does not move forward (the actual recording
time is not counted) while the movie is being recorded on an external recording/playback device.
When shooting 4K movies using the setting [Memory Card+HDMI], the movies will not be output to a device connected by HDMI
cable if you simultaneously record a proxy movie. If you want to perform HDMI output, set [
Proxy Recording] to [Off]. (In this
case, if you set [
Record Setting] to other values except [24p], the image will not be displayed on the screen of the camera).
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and the camera is connected via HDMI, the following functions are partially
restricted.
[Face/Eye Priority in AF]
[Face Priority in Multi Metering]
Tracking function
Related Topic
HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)
File Format (movie)
Record Setting (movie)
HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the movie recording mode.
1
Connect the camera to the desired device via an HDMI cable.
2
MENU →
(Setup) → [ 4K Output Select] → desired setting.
3
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL.
*
238
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
239
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Playing back still images
Plays back the recorded images.
Hint
The product creates an image database file on a memory card to record and play back images. An image that is not registered in
the image database file may not be played back correctly. To play back images shot using other devices, register those images to
the image database file using MENU →
(Setup) → [Recover Image DB].
If you play back the images right after continuous shooting, the monitor may display an icon indicating that data is being
written/the number of images left to write. During writing, some functions are not available.
You can also enlarge an image by double-tapping the monitor. In addition, you can drag and move the magnified position on the
monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.
Related Topic
Recover Image DB
Display as Group
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the
(Playback) button to switch to the playback mode.
1
Select the image with the control wheel.
Images shot with continuous shooting or interval shooting are displayed as one group. To play back the images
in the group, press the center of the control wheel.
2
240
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarges the image being played back. Use this function to check the focus of the image, etc.
Hint
You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.
You can change the initial magnification and initial position of enlarged images by selecting MENU →
(Playback) → [
Enlarge Initial Mag.] or [ Enlarge Initial Position].
You can also enlarge an image by double-tapping the monitor. In addition, you can drag and move the magnified position on the
monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.
Note
You cannot enlarge movies.
Related Topic
Touch Operation
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Display the image you want to enlarge, and slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the T side.
When the image is enlarged too much, slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the W side to adjust the zoom scale.
By rotating the control dial, you can switch to the previous or next image while keeping the same zoom scale.
The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera focused during shooting. If the focus location
information cannot be obtained, the camera will zoom in on the center of the image.
1
Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel.
2
Press the MENU button or the center of the control wheel to exit the playback zoom.
3
241
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)
Selects the orientation when playing back recorded images.
Menu item details
Auto:
When you rotate the camera, the displayed image rotates automatically by detecting the orientation of the camera.
Manual:
Images shot vertically are displayed vertically. If you have set the image orientation using the [Rotate] function, the image
will be displayed accordingly.
Off:
Images are always displayed horizontally.
Note
Movies shot vertically are played back horizontally during movie playback.
Related Topic
Rotating an image (Rotate)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Display Rotation] → desired setting.
1
242
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Rotating an image (Rotate)
Rotates a recorded image counter-clockwise.
Note
Even if you rotate a movie file, it will be played back horizontally on the monitor of the camera.
You may not be able to rotate images shot using other products.
When viewing rotated images on a computer, the images may be displayed in their original orientation depending on the
software.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Display the image to be rotated, then select MENU →
(Playback) → [Rotate].
1
Press the center of the control wheel.
The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The image rotates as you press the center.
If you rotate the image once, the image remains rotated even after the product is turned off.
2
243
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Playing back panoramic images
The product automatically scrolls a panoramic image from end to end.
Note
Panoramic images shot using other products may be displayed in a different size from the actual size, or may not scroll correctly.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the
(Playback) button to switch to playback mode.
1
Select the panoramic image to be played back using the control wheel and press the center to start
playback.
To pause playback, press the center again.
To scroll panoramic images manually, press the top/bottom/right/left during pause.
To return to the display of the entire image, press the MENU button.
2
244
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.
Menu item details
Standard. Mag.:
Displays an image with the standard magnification.
Previous Mag.:
Displays an image with the previous magnification. The previous magnification is stored even after exiting the playback
zoom mode.
Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Position
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] → desired setting.
1
245
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Enlarge Initial Position
Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback.
Menu item details
Focused Position:
Enlarges the image from the point of focus during shooting.
Center:
Enlarges the image from the center of the screen.
Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Mag.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [ Enlarge Initial Position] → desired setting.
1
246
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Playing back movies
Plays back the recorded movies.
Available operations during movie playback
You can perform slow playback and sound volume adjustment, etc. by pressing the down side of the control wheel.
: Playback
: Pause
: Fast-forward
: Fast-rewind
: Forward slow playback
: Reverse slow playback
: Next movie file
: Previous movie file
: Displays the next frame
: Displays the previous frame
: Photo Capture
: Sound volume adjustment
: Closes the operation panel
Hint
“Forward slow playback,” “Reverse slow playback,” “Displays the next frame” and “Displays the previous frame” are available
during pause.
Movie files recorded using other products may not be able to be playable on this camera.
Note
Even if you shoot the movie vertically, the movie will be displayed horizontally on the screen of the camera.
Related Topic
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the
(playback) button to switch to playback mode.
1
Select the movie to be played back using the control wheel and press the center of the control wheel to
start playback.
2
247
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Volume Settings
Sets the sound volume for movie playback.
Adjusting the volume during playback
Press the bottom side of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the operation panel, then adjust the
volume. You can adjust the volume while listening to the actual sound.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Volume Settings] → desired setting.
1
248
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Photo Capture
Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback
to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.
Related Topic
Shooting movies
Playing back movies
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.
1
MENU →
(Playback) → [Photo Capture].
2
Play back the movie and pause it.
3
Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse slow playback, displays the next frame, and
displays the previous frame, and then stop the movie.
4
Press
(Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.
The scene is saved as a still image.
5
249
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.
To change the number of images to be displayed
MENU →
(Playback) → [Image Index] → desired setting.
Menu item details
9 Images/25 Images
To return to single-image playback
Select the desired image and press the center of the control wheel.
To display a desired image quickly
Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control wheel, then press the top/bottom sides of the
control wheel. While the bar is being selected, you can display the calendar screen or folder selection screen by pressing
the center. In addition, you can switch View Mode by selecting an icon.
Related Topic
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the W side while the image is being played back.
1
Select the image by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel or turning the control
wheel.
2
250
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)
Sets which dial and method to use for jumping between images during playback. This function is useful when you want
to find one of many recorded images. You can also quickly find protected images or images set with a particular rating.
Menu item details
Select Dial/Wheel:
Selects the dial or wheel to use for jumping between images.
Image Jump Method:
Sets the method for playing back with Image Jump.
Note
A group is counted as one image when [Image Jump Method] is set to [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images].
When [Image Jump Method] is set to a parameter other than [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images], Image Jump will
only be available if [View Mode] is set to [Date View]
. If [View Mode] is not set to [Date View], the camera will always play back
every image without jumping when you use the dial selected with [Select Dial/Wheel].
When you use the Image Jump function and [Image Jump Method] is set to a parameter other than [One by one], [By 10 images],
or [By 100 images], movie files are always skipped.
Related Topic
Rating
Protecting images (Protect)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Image Jump Setting] → desired item.
1
251
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)
Sets the View Mode (image display method).
Menu item details
Date View:
Displays the images by date.
Folder View(Still):
Displays only still images.
XAVC S HD View:
Displays only XAVC S HD-format movies.
XAVC S 4K View:
Displays only XAVC S 4K-format movies.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [View Mode] → desired setting.
1
252
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Display as Group
Sets whether or not to display continuously shot images or images shot using interval shooting as a group.
Menu item details
On:
Displays images as a group.
Select a group and press the center of the control wheel to play back images in the group.
Off:
Does not display images as a group.
Hint
The following images are grouped.
Images shot with [Drive Mode] set to [Cont. Shooting] (One sequence of images shot continuously by holding down the shutter
button during continuous shooting becomes one group.)
Images shot with [
Interval Shoot Func.] (Images shot during one session of interval shooting become one group.)
On the image index screen, the
(Display as Group) icon is displayed over the group.
Note
Images can be grouped and displayed only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View]. When it is not set to [Date View], images
cannot be grouped and displayed, even if [Display as Group] is set to [On].
If you delete the group, all the images in the group will be deleted.
Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Interval Shoot Func.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Display as Group] → desired setting.
1
253
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Cont. PB for Interval
Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.
You can create movies from still images produced by interval shooting using the computer software Imaging Edge
Desktop (Viewer). You cannot create movies from the still images on the camera.
Hint
On the playback screen, you can start continuous playback by pressing the down button while displaying an image in the group.
You can resume play or pause by pressing the down button during playback.
You can change the playback speed by turning the control dial or the control wheel during playback. You can also change the
playback speed by selecting MENU →
(Playback) → [PB Speed for Interval].
You can continuously play back images shot with continuous shooting as well.
Related Topic
Interval Shoot Func.
PB Speed for Interval
Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Cont. PB for Interval].
1
Select the image group that you want to play back, and then press the center of the control wheel.
2
254
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
PB Speed for Interval
Sets the playback speed for still images during [Cont. PB for
Interval].
Hint
You can also change the playback speed by turning the control dial or the control wheel during [Cont. PB for
Interval].
Related Topic
Cont. PB for Interval
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [PB Speed for Interval] → desired setting.
1
255
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)
Automatically plays back images continuously.
Menu item details
Repeat:
Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous loop, or [Off], in which the product exits the slideshow
when all the images are played back once.
Interval:
Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec], [3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10 Sec] or [30 Sec].
To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback
Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the slideshow.
Hint
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel.
You can activate a slideshow only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View] or [Folder View(Still)].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Slide Show] → desired setting.
1
Select [Enter].
2
256
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Protecting images (Protect)
Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The
(Protect) mark is displayed on protected images.
Menu item details
Multiple Img.:
Applies the protection of the selected multiple images.
(1) Select the image to be protected, then press the center of the control wheel. The
(check) mark is displayed in
the check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to clear the check box.
(2) To protect other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].
All in this Folder:
Protects all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Protects all images taken on the selected date.
Cancel All in this Folder:
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected folder.
Cancel All with this date:
Cancels the protection of all images taken on the selected date.
All Images in This Group:
Protects all the images in the selected group.
Cancel All in This Group:
Cancels the protection of all the images in the selected group.
Hint
If you assign [Protect] to the key of your choice using MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], you can protect
images or cancel protection by simply pressing the key.
If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be protected. To select and protect particular images within
the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.
Note
The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Protect] → desired setting.
1
257
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Rating
You can assign ratings to recorded still images on a scale of the number of stars (
- ) to make it easier to find
images.
Combining this function with [Image Jump Setting] allows you to find a desired image quickly.
Hint
You can also assign ratings when playing back images by using the custom key. Assign [Rating] to the desired key using [
Custom Key] beforehand, and then press the custom key while playing back an image to which you want to assign a rating. The
level of
(Rating) changes each time you press the custom key.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Rating].
The image rating selection screen will appear.
1
Press the left/right sides of the control wheel to display an image to which you want to assign a rating, and
then press the center.
2
Select the level of
(Rating) by pressing the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center.
3
Press the MENU button to exit the rating setting screen.
4
258
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Sets the available number of stars (
) when rating images with the key to which you have assigned [Rating] using [
Custom Key].
Related Topic
Rating
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Rating Set(Custom Key)].
1
Add a
(check) mark to the level of (Rating) that you want to activate.
You can select the checked number when setting [Rating] using the custom key.
2
259
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Specifying images to be printed (Specify Printing)
You can specify in advance on the memory card which still images you want to print out later. The
(print order)
icon will appear on the specified images. DPOF refers to “Digital Print Order Format.”
DPOF setting will be retained after the image is printed. We recommend that you cancel this setting after printing.
Menu item details
Multiple Img.:
Selects images to order printing.
(1) Select an image and press the center of the control wheel. The
(check) mark is displayed in the check box. To
cancel the selection, press the center again and clear the check box.
(2) Repeat step (1) to print other images. To select all the images from a certain date or in a certain folder, select the
check box for the date or folder.
(3) MENU → [OK].
Cancel All:
Clears all DPOF marks.
Print Setting:
Sets whether to print the date on images registered with DPOF marks.
The position or size of the date (inside or outside of the image) may differ depending on the printer.
Note
You cannot add the DPOF mark to the following files:
RAW images
The number of copies cannot be specified.
Some printers do not support the date print function.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Specify Printing] → desired setting.
1
260
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Deleting a displayed image
You can delete an image displayed. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to be
deleted beforehand.
Note
The protected images cannot be deleted.
Related Topic
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Display the image you want to delete.
1
Press the
(Delete) button.
2
Select [Delete] using the control wheel.
3
261
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
You can delete multiple selected images. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to
be deleted beforehand.
Menu item details
Multiple Img.:
Deletes the selected images.
(1) Select the images to be deleted, then press the center of the control wheel. The
(check) mark is displayed in the
check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to clear the check box.
(2) To delete other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].
All in this Folder:
Deletes all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Deletes all images taken on the selected date.
All Other Than This Img.:
Deletes all images in the group except the selection.
All Images in This Group:
Deletes all images in the selected group.
Hint
Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.
To display the desired folder or date, select the desired folder or date during playback by performing the following procedure:
(Image Index) lever → select the bar on the left using the control wheel → select the desired folder or date using the
top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be deleted. To select and delete particular images within
the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.
Note
The protected images cannot be deleted.
The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.
Related Topic
Display as Group
Deleting a displayed image
Format
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Delete] → desired setting.
1
262
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Delete confirm.
You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as a default on the delete confirmation screen.
Menu item details
"Delete" first:
[Delete] is selected as the default setting.
"Cancel" first:
[Cancel] is selected as the default setting.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Delete confirm.] → desired setting.
1
263
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable
To view images stored on this product using a TV, an HDMI cable (sold separately) and an HD TV equipped with an
HDMI jack are required. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the compatible TV.
“BRAVIA” Sync
By connecting this product to a TV that supports “BRAVIA” Sync using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can operate
this product's playback functions with the TV remote control.
Turn off both this product and the TV.
1
Connect the HDMI micro terminal of this product to the HDMI jack of the TV using an HDMI cable (sold
separately).
Use an HDMI cable that is compatible with the HDMI micro terminal of the product and the HDMI jack of the TV.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the input.
3
Turn on this product.
Images shot with the product appear on the TV screen.
4
Select an image using the right/left sides of the control wheel.
The monitor of this camera is not lit up on the playback screen.
If the playback screen is not displayed, press the
(Playback) button.
5
After performing the steps above to connect this camera to a TV, select MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] →
[CTRL FOR HDMI] → [On].
1.
Press the SYNC MENU button on the TV remote control, and select the desired mode.2.
264
If you connect this camera to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.
Only TVs that support “BRAVIA” Sync can provide SYNC MENU operations. For details, refer to the operating
instructions supplied with the TV.
If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the product is connected to
another manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL
FOR HDMI] → [Off].
Hint
This product is compatible with the PhotoTV HD standard. When you connect a Sony PhotoTV HD-compatible device using an
HDMI cable (sold separately) or the USB cable, the TV becomes set to an image quality suitable for viewing still images, and a
whole new world of photos can be enjoyed in breathtakingly high quality.
Note
Do not connect this product and another device using the output terminals of both. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Some devices may not work properly when connected to this product. For example, they may not output video or audio.
Use an HDMI cable with the HDMI logo or a genuine Sony cable.
When [
TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In such cases, set [
TC Output] to [Off].
If images do not appear on the TV screen properly, select MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] →
[2160p/1080p], [1080p] or [1080i] according to the TV to be connected.
During HDMI output, when you switch the movie from 4K to HD image quality or vice-versa, or change the movie to a different
frame rate or different color mode, the screen may become dark. This is not a malfunction.
When [
Proxy Recording] is set to [On], images cannot be output to an HDMI device while recording a 4K movie.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
265
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Customization features of the camera
The camera has various customization features such as registration of functions and shooting settings to custom keys.
You can combine your preferred settings to customize the camera for easier operation.
For details on how to configure the settings and use them, refer to the page for each function.
To assign frequently used functions to buttons (
Custom Key/ Custom Key/ Custom Key)
You can change the functions of the buttons including the custom button according to your preferences.
It is recommended that you assign frequently used functions to easily operable buttons so that you can call up the
assigned functions simply by pressing the corresponding button.
To register frequently used functions to the Fn button (Function menu)
If you register functions frequently used in the shooting mode to the Function menu, you can display the registered
functions on the screen simply by pressing the Fn (Function) button. On the Function menu screen, you can recall the
function you want to use by selecting the icons.
To combine frequently used functions on the menu screen ( My Menu)
If you combine the frequently used items from menus such as the shooting, playback, and network menu on the “My
Menu” screen, you can quickly access the desired menu items.
266
To change the shooting settings quickly according to the scene ( Camera Set. Memory)
You can register the appropriate shooting settings* for scenes to the camera or a memory card, and recall the shooting
settings when shooting.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)
Add Item
Camera Set. Memory
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
You cannot register custom key settings.
*
267
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Camera Set. Memory
Allows you to register often-used modes or camera settings. You can register one to the camera and up to four to the
memory card (M1 through M4). Registered settings can be recalled when shooting. You can register individually in the
still image shooting mode, the movie recording mode, and the slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode.
Items that can be registered
You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu
of the camera.
Aperture (F number)
Shutter speed
To change registered settings
Change the setting to the desired one and reregister the setting to the same number.
Note
M1 through M4 can be selected only when a memory card is inserted into the product.
Program Shift cannot be registered.
Related Topic
Recall Camera Set.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Set the product to the setting you want to register.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Camera Set. Memory] → desired number.
The shooting settings for the currently selected mode (still image shooting mode/movie recording mode/slow-
motion and quick-motion recording mode) will be registered. For example, when you are selecting the still image
shooting mode, the settings are registered for still image shooting and can be recalled when in [
Shoot Mode].
2
Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.
3
268
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Dial/Wheel Setup
You can switch the functions of the control dial and the control wheel.
Menu item details
SS F/no.:
You can change the shutter speed using the control wheel, and change the aperture value using the control dial.
F/no. SS:
You can change the aperture value using the control wheel, and change the shutter speed using the control dial.
Note
[Dial/Wheel Setup] is enabled when the shooting mode is set to [Manual Exposure].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Dial/Wheel Setup] → desired setting.
1
269
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Dial / Wheel Lock
You can set whether the dial and wheel will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button.
Menu item details
Lock:
Locks the control dial and control wheel.
Unlock:
Does not lock the control dial or control wheel even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.
Hint
You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Dial / Wheel Lock] → desired setting.
1
270
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Add Item
You can register the desired menu items to
(My Menu) under MENU.
Hint
You can add up to 30 items to
(My Menu).
Note
You cannot add the following items to
(My Menu).
Any item under MENU →
(Playback)
Related Topic
Sort Item
Delete Item
Using MENU items
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(My Menu) → [Add Item].
1
Select an item that you want to add to
(My Menu) using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control
wheel.
2
Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
3
271
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Sort Item
You can rearrange the menu items added to
(My Menu) under MENU.
Related Topic
Add Item
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(My Menu) → [Sort Item].
1
Select an item that you want to move using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
2
Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
3
272
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Delete Item
You can delete menu items added to
(My Menu) of MENU.
Hint
To delete all the items on a page, select MENU →
(My Menu) → [Delete Page].
You can delete all the items added to
(My Menu) by selecting MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete All].
Related Topic
Delete Page
Delete All
Add Item
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(My Menu) → [Delete Item].
1
Select an item that you want to delete using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then
press the center to delete the selected item.
2
273
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Delete Page
You can delete all the menu items added to a page under
(My Menu) in MENU.
Related Topic
Add Item
Delete All
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(My Menu) → [Delete Page].
1
Select a page that you want to delete using the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center of the control wheel to delete the items.
2
274
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Display From My Menu
You can set My Menu to appear first when you press the MENU button.
Menu item details
On:
My Menu appears first when you press the MENU button.
Off:
The most recently displayed menu appears when you press the MENU button.
Related Topic
Add Item
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(My Menu) → [Display From My Menu] → desired setting.
1
276
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Auto Review
You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set the display time for Auto
Review.
Menu item details
10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec:
Displays the recorded image on the screen right after shooting for the selected duration of time. If you perform a
magnifying operation during Auto Review, you can check that image using the magnified scale.
Off:
Does not display the Auto Review.
Note
When you use a function that performs image processing, the image before processing may be displayed temporarily, followed by
the image after processing.
The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review display.
Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Auto Review] → desired setting.
1
277
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Aperture Preview
While you press and hold the key to which you assigned the [Aperture Preview] function, the aperture is stepped down to
the set aperture value and you can check the blurriness prior to shooting.
Hint
Although you can change the aperture value during the preview, the subject may be defocused if you select a brighter aperture.
We recommend that you adjust the focus again.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Shot. Result Preview
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → set the [Aperture Preview] function to the desired
key.
1
Confirm the image by pressing the key to which [Aperture Preview] was assigned.
2
278
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Shot. Result Preview
While pressing down the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] is assigned, you can check the image preview with the
DRO, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings applied. Check the shooting result preview before shooting.
Hint
The DRO settings, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings you have set are reflected on the image for [Shot. Result
Preview], but some effects cannot be previewed depending on the shooting settings. Even in that case, the settings you have
selected will be applied to the images you shoot.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Aperture Preview
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → set the [Shot. Result Preview] function to the
desired key.
1
Confirm the image by pressing the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] was assigned.
2
279
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Live View Display
Sets whether or not to apply the effects of settings such as exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative Style], and
[Picture Effect] to images on the screen.
Menu item details
Setting Effect ON:
Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of applying all your settings. This
setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while checking the results of the shot on the Live View screen.
Setting Effect OFF:
Displays Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative Style], or [Picture Effect].
When this setting is used, you can easily check the image composition.
Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in [Manual Exposure] mode.
When [Setting Effect OFF] is selected, the (VIEW) icon is displayed on the Live View screen.
Hint
When you use a third-party flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings. When
[Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], Live View Display will be displayed brightly, so that you can easily check the
composition.
Note
[Live View Display] cannot be set to [Setting Effect OFF] in the following situations:
When the still image shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], [Sweep Panorama], or each mode in scene
selection
In the movie recording mode or the slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode
When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], the brightness of the shot image will not be the same as that of the
displayed Live View.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Live View Display] → desired setting.
1
280
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Grid Line
Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.
Menu item details
Rule of 3rds Grid:
Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
Square Grid:
Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is useful for assessing the
composition when shooting landscapes, closeups, or when performing camera scanning.
Diag. + Square Grid:
Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Off:
Does not display the grid line.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Grid Line] → desired setting.
1
281
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Monitor Brightness
Adjust the brightness of the screen.
Menu item details
Manual:
Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.
Sunny Weather:
Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.
Note
The [Sunny Weather] setting is too bright for shooting indoors. Set [Monitor Brightness] to [Manual] for indoor shooting.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Monitor Brightness] → desired setting.
1
282
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Display Quality
You can change the display quality.
Menu item details
High:
Displays in high quality.
Standard:
Displays in standard quality.
Note
When [High] is set, battery consumption will be higher than when [Standard] is set.
When the temperature of the camera rises, the setting may become locked to [Standard].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Display Quality] → desired setting.
1
283
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Bright Monitoring
Allows you to adjust the composition when shooting in dark environments. By extending the exposure time, you can
check the composition on the monitor even in dark locations such as under the night sky.
Note
During [Bright Monitoring], [Live View Display] will automatically switch to [Setting Effect OFF], and setting values such as
exposure compensation will not be reflected in the live view display. It is recommended that you use [Bright Monitoring] only in
dark locations.
[Bright Monitoring] will be automatically cancelled in the following situations.
When the camera is turned off.
When the shooting mode for still image shooting is changed from [Program Auto], [Aperture Priority], [Shutter Priority], or
[Manual Exposure] to any other mode.
When the focus mode is set to other than manual focus.
When [
MF Assist] is executed.
When [Focus Magnifier] is selected.
During [Bright Monitoring], the shutter speed may be slower than normal while shooting in dark locations. Also, because the
measured brightness range is expanded, the exposure may change.
Related Topic
Live View Display
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → assign the [Bright Monitoring] function to the
desired key.
1
Press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function, then shoot an image.
The brightness due to [Bright Monitoring] will continue after shooting.
To return the monitor brightness to normal, press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function
once again.
2
284
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Format
When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the
camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory
card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable data on a computer, etc.
Note
Formatting permanently erases all data including protected images and registered settings (from M1 to M4).
The access lamp lights up during formatting. Do not remove the memory card while the access lamp is lit up.
Format the memory card on this camera. If you format the memory card on the computer, the memory card may not be usable
depending on the format type.
It may take a few minutes to complete formatting, depending on the memory card.
You cannot format the memory card if the remaining battery charge is less than 1%.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Format].
1
285
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
File/Folder Settings (still image)
Sets file names for still images to be shot, and specifies folders for storing the shot still images.
Menu item details
File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to still images.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers for each folder.
[Reset]: Resets file numbers for each folder.
Set File Name:
You can specify the first three characters of the file name.
Folder Name:
You can set how folder names are assigned.
[Standard Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + MSDCF”.
Example: 100MSDCF
[Date Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + Y (the last digit of the year)/MM/DD”.
Example: 10010405 (Folder number: 100; date: 04/05/2021)
Note
Only capital letters, numbers, and underscores can be used for [Set File Name]. Underscores cannot be used for the first
character.
The three characters specified using [Set File Name] are only applied to files recorded after the setting is made.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [ File/Folder Settings] → desired setting.
1
286
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
File Settings (movie)
Configure settings for the file names of recorded movies.
Menu item details
File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to movies.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers even if the memory card is changed.
[Reset]: Resets the file number when the memory card is changed.
Series Counter Reset:
Resets the series counter used when [File Number] is set to [Series].
File Name Format:
You can set the format for movie file names.
[Standard]: The file name of the recorded movie starts with “C.” Example: C0001
[Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+File number.”
[Date + Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Date+Title+File number.”
[Title + Date]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+Date+ File number.”
Title Name Settings:
You can set the title when [File Name Format] is set to [Title], [Date + Title], or [Title + Date].
Note
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be input for [Title Name Settings]. Up to 37 characters can be entered.
Titles specified using [Title Name Settings] are only applied to movies recorded after the setting is made.
You cannot set how folder names are assigned for movies.
If you are using an SDHC memory card, [File Name Format] is locked to [Standard].
If you insert a memory card used with [File Name Format] set to one of the following into another device, the memory card may
not function properly.
[Title]
[Date + Title]
[Title + Date]
If there are unused numbers due to file deletion, etc., these numbers will be reused when the movie file number reaches “9999.”
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [ File Settings] → desired setting.
1
287
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Display Media Info.
Displays the recordable time of movies for the inserted memory card. Also displays the number of recordable still images
for the inserted memory card.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Display Media Info.].
1
288
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Select REC Folder
If [Folder Name] under [
File/Folder Settings] is set to [Standard Form] and there are 2 folders or more, you can select
the folder on the memory card to which images are to be recorded.
Note
You cannot select the folder when [Folder Name] under [
File/Folder Settings] is set to [Date Form].
Related Topic
File/Folder Settings (still image)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU→
(Setup)→[Select REC Folder]→desired folder.
1
289
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
New Folder
Creates a new folder on the memory card for recording still images. A new folder is created with a folder number one
greater than the largest folder number currently used. Images are recorded in the newly created folder.
Note
When you insert a memory card that was used with other equipment into this product and shoot images, a new folder may be
automatically created.
Up to 4,000 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new folder may be automatically
created.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU→
(Setup)→[New Folder].
1
290
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Recover Image DB
If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image database file. In such cases, the images
on the memory card will not be played back on this product. If these problems happen, repair the file using [Recover
Image DB].
Note
If the battery pack is extremely depleted, image database files cannot be repaired. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.
Images recorded on the memory card are not deleted by [Recover Image DB].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Recover Image DB] → [Enter].
1
291
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Audio signals
Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.
Menu item details
On:
Sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Sounds are not produced.
Note
If [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the camera will not beep when it focuses on a subject.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Audio signals] → desired setting.
1
292
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Power Setting Option
You can perform camera power settings.
Menu item details
Power Save Start Time:
Sets time intervals to automatically switch to the power-save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent
wearing down the battery pack.
Power Save by Monitor:
Sets whether or not to enable power-save linkage when the monitor is opened or closed facing inward.
Auto Power OFF Temp.:
Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to [High],
you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal.
Setting the power-save start time
Off/30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min/10 Sec
Note
Turn off the camera when you do not plan to use it for a long time.
The power-save function is deactivated in the following situations:
During [
USB Streaming]
While power is being supplied via USB
While playing back slideshows
While recording movies
While connected to a computer or TV
When [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On]
Setting the power-save linkage with the monitor
Both Linked:
Enables power-save linkage with the monitor. The camera returns from power saving mode when the monitor is opened,
and enters power saving mode when the monitor is closed facing inward.
Open: Return:
The camera returns from power saving mode when the monitor is opened.
Close: Power Save:
The camera enters power saving mode when the monitor is closed facing inward.
Does Not Link:
Disables power-save linkage with the monitor.
MENU →
(Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → select an item that you want to set.
1
MENU →
(Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [Power Save Start Time] → desired setting.1.
MENU →
(Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [Power Save by Monitor] → desired setting.1.
293
Setting the auto power-off temperature
Standard:
Sets the standard temperature for the camera to turn off.
High:
Sets the temperature at which the camera turns off to higher than [Standard].
Notes when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]
Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand. Use a tripod.
Using the camera while holding it in your hand for a long period of time may cause low-temperature burns.
Note
Even if [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High], depending on the conditions or the temperature of the camera, the recordable
time for movies may not change.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [Auto Power OFF Temp.] → desired setting.1.
294
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
NTSC/PAL Selector
Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.
Note
When you perform [NTSC/PAL Selector], and the setting is changed from the default one, a message "Running on NTSC." or
"Running on PAL." will appear on the start-up screen.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [NTSC/PAL Selector] → [Enter]
1
295
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution
When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately),
you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.
Menu item details
Auto:
The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
2160p/1080p:
Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
Note
If the images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select either [1080i], [1080p] or [2160p/1080p], based on which
TV is to be connected.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → desired setting.
1
296
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60p compatible models)
You can set 1080/24p or 1080/60p as the HDMI output format when [
Record Setting] is set to [24p 50M ], [24p
60M] or [24p 100M].
Menu item details
60p:
Movies are output as 60p.
24p:
Movies are output as 24p.
Related Topic
Record Setting (movie)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → [1080p] or [2160p/1080p].
1
MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ 24p/60p Output] → desired setting.
2
297
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display
Selects whether to display the shooting information when this product and the TV are connected using an HDMI cable
(sold separately).
Menu item details
On:
Displays the shooting information on the TV.
The recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on the TV, while nothing is displayed on the camera’s
monitor.
Off:
Does not display the shooting information on the TV.
Only the recorded image is displayed on the TV, while the recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on
the camera’s monitor.
Note
When the camera is connected to an HDMI device while [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], the setting switches to [Off].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Info. Display] → desired setting.
1
298
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie)
Sets whether or not to layer the TC (time code) information on the output signal via the HDMI terminal when outputting
the signal to other professional-use devices.
This function layers the time code information on the HDMI output signal. The product sends the time code information
as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The connected device can then refer to the digital data to
recognize the time data.
Menu item details
On:
Time code is output to other devices.
Off:
Time code is not output to other devices.
Note
When [
TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In such cases, set [
TC Output] to [Off].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ TC Output] → desired setting.
1
299
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)
If you connect the camera to an external recorder/player, you can remotely command the recorder/player to start/stop
recording using the camera.
Menu item details
On:
(STBY) The camera can send a recording command to an external recorder/player.
(REC) The camera is sending a recording command to an external recorder/player.
Off:
The camera is not able to send a command to an external recorder/player to start/stop recording.
Note
Available for external recorders/players compatible with [
REC Control].
When you use the [
REC Control] function, set the camera to the movie recording mode.
When [
TC Output] is set to [Off], you cannot use the [ REC Control] function.
Even when
(REC) is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work properly depending on the settings or status of
the recorder/player. Check if the external recorder/player works properly before use.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ REC Control] → desired setting.
1
300
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI
When connecting this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can
operate this product by aiming the TV remote control at the TV.
Menu item details
On:
You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Off:
You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Note
If you connect this product to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.
[CTRL FOR HDMI] is available only with a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV. Also, the SYNC MENU operation differs depending on
the TV you are using. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.
If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the product is connected to another
manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [Off].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → desired setting.
1
Connect this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV.
The input of the TV is switched automatically and images on this product are displayed on the TV screen.
2
Press the SYNC MENU button of the TV’s remote control.
3
Operate this product using the TV’s remote control.
4
301
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
USB Connection
Selects the USB connection method when this product is connected to a computer, etc.
Select MENU →
(Network) → [Smartphone Connect] → [Smartphone Connection] → [Off] beforehand.
Also, set MENU → (Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [PC Remote] → [Off].
Menu item details
Auto:
Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be
connected.
Mass Storage:
Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product and a computer or other USB device.
MTP:
Establishes an MTP connection between this product and a computer or other USB device.
Note
It may take some time to make the connection between this product and a computer when [USB Connection] is set to [Auto].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [USB Connection] → desired setting.
1
302
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
USB LUN Setting
Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.
Menu item details
Multi:
Normally, use [Multi].
Single:
Set [USB LUN Setting] to [Single] only if you cannot make a connection.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [USB LUN Setting] → desired setting.
1
303
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
USB Power Supply
Sets whether to supply power via the USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or an USB device.
Menu item details
On:
Power is supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.
Off:
Power is not supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc. If you use the
supplied AC Adaptor, power will be supplied even when [Off] is selected.
Operations available while supplying power via a USB cable
The following table shows you which operations are available/unavailable while supplying power via a USB cable.
Note
Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [USB Power Supply] → desired setting.
1
Operation Available / Unavailable
Shooting images Available
Playing back images Available
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connections Available
Charging a battery pack Unavailable
Turning the camera on without a battery pack inserted Unavailable
304
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Date/Time Setup
The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on this product for the first time or when the internal
rechargeable backup battery has fully discharged. Select this menu when setting the date and time after the first time.
Menu item details
Daylight Savings:
Selects Daylight Savings [On]/[Off].
Date/Time:
Sets the date and time.
Date Format:
Selects the date and time display format.
Hint
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack, and leave the product for 24 hours or more
with the power off.
If the clock resets every time the battery is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out. Consult your
service facility.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Date/Time Setup] → desired setting.
1
306
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Version
Displays the version of this product’s software. Check the version when updates for this product’s software are released,
etc.
Also displays the version of the lens if a lens compatible with firmware updates is attached.
The version of the Mount Adaptor is displayed in the lens area if a Mount Adaptor compatible with firmware updates is
attached.
Note
Updating can be performed only when the battery level is
(3 remaining battery bars) or more. The use of a sufficiently
charged battery or the AC Adaptor (sold separately) is recommended.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Version].
1
308
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Setting Reset
Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform [Setting Reset], the recorded images are retained.
Menu item details
Camera Settings Reset:
Initializes the main shooting settings to the default settings.
Initialize:
Initializes all the settings to the default settings.
Note
Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.
The value set with [AF Micro Adj.] will not be reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed.
Settings of [Picture Profile] will not be reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed.
Related Topic
AF Micro Adj.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Setting Reset] → desired setting.
1
309
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Functions available with a smartphone (Imaging Edge Mobile)
Using the smartphone application Imaging Edge Mobile, you can shoot an image while controlling the camera using a
smartphone or transfer the images recorded on the camera to the smartphone. Download and install the application
Imaging Edge Mobile from your smartphone’s application store. If Imaging Edge Mobile is already installed on your
smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version.
For details on Imaging Edge Mobile, refer to the support page (https://www.sony.net/iem/).
Note
Depending on future version upgrades, the operational procedures or screen displays are subject to change without notice.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
310
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Smartphone Connect
You can adjust settings related to smartphone connection.
Menu item details
Smartphone Connection:
Sets whether to connect the camera and a smartphone. ([On] / [Off])
Connection:
Displays the QR Code or SSID used to connect the camera to a smartphone.
Cnct. while Power OFF:
Sets whether to accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off. ([On] / [Off])
Remote Shoot Setting:
Configures settings for images saved when performing remote shooting using a smartphone. ([Still Img. Save Dest.] / [
Save Image Size] / [ RAW+J Save Image])
Always Connected:
Sets whether to always connect the camera and a smartphone that has previously been connected. ([On] / [Off])
If this item is set to [On], once you connect the camera to a smartphone, you do not need to perform the connection
procedure on the camera again. If it is set to [Off], connect the camera and the smartphone manually when you want to
connect them.
Note
If [
Always Connected] is set to [On], the power consumption will be greater than when it is set to [Off].
Related Topic
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the QR Code
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the SSID and password
Cnct. while Power OFF
Using a smartphone as a remote commander
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU→
(Network) → [Smartphone Connect] → desired setting.
1
311
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the QR Code
You can connect your smartphone to the camera using the QR Code. You can connect to the camera with the same
operation on any Android smartphone, iPhone, or iPad.
To connect the camera and your smartphone, Imaging Edge Mobile is required. Download and install the application
Imaging Edge Mobile from your smartphone’s application store. If Imaging Edge Mobile is already installed on your
smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version.
For details on Imaging Edge Mobile, refer to the support page (https://www.sony.net/iem/).
Hint
Once the QR Code has been read, this camera’s SSID (DIRECT-xxxx) and password are registered to the smartphone. This
enables you to easily connect the smartphone to the camera via Wi-Fi at a later date by selecting the camera from the camera list
in Imaging Edge Mobile. (Set [Smartphone Connection] to [On] in advance.)
Note
Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency
band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do
this, the location information link function is not available.
If you cannot connect your smartphone to the camera using the QR Code, use the SSID and password.
On the camera, select MENU →
(Network) → [Smartphone Connect] → [Smartphone Connection] →
[On].
1
On the camera, select MENU →
(Network) → [Smartphone Connect] → [ Connection] to display the
QR Code screen.
2
Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone and select [Connect with a new camera].
3
Scan the QR Code displayed on the camera while the [Connect using the camera QR Code] screen is
displayed on the smartphone.
Once the QR Code has been read, a message [Connect with the camera?] will be displayed on the smartphone
screen.
4
Select [OK] on the smartphone screen.
The smartphone is connected to the camera.
5
312
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the SSID and password
Connect your smartphone to the camera using the SSID and password if you cannot connect using the QR Code. You
can connect to the camera with the same operation on any Android smartphone, iPhone, or iPad.
To connect the camera and your smartphone, Imaging Edge Mobile is required. Download and install the application
Imaging Edge Mobile from your smartphone’s application store. If Imaging Edge Mobile is already installed on your
smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version.
For details on Imaging Edge Mobile, refer to the support page (https://www.sony.net/iem/).
Note
Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency
band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do
this, the location information link function is not available.
Related Topic
Functions available with a smartphone (Imaging Edge Mobile)
Smartphone Connect
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the QR Code
On the camera, select MENU →
(Network) → [Smartphone Connect] → [Smartphone Connection] →
[On].
1
On the camera, select MENU →
(Network) → [Smartphone Connect] → [ Connection] to display the
QR Code screen.
2
Press the
(Delete) button on the camera to switch to the SSID and password screen.
3
Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone, and select [Connect with a new camera] → [Connect
using the camera SSID/password].
4
Input the password that is displayed on the camera.
The smartphone is connected to the camera.
5
314
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
315
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Cnct. while Power OFF
Sets whether or not to accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off. When [
Cnct.
while Power OFF] is set to [On], you can browse images on the camera's memory card and transfer images from the
camera to a smartphone by operating the smartphone.
Menu Item Details
On
:
Accepts Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.
The battery level is depleted gradually while the camera is turned off. If you do not want to use [ Cnct. while Power
OFF], turn it off.
Off
:
Does not accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.
How to browse/transfer images on the smartphone
Advance Preparation
Operations
Note
If the smartphone is not operated for a certain period of time, the Bluetooth connection will become deactivated. Select [Camera
Remote Power ON/OFF] again on the smartphone.
When the camera is turned on, the camera will switch to the shooting screen, and the connection with the smartphone will be
terminated.
Related Topic
Functions available with a smartphone (Imaging Edge Mobile)
Selecting images on the smartphone to transfer
MENU →
(Network) → [Smartphone Connect] → [ Cnct. while Power OFF] → desired setting.
1
Select MENU →
(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On] on the camera.1.
MENU →
(Network) → [Smartphone Connect] → [ Cnct. while Power OFF] → [On].2.
Select MENU →
(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing] on the camera to display the screen for pairing.3.
Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on the smartphone, and then select the camera to be paired on the [Camera Remote
Power ON/OFF] screen.
4.
Turn off the camera.1.
Select [Camera Remote Power ON/OFF] in Imaging Edge Mobile.2.
Select the camera on the [Remote Power ON/OFF] screen to turn on the camera.
When the power turns on, the power mark turns green.
3.
Select the [Import In-camera Images] button on the screen to select the function.
The images saved on the memory card of the camera can be viewed and are ready to be transferred.
4.
316
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Using a smartphone as a remote commander
With Imaging Edge Mobile, you can shoot images while checking the shooting range of the camera on the screen of the
smartphone.
Connect the camera and smartphone by referring to "Related Topic" at the bottom of this page.
For details on functions that can be operated from a smartphone, see the Imaging Edge Mobile support page:
https://www.sony.net/iem/
Related Topic
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the QR Code
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the SSID and password
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
318
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Selecting images on the smartphone to transfer
With Imaging Edge Mobile, when transferring images saved on the camera to the smartphone, you can select images to
transfer and perform transfer operations on your smartphone.
Connect the camera and smartphone by referring to "Related Topic" at the bottom of this page.
For details on functions that can be operated from a smartphone, see the Imaging Edge Mobile support page:
https://www.sony.net/iem/
Related Topic
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the QR Code
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the SSID and password
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
319
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Send to Smartphone Func.
You can transfer images to a smartphone by selecting images on the camera.
The following is the procedure for transferring the image currently displayed on the camera.
Menu item details
Send to Smartphone:
Selects images and transfers them to a smartphone. ([This Image] / [All Images in This Group] / [All with this date] / [All
with this date(
)] / [All with this date( )] / [Multiple Images])
The options displayed may differ depending on the View Mode selected on the camera.
If you select [Multiple Images], select the desired images using the center of the control wheel, then press MENU →
[Enter].
Size of Sending Image:
MENU →
(Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Size of Sending Image], [RAW+J Trans. Trgt.],
and [
Sending Target] → desired setting.
1
Display the image to be transferred on the playback screen.
2
MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Send to Smartphone] → [This Image].
The QR Code is displayed on the monitor of the camera.
You can also display the [Send to Smartphone Func.] screen by pressing the (Send to Smartphone) button.
3
Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone, and select [Connect with a new camera].
4
Scan the camera’s QR Code with your smartphone while displaying the [Connect using the camera QR
Code] screen on the smartphone.
Once the QR Code is read, [Connect with the camera?] will appear on the smartphone.
5
Select [OK] on the smartphone.
The camera and your smartphone will be connected, and the image will be transferred.
You can transfer multiple images at once by selecting a setting other than [This Image] in [Send to
Smartphone].
6
320
Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the smartphone. The original-sized JPEG file or a 2M-equivalent
JPEG file can be transferred. ([Original] / [2M])
RAW+J Trans. Trgt.:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to a smartphone when the images are shot with [
File Format] set to
[RAW & JPEG]. ([JPEG Only] / [RAW Only] / [RAW & JPEG])
Sending Target:
Sets whether to transfer the low-bit-rate proxy movie or the high-bit-rate original movie when transferring a movie to a
smartphone. ([Proxy Only] / [Original Only] / [Proxy & Original])
Hint
If you cannot connect your smartphone to the camera using the QR Code, use the SSID and password.
Note
Depending on the smartphone, the transferred movie may not be played back correctly. For example, the movie may not play
smoothly, or there may be no sound.
Depending on the format of the still image, movie, slow-motion movie, or quick-motion movie, it may not be possible to play it
back on a smartphone.
This product shares connection information for transferring images with devices that have permission to connect. If you want to
change the devices that are permitted to connect to the product, reset the connection information by following these steps. MENU
→
(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset]. After resetting the connection information, you must register the
smartphone again.
When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].
Related Topic
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the QR Code
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the SSID and password
Airplane Mode
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
321
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Location Info. Link Set.
You can use the application Imaging Edge Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected
with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting
images.
Preparation in advance
To use the location information linking function of the camera, the application Imaging Edge Mobile is required.
If “
Location Information Linkage” is not displayed on the top page of Imaging Edge Mobile, you need to perform the
following steps beforehand.
Operating procedure
: Operations performed on the smartphone
: Operations performed on the camera
Install Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone.
You can install Imaging Edge Mobile from the application store of your smartphone. If you have already installed
the application, update it to the latest version.
1.
Transfer a pre-recorded image to your smartphone using the [Send to Smartphone] function of the camera.
After you transfer an image recorded using the camera to your smartphone, “Location Information Linkage” will
appear on the top page of the application.
2.
: Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen. In steps 2 to 7, the pairing
operation is performed using the camera and the application Imaging Edge Mobile.
If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing
and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application
Imaging Edge Mobile.
1.
: On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].2.
: On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing].3.
: Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed, follow the steps in “Preparation in advance” above.
4.
: Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge
Mobile.
5.
: Follow the instructions on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge Mobile, and then
select your camera from the list.
6.
: Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera.
Pairing of the camera and Imaging Edge Mobile is complete.
7.
322
Menu item details
Location Info. Link:
Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
Auto Time Correct.:
Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Auto Area Adjust.:
Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Icons displayed when obtaining the location information
(Obtaining location information): The camera is obtaining the location information.
(Location information cannot be obtained): The camera cannot obtain the location information.
(Bluetooth connection available): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is established.
(Bluetooth connection unavailable): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is not established.
Hint
Location information can be linked when Imaging Edge Mobile is running on your smartphone even if the smartphone monitor is
off. However, if the camera has been turned off for a while, location information may not be linked immediately when you turn the
camera back on. In this case, location information will be linked immediately if you open the Imaging Edge Mobile screen on the
smartphone.
When Imaging Edge Mobile is not operating, such as when the smartphone is restarted, launch Imaging Edge Mobile to resume
location information linking.
If the location information linking function does not work properly, see the following notes and perform pairing again.
Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in Imaging Edge Mobile.
Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.
For more detailed instructions, refer to the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/iem/btg/
Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. Before performing pairing again, first delete the pairing
information for the camera registered in the smartphone's Bluetooth settings and Imaging Edge Mobile.
The location information will not be recorded when it cannot be obtained, such as when the Bluetooth connection is
disconnected.
The camera can be paired with up to 15 Bluetooth devices, but can link the location information with that of only one smartphone.
If you want to link the location information with that of another smartphone, turn off the [Location Information Linkage] function of
the smartphone that is already linked.
If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired smartphone.
When pairing the camera and your smartphone, be sure to use the [Location Information Linkage] menu on Imaging Edge
Mobile.
To use the location information linkage function, set [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [Off].
The communication distance for Bluetooth or Wi-Fi may vary depending on the conditions of use.
Supported smartphones
Refer to the support page for the latest information.
: On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [ Location Info. Link Set.] → [Location Info. Link] → [On].
(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information
obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.
8.
323
https://www.sony.net/iem/btg/
For details on Bluetooth versions compatible with your smartphone, check the product website for your smartphone.
Related Topic
Functions available with a smartphone (Imaging Edge Mobile)
Bluetooth Settings
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
324
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
You can operate the camera using a Bluetooth remote commander (sold separately). For details on compatible remote
commander, visit the Sony web site in your area, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.
Select MENU →
(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On] in advance. Refer to the
instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander as well.
Menu item details
On:
Enables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Off:
Disables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Hint
The Bluetooth connection is only active while you are operating the camera using the Bluetooth remote commander.
Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To use the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing
again.
If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired Bluetooth remote commander.
You cannot use the following functions while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].
Linking location information with a smartphone
Power-save function
If the function does not work properly, check the following notes and then try pairing again.
Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.
On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] → [On].
If there is no Bluetooth device currently paired with the camera, the screen for pairing as described in Step 2 will
appear.
1
On the camera, select MENU →
(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing] to display the screen for
pairing.
2
On the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing.
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander.
3
On the camera, select [OK] on the confirmation screen for the Bluetooth connection.
Pairing is complete, and you can now operate the camera from the Bluetooth remote commander. After pairing
the device once, you can connect the camera and the Bluetooth remote commander again in the future by
setting [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [On].
4
325
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Airplane Mode
When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-related functions including Wi-Fi.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Network) → [Airplane Mode] → desired setting.
If you set [Airplane Mode] to [On], an airplane mark will be displayed on the screen.
1
327
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push
If your access point has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily.
Note
[WPS Push] works only if the security setting of your access point is set to WPA or WPA2 and your access point supports the Wi-
Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method. If the security setting is set to WEP or your access point does not support the Wi-Fi
Protected Setup (WPS) button method, perform [Access Point Set.].
For details about the available functions and settings of your access point, see the access point operating instructions or contact
the administrator of the access point.
A connection may not be possible or the communication distance may be shorter depending on the surrounding conditions, such
as the type of wall material and the presence of obstructions or radio waves between the product and access point. In this case,
change the location of the product or move the product closer to the access point.
Related Topic
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Network) →[Wi-Fi Settings] → [WPS Push].
1
Push the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button on the access point to connect.
2
328
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.
You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point,
security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point
operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.
Other setting items
Depending on the status or the setting method of your access point, you may want to set more items.
WPS PIN:
Displays the PIN code you enter into the connected device.
Priority Connection:
Select [On] or [Off].
IP Address Setting:
MENU →
(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Access Point Set.].
1
Select the access point you want to register.
When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the desired access point.
When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select [Manual Setting] and set the access
point.
If you select [Manual Setting], input the SSID name of the access point, then select the security system.
2
Input the password, and select [OK].
Access points without the (lock) mark do not require a password.
3
Select [OK].
4
329
Select [Auto] or [Manual].
IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the set address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway:
If you have set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.
Note
To give the registered access point priority in the future, set [Priority Connection] to [On].
Related Topic
Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push
How to use the keyboard
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
330
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Wi-Fi Settings: Display Wi-Fi Info.
Displays Wi-Fi information for the camera such as the MAC address, IP address, etc.
Hint
Information other than the MAC address is displayed under the following conditions.
[PC Remote] is set to [On] and [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point] under [PC Remote Function], and a
Wi-Fi connection has been established.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Display Wi-Fi Info.].
1
331
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset
This product shares connection information with devices that have permission to connect when connecting to a
smartphone or establishing a Wi-Fi Direct connection with a computer. If you want to change which devices have
permission to connect, reset the connection information.
Note
If you connect this product to a smartphone after resetting the connection information, you must make the settings for the
smartphone again.
If you connect this product to a computer with Wi-Fi Direct after resetting the connection information, you must reconfigure the
settings of the computer.
Related Topic
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset] → [OK].
1
332
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Bluetooth Settings
Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander via a Bluetooth
connection.
If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information link function, refer to “Location
Info. Link Set..”
If you want to perform pairing in order to use a Bluetooth remote commander, refer to “Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl.”
Menu item details
Bluetooth Function (On/Off):
Sets whether to activate or not the Bluetooth function of the camera.
Pairing:
Displays the screen for pairing the camera and smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander.
Disp Device Address:
Displays the BD address of the camera.
Related Topic
Location Info. Link Set.
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → desired setting.
1
333
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Edit Device Name
You can change the device name for Wi-Fi Direct, [PC Remote], or Bluetooth connections.
Related Topic
Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)
How to use the keyboard
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Network) → [Edit Device Name].
1
Select the input box, then input the device name→[OK].
2
334
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Security(IPsec)
Encrypts data when the camera and a computer communicate via a Wi-Fi connection.
Menu item details
IPsec ([On]/[Off]):
Sets whether or not the [Security(IPsec)] function is used.
Dest. IP Address:
Sets the IP address of the device to connect using the [Security(IPsec)] function.
Shared Key:
Sets the shared key used by the [Security(IPsec)] function.
Note
Use at least eight and no more than 20 alphanumeric characters or symbols for [Shared Key].
For IPsec communications, the device to connect must be compatible with IPsec.
Depending on the device, communications may not be possible or the communication speed may be slow.
On this camera, IPsec operates in transport mode only and uses IKEv2.
The algorithms are AES with 128-bit keys in CBC mode/Diffie-Hellman 3072-bit modp group/PRF-HMAC-SHA-256/HMAC-SHA-
384-192.
The authentication expires after 24 hours.
Encrypted communications can only be made with devices that are configured correctly. Communications with other devices are
not encrypted.
For details on the IPsec configuration, consult the administrator of the network for your device.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Network) → [Security(IPsec)] → desired setting.
1
335
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Connecting to a computer
Note
Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB connection has been established
between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or
waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.
Related Topic
USB Connection
USB LUN Setting
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the camera.
1
Turn on the camera and the computer.
2
Check that [USB Connection] under
(Setup) is set to [Mass Storage].
3
Connect the camera to the computer using the USB cable (supplied).
Connect the USB cable to the USB Type-C terminal on the camera.
When you connect the camera to the computer for the first time, the procedure for recognizing the camera may
start automatically on the computer. Wait until the procedure is finished.
If you connect the product to your computer using the USB cable when [USB Power Supply] is set to [On],
power is supplied from your computer. (Default setting: [On])
Use the USB Type-C cable (supplied) or a USB-standard cable.
Use a SuperSpeed USB 5Gbps (USB 3.2)-compatible computer and the USB Type-C cable (sold separately) for
higher-speed communications.
4
338
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Disconnecting the camera from the computer
Perform steps 1 and 2 below before performing the following operations:
Disconnecting the USB cable.
Removing a memory card.
Turning off the product.
Note
On Mac computers, drag and drop the memory card icon or the drive icon into the “Trash” icon. The camera will be disconnected
from the computer.
On some computers, the disconnection icon may not appear. In this case, you can skip the steps above.
Do not remove the USB cable from the camera while the access lamp is lit. The data may be damaged.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Click
(Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media ) in the taskbar.
1
Click the displayed message.
2
339
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)
Imaging Edge Desktop
Imaging Edge Desktop is a software suite that includes functions such as remote shooting from a computer, and
adjusting or developing RAW images recorded with the camera.
For details on how to use Imaging Edge Desktop, refer to the support page.
https://www.sony.net/disoft/help/
Installing Imaging Edge Desktop on your computer
Download and install the software by accessing the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/disoft/d/
Catalyst Browse (free software)/Catalyst Prepare (paid software)
Catalyst Browse is software for previewing clips. You can preview recorded movie files, view and edit media metadata,
apply image stabilization
*
using metadata, apply color calibration, copy to the local hard drive, or transcode to a variety
of formats, and so on with Catalyst Browse.
Catalyst Prepare adds to the functions of Catalyst Browse allowing you to organize clips using bins, perform basic
timeline editing with storyboards, and so on.
Installing Catalyst Browse/Catalyst Prepare on your computer
Download and install the software by accessing the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/disoft/
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
For the conditions of use of the image stabilization function, refer to the support page.
*
340
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Importing images to the computer
You can import images from the camera to a computer by connecting the camera to the computer with a USB cable, or
by inserting the memory card of the camera into the computer.
Open the folder in which the images you want to import are stored on the computer, and then copy the images to the
computer.
Example: Folder tree during USB Mass Storage connection
DCIM: still images
CLIP: movies
SUB: proxy movies
Note
Do not edit or otherwise process movie files/folders from the connected computer. Movie files may be damaged or become
unplayable. Do not delete movies on the memory card from the computer. Sony is not held liable for consequences resulting from
such operations via the computer.
If you delete images or perform other operations from the connected computer, the image database file may become
inconsistent. In this case, repair the image database file.
The folder tree is different during MTP connection.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
341
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)
Uses a Wi-Fi or USB connection, etc. to control the camera from a computer, including such functions as shooting and
storing images on the computer.
Select MENU →
(Network) → [Smartphone Connect] → [Smartphone Connection] → [Off] beforehand.
For details on [PC Remote Function], refer to the following URL:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/zv/zv-e10/l/pcremote.php
Menu item details
PC Remote:
Sets whether or not to use the [PC Remote] function. ([On] / [Off])
PC Remote Cnct Method:
Selects the connection method when the camera is connected to a computer using [PC Remote]
. ([USB]/[Wi-Fi
Direct]/[Wi-Fi Access Point])
Pairing:
When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point], pair the camera with the computer.
Wi-Fi Direct Info.:
Displays the information needed to connect to the camera from the computer when [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to
[Wi-Fi Direct].
Still Img. Save Dest.:
Sets whether or not to save still images to both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. ([PC
Only]/[PC+Camera]/[Camera Only])
RAW+J PC Save Img:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to [PC+Camera].
([RAW & JPEG]/[JPEG Only]/[RAW Only])
PC Save Image Size:
Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to [PC+Camera]. The
original-sized JPEG file or a 2M-equivalent JPEG file can be transferred. ([Original]/[2M])
How to connect the camera and the computer
When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [USB]
Connect the camera and the computer using a USB Type-C cable (supplied).
When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Direct]
Use the camera as an access point, and connect the computer to the camera directly via Wi-Fi.
Select MENU→
(Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [Wi-Fi Direct Info.] to display the Wi-Fi connection information
(SSID and password) for the camera. Connect the computer and the camera using the Wi-Fi connection information
displayed on the camera.
When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point]
MENU →
(Network) → [PC Remote Function] → Select an item to set, and then select the desired setting.
1
Connect the camera to the computer, and then launch Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote) on the computer.
You can now operate the camera using Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote).
The connection method between the camera and the computer depends on the setting for [PC Remote Cnct
Method].
2
342
Connect the camera and the computer via Wi-Fi using a wireless access point. The camera and the computer need to be
paired in advance.
Select MENU→
(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [WPS Push] or [Access Point Set.] to connect the camera to the
wireless access point. Connect the computer to the same wireless access point.
Select MENU → (Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [Pairing] on the camera, and then use Imaging Edge
Desktop (Remote) to pair the camera and the computer. Select [OK] on the pairing confirmation screen displayed on the
camera to finish pairing.
Pairing information is deleted when you initialize the camera.
Note
When an unrecordable memory card is inserted into the camera, you cannot record still images even if [Still Img. Save Dest.] is
set to [Camera Only] or [PC+Camera].
When [Camera Only] or [PC+Camera] is selected and no memory card is inserted into the camera, the shutter will not be
released even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].
[RAW+J PC Save Img] can only be selected when [
File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
343
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Livestreaming video and audio (USB Streaming) (movie)
You can connect a computer, etc. to the camera and use the camera video and audio for livestreaming or web-
conferencing services.
About USB cable connections
If the power of the camera is turned on while the USB cable is connected, [
USB Streaming] cannot be executed.
Unplug the USB cable, execute [
USB Streaming], and then reconnect the USB cable.
Hint
If you assign [
USB Streaming] to a custom key, you can launch [ USB Streaming] just by pressing the key.
The movie recording settings (focus, exposure, etc.) before executing [
USB Streaming] are applied to the livestreamed video.
Adjust the movie recording settings before you start streaming.
If you assign the shutter speed, ISO sensitivity, etc. to the control wheel or register them to the function menu, you can adjust
these values even during USB streaming.
If you assign [Product Showcase Set] or [Background Defocus] to [
Custom Key], you can use these functions even during
USB streaming.
The format of the streaming data is as follows.
Video format: MJPEG
Resolution: HD720 (1280×720)
Frame rate: 30 fps / 25 fps
Audio format: PCM, 48 kHz, 16 bit, 2 ch
During USB streaming, power is supplied to the camera from the computer. If you want to consume as little computer power as
possible, set [USB Power Supply] to [Off].
When using an external microphone, you can minimize deviations between your voice and the movements of your mouth by
connecting the microphone to the
(microphone) terminal of the camera.
Set the camera to a movie recording mode and set the exposure, focus, etc.
1
Select MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ USB Streaming].
[USB Streaming: Not Connect] will appear on the camera screen.
2
Follow the instructions on the screen to connect the camera to a computer or other device with a USB
cable.
[USB Streaming: Standby] will appear on the camera screen, and the camera will switch to the streaming standby
state.
Use a cable or adapter that matches the terminal on the device to be connected.
3
Start streaming from your livestreaming/web-conferencing service.
[USB Streaming: Output] will appear on the camera screen.
To exit [
USB Streaming], press the Still/Movie/S&Q button or the center of the control wheel. The camera
will return to the movie recording mode.
4
344
Note
You cannot do the following while [
USB Streaming] is running.
Recording the streaming video
Menu-screen operations
Transition to the playback screen
Capturing a custom white balance
PC Remote Function
Smartphone Connect
The following functions are disabled while [
USB Streaming] is running.
Power Save Start Time
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
345
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Using MENU items
You can change settings related to all the camera operations including shooting, playback, and operating method. You
can also execute camera functions from the MENU.
Related Topic
Add Item
Display From My Menu
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the MENU button to display the menu screen.
1
Select the desired setting you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel or by
turning the control wheel, and then press the center of the control wheel.
Select a MENU tab (A) at the top of the screen, and press the left/right side of the control wheel to move to
another MENU tab.
You can move to the next MENU tab by pressing the Fn button.
You can go back to the previous screen by pressing the MENU button.
2
Select the desired setting value, and press the center of the control wheel to confirm your selection.
3
346
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
File Format (still image)
Sets the file format for still images.
Menu item details
RAW:
Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to process images on a computer for
professional purposes.
RAW & JPEG:
A RAW image and a JPEG image are created at the same time. This is suitable when you need two image files, a JPEG
for viewing, and a RAW for editing.
JPEG:
The image is recorded in the JPEG format.
About RAW images
To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software Imaging Edge Desktop is needed. With Imaging
Edge Desktop, you can open a RAW image file, then convert it into a popular image format such as JPEG or TIFF, or
readjust the white balance, saturation or contrast of the image.
You cannot apply [Auto HDR] or [Picture Effect] functions with RAW images.
RAW images shot by the camera are recorded in the compressed RAW format.
RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel. However, resolution is limited to 12 bits
in the following shooting modes:
[
Long Exposure NR]
[BULB]
[Cont. Shooting]
(including continuous shooting in [Superior Auto] mode)
[
Silent Shooting]
Note
If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that you record in JPEG format.
You cannot add DPOF (print order) registration marks to RAW images.
Related Topic
JPEG Quality (still image)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ File Format] → desired setting.
1
347
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
JPEG Quality (still image)
Selects the JPEG image quality when [
File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG] or [JPEG].
Menu item details
Extra fine/Fine/Standard:
Since the compression rate increases from [Extra fine] to [Fine] to [Standard], the file size decreases in the same order.
This allows more files to be recorded on one memory card, but the image quality is lower.
Related Topic
File Format (still image)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ JPEG Quality] → desired setting.
1
348
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
JPEG Image Size (still image)
The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The
smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.
Menu item details
When [
Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2
When [
Aspect Ratio] is set to 4:3
When [
Aspect Ratio] is set to 16:9
When [
Aspect Ratio] is set to 1:1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ JPEG Image Size] → desired setting.
1
Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)
L: 24M 6000×4000 pixels
M: 12M 4240×2832 pixels
S: 6.0M 3008×2000 pixels
Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)
L: 21M 5328×4000 pixels
M: 11M 3776×2832 pixels
S: 5.3M 2656×2000 pixels
Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)
L: 20M 6000×3376 pixels
M: 10M 4240×2400 pixels
S: 5.1M 3008×1688 pixels
Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)
L: 16M 4000×4000 pixels
M: 8.0M 2832×2832 pixels
S: 4.0M 2000×2000 pixels
349
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Aspect Ratio (still image)
Menu item details
3:2:
Same aspect ratio as 35 mm film
4:3:
The aspect ratio is 4:3.
16:9:
The aspect ratio is 16:9.
1:1:
The horizontal and vertical ratio is equal.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Aspect Ratio] → desired setting.
1
351
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Panorama: Size
Sets the image size when shooting panoramic images. The image size varies depending on the [Panorama: Direction]
setting.
Menu item details
When [Panorama: Direction] is set to [Up] or [Down]
Standard: 3872×2160
Wide: 5536×2160
When [Panorama: Direction] is set to [Left] or [Right]
Standard: 8192×1856
Wide: 12416×1856
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Panorama: Size] → desired setting.
1
352
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Panorama: Direction
Sets the direction to pan the camera when shooting panoramic images.
Menu item details
Right:
Pan the camera from the left to the right.
Left:
Pan the camera from the right to the left.
Up:
Pan the camera from the bottom to the top.
Down:
Pan the camera from the top to the bottom.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Panorama: Direction] → desired setting.
1
353
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Long Exposure NR (still image)
When you set the shutter speed to 1 second(s) or longer (long exposure shooting), noise reduction is turned on for the
duration that the shutter is open. With the function turned on, the grainy noise typical of long exposures is reduced.
Menu item details
On:
Activates noise reduction for the same duration that the shutter is open. When noise reduction is in progress, a message
appears and you cannot take another picture. Select this to prioritize the image quality.
Off:
Does not activate noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.
Note
Noise reduction may not be activated even if [
Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] in the following situations:
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting] or [Cont. Bracket].
The shooting mode is set to [Sports Action], [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] in scene selection.
[
Long Exposure NR] cannot be set to [Off] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
Each mode in scene selection
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Long Exposure NR] → desired setting.
1
354
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
High ISO NR (still image)
When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that becomes more noticeable when the product
sensitivity is high.
Menu item details
Normal:
Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.
Low:
Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.
Off:
Does not activate high ISO noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.
Note
[
High ISO NR] is fixed to [Normal] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
Each mode in scene selection
[Sweep Panorama]
When [
File Format] is set to [RAW], this function is not available.
[
High ISO NR] does not work for RAW images when the [ File Format] is [RAW & JPEG].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ High ISO NR] → desired setting.
1
355
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Color Space (still image)
The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the range of color reproduction is called “color
space.” You can change the color space depending on the purpose of the image.
Menu item details
sRGB:
This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB] in normal shooting, such as when you intend to print
out the images without any modification.
AdobeRGB:
This color space has a wide range of color reproduction. When a large part of the subject is vivid green or red, Adobe
RGB is effective. The file name of the recorded image starts with “_.”
Note
[AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management and DCF2.0 option color space. Images may not be
printed or viewed in the correct colors if you use applications or printers that do not support Adobe RGB.
When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-Adobe RGB-compliant devices, the images will be
displayed with low saturation.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Color Space] → desired setting.
1
356
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Lens Comp.
Compensates for shading in the corners of the screen or distortion of the screen, or reduces color deviation at the
corners of the screen caused by certain lens characteristics.
Menu item details
Shading Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically compensate for darkness in the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Chromatic Aberration Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically reduce color deviation at the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Distortion Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically compensate for distortion of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Note
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation compliant lens.
Darkness in the corners of the screen may not be corrected with [Shading Comp.], depending on the lens type.
Depending on the attached lens, [Distortion Comp.] is fixed to [Auto], and you cannot select [Off].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Lens Comp.] → desired setting.
1
357
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Shoot Mode (still image)
You can set the shooting mode for still image shooting according to the subject you wish to shoot or the function you
wish to adjust.
Menu item details
Auto mode:
Allows you to shoot still images of any subject under any conditions with good results by setting the values determined
appropriate by the camera. Select
(Intelligent Auto) or (Superior Auto).
Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value (F value)).
Also you can select various settings using the menu.
Aperture Priority:
Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot when you want to blur the background, etc.
Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot fast-moving subjects etc., by manually adjusting the shutter speed.
Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot still images with the desired exposure by adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the
aperture value (F value)).
Recall Camera Set.:
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or numeric settings registered in advance.
Sweep Panorama:
Allows you to shoot a panoramic image by compositing the images.
Scene Selection:
Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene.
Related Topic
Intelligent Auto
Superior Auto
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
Shutter Priority
Manual Exposure
Recall Camera Set.
Sweep Panorama
Scene Selection
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the still image shooting mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Shoot Mode] → desired shooting mode.
2
358
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Superior Auto Img. Extract.
Sets whether or not to save all the images that were shot continuously in [Superior Auto].
Menu item details
Auto:
Saves one appropriate image selected by the product.
Off:
Saves all of the images.
Note
Even if you set [Superior Auto Img. Extract.] to [Off] with [Hand-held Twilight] selected as the scene recognition mode, one
combined image is saved.
When [
File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the shooting function will be limited.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Superior Auto Img. Extract.] → desired setting.
1
359
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Drive Mode
Select the appropriate mode for the subject, such as single shooting, continuous shooting or bracketing shooting.
Menu item details
Single Shooting :
Normal shooting mode.
Cont. Shooting :
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Self-timer :
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was
pressed.
Self-timer(Cont) :
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed.
Cont. Bracket :
Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of exposure.
Single Bracket :
Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degrees of exposure.
WB bracket :
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color
temperature and color filter.
DRO Bracket :
Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Sports Action] in scene selection, [Single Shooting] cannot be performed.
Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Self-timer
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Select / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel → desired setting.
You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].
1
Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
2
360
361
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Bracket Settings
You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance
bracketing.
Menu item details
Selftimer during Bracket:
Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released
if using the self-timer.
(OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order:
Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
(0→-→+/-→0→+)
Related Topic
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → select bracket shooting mode.
You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → desired setting.
2
362
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Interval Shoot Func.
You can automatically shoot a series of still images with the shooting interval and number of shots that you set in
advance (Interval shooting). You can then create a movie from the still images produced by interval shooting using the
computer software Imaging Edge Desktop (Viewer). You cannot create a movie from the still images on the camera.
For details on interval shooting, refer to the support page for Imaging Edge Desktop.
https://www.sony.net/disoft/help/
Menu item details
Interval Shooting:
Sets whether to perform interval shooting. ([On]/[Off])
Shooting Start Time:
Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59
seconds)
Shooting Interval:
Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second
to 60 seconds)
Number of Shots:
Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9999 shots)
AE Tracking Sensitivity:
Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select
[Low], exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. ([High]/[Mid]/[Low])
Silent Shoot. in Interval:
Sets whether or not to perform silent shooting during interval shooting. ([On]/[Off])
Shoot Interval Priority:
Sets whether or not to prioritize the shooting interval when the exposure mode is [Program Auto] or [Aperture Priority]
and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for [Shooting Interval]. ([On]/[Off])
Hint
If you press the shutter button during interval shooting, interval shooting will end and the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.
To go back to the normal shooting mode, select MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval
Shooting] → [Off].
If you press a key to which one of the following functions has been assigned at the moment when shooting starts, the function will
remain active during interval shooting even without you holding down the button.
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval Shooting] → [On].
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → Select the item you want to set and the
desired setting.
2
Press the shutter button.
When the time set for [Shooting Start Time] has elapsed, shooting will start.
When the number of shots set for [Number of Shots] is completed, the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.
3
363
[AEL hold]
[
AEL hold]
[AF/MF Control Hold]
If you set [Display as Group] to [On], still images shot with the interval shooting function will be displayed in groups.
Still images shot with interval shooting can be played back continuously on the camera. If you intend to create a movie using the
still images, you can preview the result.
Note
You may not be able to record the set number of images depending on the remaining battery level and the amount of free space
on the recording medium. Supply power via USB while shooting, and use a memory card with sufficient space.
When the shooting interval is short, the camera may get hot easily. Depending on the ambient temperature, you may not be able
to record the set number of images because the camera may stop recording to protect the equipment.
During interval shooting (including the time between pressing the shutter button and the start of shooting), you cannot operate the
dedicated shooting setting screen or MENU screen. However, you can adjust some settings such as the shutter speed with using
the customized dial or control wheel.
During interval shooting, auto review is not displayed.
[Silent Shoot. in Interval] is set to [On] in the default settings, regardless of the setting for [
Silent Shooting].
Interval shooting is unavailable in the following situations:
The shooting mode is set to other than [Program Auto], [Aperture Priority], [Shutter Priority], or [Manual Exposure]
Related Topic
Cont. PB for Interval
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)
Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
364
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Recall Camera Set.
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with [
Camera Set.
Memory] in advance.
You can recall registered settings individually in the still image shooting mode, the movie recording mode, and the slow-
motion/quick-motion recording mode.
Hint
Settings registered to a memory card using another camera of the same model name can be recalled with this camera.
Note
If you set [
Recall Camera Set.] after completing the shooting settings, the registered settings are given priority and the
original settings may become invalid. Check the indicators on the screen before shooting.
Related Topic
Camera Set. Memory
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the desired shooting mode.
1
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Shoot Mode] → [ Recall Camera Set.] → select the setting
number you want to recall.
In the movie recording mode or the slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode, perform the following procedure.
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Shoot Mode] or [ Shoot Mode] → [ Recall Camera Set.].
2
365
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Camera Set. Memory
Allows you to register often-used modes or camera settings. You can register one to the camera and up to four to the
memory card (M1 through M4). Registered settings can be recalled when shooting. You can register individually in the
still image shooting mode, the movie recording mode, and the slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode.
Items that can be registered
You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu
of the camera.
Aperture (F number)
Shutter speed
To change registered settings
Change the setting to the desired one and reregister the setting to the same number.
Note
M1 through M4 can be selected only when a memory card is inserted into the product.
Program Shift cannot be registered.
Related Topic
Recall Camera Set.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Set the product to the setting you want to register.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Camera Set. Memory] → desired number.
The shooting settings for the currently selected mode (still image shooting mode/movie recording mode/slow-
motion and quick-motion recording mode) will be registered. For example, when you are selecting the still image
shooting mode, the settings are registered for still image shooting and can be recalled when in [
Shoot Mode].
2
Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.
3
366
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Focus Mode
Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.
Menu item details
(Single-shot AF):
The product locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.
(Automatic AF):
[Single-shot AF] and [Continuous AF] are switched according to the movement of the subject. When the shutter button is
pressed halfway down, the product locks the focus when it determines that the subject is motionless, or continues to
focus when the subject is in motion. During continuous shooting, the product automatically shoots with Continuous AF
from the second shot.
(Continuous AF):
The product continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use this when the subject is
in motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera focuses.
(DMF):
You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than
when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.
(Manual Focus):
Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using auto focus, use manual focus.
Focus indicator
(lit):
The subject is in focus and the focus is locked.
(flashing):
The subject is not in focus.
(lit):
The subject is in focus. The focus will be adjusted continuously according to the movements of the subject.
(lit):
Focusing is in progress.
Subjects on which it is difficult to focus using auto focus
Dark and distant subjects
Subjects with poor contrast
Subjects seen through glass
Fast-moving subjects
Reflective light or shiny surfaces
Flashing light
Back-lit subjects
Continuously repetitive patterns, such as the facades of buildings
Subjects in the focusing area with different focal distances
Hint
In [Continuous AF] mode, you can lock the focus by pressing and holding the button that has been assigned the [Focus Hold]
function.
When you set the focus to infinity in the manual focus mode or the direct manual focus mode, make sure that the focus is on a
sufficiently distant subject by checking the monitor.
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → desired setting.
1
367
Note
[Automatic AF] is available only when you are using a lens that supports phase detection AF.
When [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] is set, the angle of view may change little by little while focusing. This does not affect
the actual recorded images.
Only [Continuous AF] and [Manual Focus] are available when recording movies or recording slow-motion/quick-motion movies.
Related Topic
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Manual Focus
MF Assist (still image)
Phase detection AF
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
368
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Focus Area
Selects the focusing area. Use this function when it is difficult to focus properly in the auto focus mode.
Menu item details
Wide :
Focuses on a subject covering the whole range of the screen automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway
down in the still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed around the area that is in focus.
Zone :
Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.
Center :
Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. Use together with the focus-lock function to create the
composition you want.
Flexible Spot :
Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a
narrow area.
Expand Flexible Spot :
If the product cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority
area for focusing.
Tracking:
When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus
area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to [Continuous AF]. Point the cursor at [Tracking] on the
[Focus Area] setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the control
wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a zone, flexible spot or
expand flexible spot.
Examples of the focusing frame display
The focusing frame differs as follows.
When focusing on a larger area
When focusing on a smaller area
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area] → desired setting.
Only [Wide], [Zone], [Flexible Spot: L], [Tracking: Zone], and [Tracking: Flexible Spot L] are displayed as options
in the default settings. To select other types of focus areas, add a check mark to the focus areas you want to
use with the [Focus Area Limit] function.
1
369
When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], the focusing frame may switch between “When focusing on a larger
area” and “When focusing on a smaller area” depending on the subject or situation.
When you attach an A-mount lens with a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA3 or LA-EA5) (sold separately), the focusing frame
for “When focusing on a smaller area” may be displayed.
When focus is achieved automatically based on the whole range of the monitor
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [Focus Area] setting is disabled and the focusing
frame is shown by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority on and around the center area.
To move the focus area
When [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot], if pressing the button to which [Focus
Standard] is assigned, you can shoot while moving the focusing frame using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the
control wheel. To return the focusing frame to the center of the monitor, press the
(Delete) button while moving
the frame. To change the shooting settings using the control wheel, press the button to which [Focus Standard] is
assigned.
You can move the focusing frame quickly by touching and dragging it on the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On],
and set [Func. of Touch Operation] to [Touch Focus] beforehand.
To track the subject temporarily (Tracking On/Tracking On + AF On)
You can temporarily change the [Focus Mode] setting to [Continuous AF] and the [Focus Area] setting to [Tracking] for as
long as you press and hold down the custom key to which you have assigned [Tracking On] or [Tracking On + AF On] in
advance. The [Focus Area] setting before you activated [Tracking On] or [Tracking On + AF On] will switch to the
equivalent [Tracking] setting.
For example:
This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF], [Automatic AF], [Continuous AF], or [DMF].
[Focus Area] before you activate [Tracking
On]/[Tracking On + AF On]
[Focus Area] while [Tracking On]/[Tracking On + AF
On] is active
[Wide] [Tracking: Wide]
[Flexible Spot: S] [Tracking: Flexible Spot S]
[Expand Flexible Spot] [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]
370
Note
[Focus Area] is locked to [Wide] in the following situations:
Each mode in scene selection
The focus area may not light up during continuous shooting or when the shutter button is pressed all the way down at once.
When movie recording mode or slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode is selected or during movie recording, [Tracking]
cannot be selected as the [Focus Area].
You cannot execute functions assigned to the control wheel or the
(Delete) button while moving the focusing frame.
Related Topic
Focus Area Limit
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
Touch Operation
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
371
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Focus Area Limit
By limiting the types of available focus area settings in advance, you can more quickly select settings for [Focus Area].
The available settings are limited to [Wide], [Zone], [Flexible Spot: L], [Tracking: Zone], and [Tracking: Flexible Spot
L] in the default settings.
Hint
When you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a desired key by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [
Custom Key], the focus area changes every time you press the assigned key. By limiting the types of selectable focus areas
with [Focus Area Limit] in advance, you can more quickly select the focus area setting you want.
If you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a custom key, it is recommended that you limit the types of focus areas with [Focus Area
Limit].
Note
Types of focus areas that do not have a check mark cannot be selected using MENU or the Fn (function) menu. To select one,
add a check mark using [Focus Area Limit].
Related Topic
Focus Area
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area Limit] → Add check marks to the focus areas that you
want to use, and then select [OK].
The types of focus areas marked with
(check mark) will be available as settings.
1
372
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)
[Face/Eye AF Set.] is used to determine whether or not the camera focuses with priority on faces/eyes.
There are two methods for performing [Eye AF], with some differences between their specifications. Select the
appropriate method according to your purpose.
Item [Eye AF] via [Face/Eye AF Set.]
[Eye AF] via a custom key
Details can be found here.
Subject detection
The camera will detect faces/eyes with greater
priority.
The camera will detect faces/eyes
exclusively.
Advance
preparation
Select [Face/Eye AF Set.] → [Face/Eye Priority in
AF] → [On].
Assign [Eye AF] to the desired key using [
Custom Key] or [ Custom Key].
How to perform
[Eye AF]
Press the shutter button halfway down.
Press the key to which you have assigned
the [Eye AF] function*.
Specifications
When the camera detects a face or eye inside
or around the designated focus area, it
focuses on the face or eye with greater
priority.
If the camera does not detect any faces or
eyes inside or around the designated focus
area, it will focus on another detectable
subject.
The camera focuses exclusively on
faces or eyes anywhere on the screen,
regardless of the setting for [Focus
Area].
The camera will not automatically focus
on another subject if no face or eye is
detected anywhere on the screen.
Focus mode Follows the setting designated with [Focus Mode]
Follows the setting designated with [Focus
Mode]
Focus area Follows the setting designated with [Focus Area]
The focus area temporarily becomes the
entire screen, regardless of the setting for
[Focus Area].
How the following
functions under
[Face/Eye AF Set.]
work
Subject
Detection
Right/Left Eye
Select
Face/Eye
Frame Display
Animal Eye
Display
Follows the setting designated with each menu
item
Follows the setting designated with each
menu item
Regardless of whether [Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.] is set to [On] or [Off], you can use [Eye AF] via a custom key while
you are pressing the custom key to which you have assigned [Eye AF].
*
373
Hint
Maintaining focus on a moving eye or face (Eye AF + Tracking)
If you adjust the settings under [Face/Eye AF Set.] to focus on faces or eyes, the focusing frame will automatically move to a face
or eye when faces or eyes are detected while tracking subjects with the tracking function.
Menu item details
Face/Eye Priority in AF :
Sets whether or not to detect faces or eyes inside the focusing area and focus on the eyes (Eye AF) when autofocus is
activated. ([On]/[Off])
(Note: The camera operations are different when using the custom key to execute [Eye AF].)
Subject Detection :
Selects the target to be detected.
[Human]: Detects human faces/eyes.
[Animal]: Detects animal eyes. Animal faces are not detected.
Right/Left Eye Select :
Specifies the eye to be detected when [Subject Detection] is set to [Human]. If [Right Eye] or [Left Eye] is selected, only
the selected eye is detected. When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], [Right/Left Eye Select] cannot be used.
[Auto]: The camera detects eyes automatically.
[Right Eye]: The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
[Left Eye]: The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
Face/Eye Frame Display :
Sets whether or not to display the face/eye detection frame when a human face or eyes are detected. ([On]/[Off])
Animal Eye Display :
Sets whether or not to display the eye detection frame when the eye of an animal is detected. ([On]/[Off])
Face detection frame
When the product detects a face, the gray face detection frame appears. When the product determines that autofocus is
enabled, the face detection frame turns white. Up to 8 faces of your subjects can be detected.
In case you have registered the priority order for each face using [Face Registration], the product automatically selects
the first prioritized face and the face detection frame over that face turns white. The face detection frames of other
registered faces turn reddish-purple.
Eye detection frame
A white eye detection frame appears when an eye is detected and the camera determines that autofocusing is possible,
depending on the settings.
The eye detection frame is displayed when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal].
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Face/Eye AF Set.] → desired setting item.
1
374
[Eye AF] by custom key
The Eye AF function can also be used by assigning [Eye AF] to a custom key. The camera can focus on eyes as long as
you are pressing the key. This is useful when you want to temporarily apply the Eye AF function to the entire screen
regardless of the setting for [Focus Area]. The camera does not focus automatically if no faces or eyes are detected.
(Note: When you try to focus on eyes by pressing the shutter button halfway down, the camera only detects faces or
eyes inside or around the focus area designated with [Focus Area]. If the camera detects no faces or eyes, it performs
normal auto-focusing.)
[Switch Right/Left Eye] by custom key
When [Subject Detection] is set to [Human] and [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Right Eye] or [Left Eye], you can switch
the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
When [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], you can temporarily switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom
key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
The temporary left/right selection is cancelled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to
automatic eye detection.
Pressing the center of the control wheel
Stopping pressing the shutter button halfway down (only during still image shooting)
Stopping pressing the custom key to which [AF On] or [Eye AF]
is assigned (only during still image shooting)
Pressing the MENU button
Hint
When [Right/Left Eye Select] is not set to [Auto], or you execute [Switch Right/Left Eye] using the custom key, the eye detection
frame appears. Even when [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], if [Face/Eye Frame Display] is set to [On], the eye detection
frame will appear over detected eyes during movie shooting.
If you want the face or eye detection frame to disappear within a certain period of time after the camera has focused on the face
or eye, set [AF Area Auto Clear] to [On].
Note
When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the following functions cannot be used.
Right/Left Eye Select
Eye detection when shooting movies
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Regist. Faces Priority
Soft Skin Effect
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → desired key, then assign the [Eye
AF] function to the key.
1.
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Face/Eye AF Set.] → [Subject Detection] → desired setting.2.
Point the camera at the face of a human or animal, and press the key to which you have assigned the [Eye AF]
function.
To shoot a still image, press the shutter button while pressing the key.
3.
375
The [Eye AF] function may not function properly under certain conditions, such as in the following situations.
When the person is wearing sunglasses.
When the front hair covers the person’s eyes.
In low-light or back-lit conditions.
When the eyes are closed.
When the subject is in the shade.
When the subject is out of focus.
When the subject is moving too much.
If the subject is moving too much, the detection frame may not be displayed correctly over their eyes.
When the camera cannot focus on human eyes, it will detect and focus on the face instead. The camera cannot focus on eyes
when no human faces are detected.
The product may not detect faces at all or may accidentally detect other objects as faces in some conditions.
The eye detection frame is not displayed when the Eye AF function is unavailable.
You cannot use the face/eye detection function in the following situations:
When using a zoom function other than the optical zoom
When the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama]
When the shooting mode is set to [Landscape], [Night Scene], or [Sunset] in scene selection
When [Picture Effect] is set to [Posterization]
When using the focus magnifier function
When shooting movies with [
Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p]
When [
Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps] during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [ Record Setting] is set to [30p 100M]/[25p 100M] or [30p 60M]/[25p 60M],
and [
4K Output Select] is set to [Memory Card+HDMI]
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On]
Even if [Face/Eye Frame Display] or [Animal Eye Display] is set to [Off], a green focusing frame will be displayed over faces or
eyes that are in focus.
To detect animal eyes, arrange the composition so that both eyes and the nose of the animal are within the angle of view. Once
you focus on the animal’s face, the animal’s eyes will be detected more easily.
Even when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the eyes of some types of animals cannot be detected.
Related Topic
Focus Mode
Focus Area
AF Area Auto Clear
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
376
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
AF w/ shutter (still image)
Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select [Off] to adjust the focus
and the exposure separately.
Menu item details
On:
The auto focus operates when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
The auto focus does not operate even if you press the shutter button halfway down.
Useful method to micro-adjust the focus
When an A-mount lens is attached, activating the auto focus function with a button other than the shutter button lets you
focus more precisely in combination with manual focusing.
Related Topic
AF On
Pre-AF (still image)
Focus Magnifier
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ AF w/ shutter] → desired setting.
1
Set [
AF w/ shutter] to [Off].1.
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → assign the [AF On] and [Focus
Magnifier] functions to the desired keys.
2.
Press the key to which the [AF On] function is assigned.3.
Press the key to which the [Focus Magnifier] function is assigned, and then rotate the focus ring for micro-
adjustments of the focus.
4.
Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.5.
377
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Pre-AF (still image)
The product automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down. During focusing operations,
the screen may shake.
Menu item details
On:
Adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Note
[
Pre-AF] is available only when an E-mount lens is mounted.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Pre-AF] → desired setting.
1
378
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Focus Frame Color
You can specify the color of the frame indicating the focusing area. If the frame is difficult to see because of the subject,
make it more visible by changing its color.
Menu item details
White:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in white.
Red:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in red.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Frame Color] → desired color.
1
379
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
AF Area Auto Clear
Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is
achieved.
Menu item details
On:
The focus area disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.
Off:
The focus area is displayed all the time.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [AF Area Auto Clear] → desired setting.
1
380
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Disp. cont. AF area
You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], in
[Continuous AF] mode.
Menu item details
On:
Displays the focus area that is in focus.
Off:
Does not display the focus area that is in focus.
Note
When [Focus Area] is set to one of the following, the focusing frames in the area that is in focus turn green:
[Center]
[Flexible Spot]
[Expand Flexible Spot]
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Disp. cont. AF area] → desired setting.
1
381
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
AF Micro Adj.
Allows you to adjust the auto-focusing position and register an adjusted value for each lens when using A-mount lenses
with an LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately).
Use this function only when adjustments are needed. Note that the auto focus function may not be performed at a proper
position when using this adjustment.
Hint
It is recommended that you adjust the position under actual shooting conditions. Set [Focus Area] to [Flexible Spot] and use a
bright subject with high contrast when you adjust.
Note
When you attach a lens for which you have already registered a value, the registered value appears on the screen. [±0] appears
for lenses for which a value has not yet been registered.
If [-] is displayed as the value, then a total of 30 lenses have been registered and no new lens can be registered. To register a
new lens, attach a lens for which the registration can be erased, and set its value to [±0], or reset the values of all the lenses
using [Clear].
The [AF Micro Adj.] supports Sony, Minolta, or Konica-Minolta lenses. If you perform [AF Micro Adj.] with lenses other than the
supported lenses, the registered settings for the supported lenses may be affected. Do not perform [AF Micro Adj.] with an
unsupported lens.
You cannot set [AF Micro Adj.] individually for a Sony, Minolta, and Konica-Minolta lens of the same specification.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [AF Micro Adj.].
1
Select [AF Adjustment Set.] → [On].
2
[amount] → desired value.
The larger the value you select, the farther the autofocused position will be from the product. The smaller the
value you select, the closer the autofocused position will be to the product.
3
382
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Exposure Comp.
Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure). Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can
make the entire image brighter or darker if you adjust [Exposure Comp.] to the plus side or minus side, respectively
(exposure compensation).
Hint
Only a value between -3.0 EV and +3.0 EV with the equivalent image brightness appears on the screen when shooting. If you set
an exposure compensation value outside this range, the image brightness on the screen will not be affected, but the value will be
reflected in the recorded image.
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.
Note
You cannot perform the exposure compensation in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
Each mode in scene selection
When using [Manual Exposure], you can perform the exposure compensation only when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].
If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use the flash, you may not be able to get a satisfactory
effect.
Related Topic
(Exposure Comp.) on the control wheel → press the left/right side of the control wheel or turn the
control wheel, and select the desired setting.
+ (over) side:
Images become brighter.
- (under) side:
Images become darker.
You can also select MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Comp.].
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -5.0 EV to +5.0 EV.
You can confirm the exposure compensation value that you set on the shooting screen.
1
383
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
ISO
Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The larger the number, the higher
the sensitivity.
Menu item details
ISO AUTO:
Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
ISO 50 – ISO 51200:
Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.
Hint
You can change the range of ISO sensitivity that is set automatically in [ISO AUTO] mode. Select [ISO AUTO] and press the right
side of the control wheel, and set the desired values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum].
The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.
The available ISO settings will differ depending on whether you are shooting still images, shooting movies, or shooting slow-
motion/quick-motion movies.
When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 32000 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value larger than 32000,
the setting is automatically switched to 32000. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.
When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 32000 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller than 100, the
setting is automatically switched to 100. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.
The available range for ISO sensitivity varies depending on the setting for [Gamma] under [Picture Profile].
Note
[ISO AUTO] is selected when using the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
Each mode in scene selection
[Sweep Panorama]
When the ISO sensitivity is set to a value lower than ISO 100, the range for recordable subject brightness (dynamic range) may
decrease.
When you select [ISO AUTO] with the shooting mode set to [Program Auto], [Aperture Priority], [Shutter Priority], or [Manual
Exposure], the ISO sensitivity will be automatically adjusted within the set range.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
ISO (ISO) on the control wheel → select desired setting.
You can also select MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ISO].
You can change the value by 1/3 EV steps by turning the control wheel. You can change the value by 1 EV
steps by turning the control dial.
1
385
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Metering Mode
Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for determining the exposure.
Menu item details
Multi:
Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the
entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-
weighted metering).
Spot:
Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on the back-lit subject or when
the contrast of the background and the subject is strong.
Entire Screen Avg.:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position
of the subject changes.
Highlight:
Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the
subject while avoiding overexposure.
Hint
When [Multi] is selected and [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is set to [On], the camera measures brightness based on detected
faces.
When [Metering Mode] is set to [Highlight] and the [D-Range Optimizer] or [Auto HDR] function is activated, the brightness and
the contrast will be corrected automatically by dividing the image into small areas and analyzing the contrast of light and shadow.
Make settings based on the shooting circumstances.
Note
[Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], or each mode in scene selection
When using a zoom function other than the optical zoom
In [Highlight] mode, the subject may be dark if a brighter part exists on the screen.
Related Topic
AE lock
Face Priority in Multi Metering
D-Range Optimizer (DRO)
Auto HDR
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Metering Mode] → desired setting.
1
386
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Sets whether the camera measures brightness based on detected faces when [Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].
Menu item details
On:
The camera measures brightness based on detected faces.
Off:
The camera measures brightness using the [Multi] setting, without detecting faces.
Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto] or [Superior Auto], [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is locked to [On].
When [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is set to [On] and [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal] under [Face/Eye AF Set.], [Face Priority in
Multi Metering] does not work.
Related Topic
Metering Mode
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Face Priority in Multi Metering] → desired setting.
1
387
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Exposure step
You can adjust the setting increment for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values.
Menu item details
0.3EV
/ 0.5EV
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Exposure step] → desired setting.
1
388
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Flash Mode
You can set the flash mode.
Menu item details
Flash Off:
The flash does not operate.
Autoflash:
The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.
Fill-flash:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.
Slow Sync.:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a clear image of both the
subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.
Rear Sync.:
The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter. Rear sync shooting allows you
to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a moving car or a walking person.
Note
The default setting depends on the shooting mode.
Some [Flash Mode] settings are not available, depending on the shooting mode.
Related Topic
Using flash (sold separately)
Wireless Flash
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Flash Mode] → desired setting.
1
389
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Flash Comp.
Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV. Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light
only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.
Note
[Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
Each mode in scene selection
The higher flash effect (+ side) may not be visible due to the limited amount of flash light available, if the subject is outside the
maximum range of the flash. If the subject is very close, the lower flash effect (- side) may not be visible.
If you attach an ND filter to the lens or attach a diffuser or a color filter to the flash, the appropriate exposure may not be achieved
and images may turn out dark. In this case, adjust [Flash Comp.] to the desired value.
Related Topic
Using flash (sold separately)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Comp.] → desired setting.
Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower values (- side) makes the flash level
lower.
1
390
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Exp.comp.set
Sets whether to apply the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light, or just ambient light.
Menu item details
Ambient&flash:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light.
Ambient only:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control ambient light only.
Related Topic
Flash Comp.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Exp.comp.set] → desired setting.
1
391
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Wireless Flash
There are two methods for wireless flash shooting: light-signal flash shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to
the camera as a signal light, and radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication. To perform radio-signal
flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately). For details on how to set
each method, refer to the instruction manual of the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not use the wireless flash function.
On:
Uses the wireless flash function to make an external flash or flashes emit light at a distance from the camera.
Note
The off-camera flash may emit light after receiving a light signal from a flash used as the controller of another camera. If this
occurs, change the channel of your flash. For details on how to change the channel, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.
For the flash that is compatible with wireless flash shooting, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Wireless Flash] → [On].
1
Attach the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander to the Multi Interface Shoe.
When performing light-signal wireless flash shooting, set the attached flash as the controller.
When performing radio-signal wireless flash shooting with a flash attached to the camera, set the attached flash
as the commander.
2
Set up an off-camera flash that is set to wireless mode, or that is attached to the Wireless Radio Receiver
(sold separately).
You can perform a test flashing by assigning the [Wireless Test Flash] function to a custom key using [
Custom Key], and then pressing that key.
3
392
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
External Flash Set.
You can configure the settings of a flash (sold separately) attached to the camera using the monitor and control wheel of
the camera.
Update the software of your flash to the latest version before using this function.
For details on flash functions, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.
Menu item details
Ext. Flash Firing Set.:
Allows you to configure settings related to the firing of the flash, such as the flash mode, flash level, etc.
Ext. Flash Cust. Set.:
Allows you to configure other flash settings, wireless settings, and flash unit settings.
Hint
If you assign the [Ext. Flash Firing Set.] function to a key in advance by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [
Custom Key], you can call up the [Ext. Flash Firing Set.] screen simply by pressing that key.
You can adjust settings by operating the flash even while you are using [External Flash Set.].
You can also configure the settings for a Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately) attached to the camera.
Note
You can only use [External Flash Set.] to configure the settings of a flash (sold separately) or Wireless Radio Commander (sold
separately) manufactured by Sony and attached to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera.
You can only use [External Flash Set.] when the flash is attached directly to the camera. You cannot use this function when
shooting with an off-camera flash that is connected using a cable.
Only some of the functions of the attached flash are configurable using [External Flash Set.]. You cannot perform pairing with
other flashes, reset the flash, initialize the flash, etc. via [External Flash Set.].
[External Flash Set.] is unavailable under the following conditions:
When the flash is not attached to the camera
When a flash that does not support [External Flash Set.] is attached
During movie recording
In the movie recording mode or the slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode
Also, [External Flash Set.] may be unavailable depending on the state of the flash.
For details on flashes and Wireless Radio Commanders that are compatible with this function, refer to the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/dics/e10/
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Attach the flash (sold separately) to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera, and then turn on the camera
and the flash.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [External Flash Set.] → desired setting item.
2
Configure the setting using the control wheel of the camera.
3
393
394
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
White Balance
Corrects the tone effect of the ambient light condition to record a neutral white subject in white. Use this function when
the color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when you want to change the color tones on purpose
for photographic expression.
Menu item details
Auto / Daylight / Shade / Cloudy / Incandescent / Fluor.: Warm White /
Fluor.: Cool White / Fluor.: Day White / Fluor.: Daylight / Flash / Underwater Auto :
When you select a light source that illuminates the subject, the product adjusts the color tones to suit to the selected light
source (preset white balance). When you select [Auto], the product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the
color tones.
C.Temp./Filter:
Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for
photography.
Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:
Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.
Hint
You can display the fine adjustment screen and perform fine adjustments of the color tones as required by pressing the right side
of the control wheel. When [C.Temp./Filter] is selected, you can change the color temperature by turning the control dial instead
of pressing the right side of the control wheel.
If the color tones do not come out as you expected in the selected settings, perform [WB bracket] shooting.
(Ambience) or (White) is displayed only when [Priority Set in AWB] is set to [Ambience] or [White].
Note
[White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
Each mode in scene selection
If you use a mercury lamp or a sodium lamp as a light source, the accurate white balance will not be obtained because of the
characteristics of the light. It is recommended to shoot images using a flash or select [Custom 1] to [Custom 3].
Related Topic
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
Priority Set in AWB
WB bracket
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [White Balance] → desired setting.
1
395
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Priority Set in AWB
Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when [White Balance]
is set to [Auto].
Menu item details
Standard:
Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience:
Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
White:
Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.
Related Topic
White Balance
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AWB] → desired setting.
1
396
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
D-Range Optimizer (DRO)
By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast of light and shadow between the subject and
the background, and creates an image with the optimal brightness and gradation.
Menu item details
D-Range Optimizer: Auto:
Corrects the brightness automatically.
D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 ― D-Range Optimizer: Lv5:
Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5
(strong).
Note
In the following situations, [DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off]:
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off]
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off]
[DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off] when the shooting mode is set to the following modes in scene selection.
[Sunset]
[Night Scene]
[Night Portrait]
[Hand-held Twilight]
[Anti Motion Blur]
The [D-Range Optimizer] setting becomes [D-Range Optimizer: Auto] when a mode other than the above is selected in scene
selection.
When shooting with [D-Range Optimizer], the image may be noisy. Select the proper level by checking the recorded image,
especially when you enhance the effect.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [D-Range Optimizer].
1
Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.
2
397
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Auto HDR
Shoots three images using different exposures and combines the images with correct exposure, the bright parts of an
underexposed image, and the dark parts of an overexposed image to create images with a greater range of gradation
(High Dynamic Range). One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded.
Menu item details
Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto:
Corrects the brightness automatically.
Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ― Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV:
Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimization level from 1.0EV (weak) to
6.0EV (strong).
For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed with the following exposure levels:
-1.0 EV, correct exposure and +1.0 EV.
Hint
The shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the following:
Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.
Do not change the composition during shooting.
Note
This function is not available when the [
File Format] is [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].
[Auto HDR] is not available in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
Each mode in scene selection
[Auto HDR] is not available in the following situations:
When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].
You cannot start the next shot until the capture process is completed after you shoot.
You may not obtain the desired effect depending on the luminance difference of a subject and the shooting conditions.
When the flash is used, this function has little effect.
When the contrast of the scene is low or when product shake or subject blur occurs, you may not obtain good HDR images.
(Auto HDR error) will be displayed over the recorded image to inform you when the camera detects image blurring.
Change the composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [Auto HDR].
1
Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.
2
398
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Creative Style
Allows you to set the desired image processing and finely adjust contrast, saturation and sharpness for each image
style. You can adjust exposure (shutter speed and aperture) as you like with this function, unlike with the shooting mode
of scene selection, where the camera adjusts the exposure.
Menu item details
Standard:
For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
Vivid:
The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers,
spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
Portrait:
For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
Landscape:
The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also
stand out more.
Sunset:
For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
Black & White:
For shooting images in black and white monotone.
Sepia:
For shooting images in sepia monotone.
To set [Contrast], [Saturation] and [Sharpness]
[Contrast], [Saturation], and [Sharpness] can be adjusted for each image style preset such as [Standard] and
[Landscape].
Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left sides of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom sides
of the control wheel.
Contrast:
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Creative Style].
1
Select the desired style using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
2
To adjust
(Contrast), (Saturation) and (Sharpness), select the desired item using the right/left
sides, and then select the value using the top/bottom sides.
3
399
The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on
the image.
Saturation:
The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is
restrained and subdued.
Sharpness:
Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value
selected, the more the contours are softened.
Note
[Creative Style] is fixed to [Standard] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], or each mode in scene selection.
[Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
[Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].
When this function is set to [Black & White] or [Sepia], [Saturation] cannot be adjusted.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
400
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Picture Effect
Select the desired effect filter to achieve more impressive and artistic images.
Menu item details
Off:
Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
Toy Camera:
Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
Pop Color:
Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
Posterization:
Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
Retro Photo:
Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
Soft High-key:
Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
Partial Color:
Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
High Contrast Mono.:
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
Soft Focus:
Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effect.
HDR Painting:
Creates the look of a painting, enhancing the colors and details.
Rich-tone Mono.:
Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
Miniature:
Creates an image which enhances the subject vividly, with the background defocused considerably. This effect may often
be found in pictures of miniature models.
Watercolor:
Creates an image with ink bleed and blurring effects as if painted using watercolors.
Illustration:
Creates an illustration-like image by emphasizing the outlines.
Hint
You can perform detailed settings for some items using the left/right sides of the control wheel.
Note
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, setting the zoom scale larger makes [Toy Camera] less effective.
When [Partial Color] is selected, images may not retain the selected color, depending on the subject or shooting conditions.
You cannot check the following effects on the shooting screen, because the product processes the image after the shot. Also, you
cannot shoot another image until image processing is finished. You cannot use these effects with movies.
[Soft Focus]
[HDR Painting]
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Picture Effect] → desired setting.
1
401
[Rich-tone Mono.]
[Miniature]
[Watercolor]
[Illustration]
In the case of [HDR Painting] and [Rich-tone Mono.], the shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the
following:
Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.
Do not change the composition during shooting.
When the contrast of the scene is low or when significant camera-shake or subject blur has occurred, you may not be able to
obtain good HDR images. If the product detects such a situation,
(Picture Effect error) will appear on the recorded image to
inform you of this situation. Change the composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.
This function is not available in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
Each mode in scene selection
[Sweep Panorama]
When [
File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], this function is not available.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
402
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Picture Profile
Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc. For details on “Picture Profile,” refer to
https://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html.
Customizing the picture profile
You can customize the picture quality by adjusting picture profile items such as [Gamma] and [Detail]. When setting
these parameters, connect the camera to a TV or monitor, and adjust them while observing the picture on the screen.
Using the preset of the picture profile
The default settings [PP1] through [PP10] for movies have been set in advance in the camera based on various shooting
conditions.
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → desired setting.
PP1:
Example setting using [Movie] gamma.
PP2:
Example setting using [Still] gamma.
PP3:
Example setting of natural color tone using the [ITU709] gamma.
PP4:
Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard.
PP5:
Example setting using [Cine1] gamma.
PP6:
Example setting using [Cine2] gamma.
PP7:
Example setting using [S-Log2] gamma.
PP8:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3.Cine] under [Color Mode].
PP9:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3] under [Color Mode].
PP10:
Example setting for recording HDR movies using [HLG2] gamma.
HDR movie recording
The camera can record HDR movies when a gamma from [HLG], [HLG1] to [HLG3] is selected in the picture profile.
Picture profile preset [PP10] provides an example setting for HDR recording. Movies recorded using [PP10] can be
viewed with a wider range of brightness than usual when played back on a TV supporting Hybrid Log-Gamma (HLG).
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → the profile you want to change.
1
Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.
2
Select the item to change using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
3
Select the desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel and press in the center.
4
403
This way, even scenes with a wide range of brightness can be recorded and displayed faithfully, without looking under or
over-exposed. HLG is used in HDR TV program production, as defined in the international standard Recommendation
ITU-R BT.2100.
Items of the picture profile
Black Level
Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)
Gamma
Selects a gamma curve.
Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie.
(equivalent to HG4609G33)
Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to HG4600G30)
Cine3: Intensifies the contrast in light and shade more than [Cine1] and strengthens gradation in black.
Cine4: Strengthens the contrast in dark parts more than [Cine3].
ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709.
ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using [S-Log2] or [S-Log3].
S-Log2: Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will be processed after
shooting.
S-Log3: Gamma curve for [S-Log3] with more similar features to film. This setting is based on the assumption that the
picture will be processed after shooting.
HLG: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Equivalent to the HDR standard Hybrid Log-Gamma, ITU-R BT.2100.
HLG1: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Emphasizes noise reduction. However, shooting is restricted to a narrower
dynamic range than with [HLG2] or [HLG3].
HLG2: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Provides a balance of dynamic range and noise reduction.
HLG3: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Wider dynamic range than [HLG2]. However, noise may increase.
[HLG1], [HLG2], and [HLG3] all apply a gamma curve with the same characteristics, but each offers a different
balance between dynamic range and noise reduction. Each has a different maximum video output level, as follows:
[HLG1]: approx. 87%, [HLG2]: approx. 95%, [HLG3]: approx. 100%.
Black Gamma
Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.
[Black Gamma] is fixed at “0” and cannot be adjusted when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black stretch))
Knee
Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high intensity
areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.
[Knee] is disabled if [Mode] is set to [Auto] when [Gamma] is set to [Still], [Cine1], [Cine2], [Cine3], [Cine4],
[ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], [S-Log3], [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3]. To enable [Knee], set [Mode] to [Manual].
Mode: Selects auto/manual settings.
Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.
Auto Set: Settings when [Auto] is selected for [Mode
].
Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)
Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected for [Mode].
Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)
404
Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))
Color Mode
Sets type and level of colors.
In [Color Mode], only [BT.2020] and [709] are available when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].
Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].
Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1] or [Cine2].
Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when combined with ITU709
gamma)
ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with ITU709 gamma)
Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is set
to [S-Log2].
S-Gamut3.Cine: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when
[Gamma] is set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a color space that can easily be converted for digital
cinema.
S-Gamut3: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is
set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a wide color space.
BT.2020: Standard color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
709: Color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3] and movies are recorded with HDTV color
(BT.709).
Saturation
Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)
Color Phase
Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)
Color Depth
Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for
achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you
decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set [Color Mode] to [Black & White].
[R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
[G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
[B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
[C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
[M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
[Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)
Detail
Sets items for [Detail].
Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)
Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.
Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are set manually.))
V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to
the horizontal (H) side))
B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower
DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit level: unlikely to be limited))
Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening level))
Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)
To copy the settings to another picture profile number
405
You can copy the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → [Copy].
To reset the picture profile to the default setting
You can reset the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile settings at once.
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → [Reset].
Note
Since the parameters are shared for movie and still images, adjust the value when you change the shooting mode.
If you develop RAW images with shooting settings, the following settings are not reflected:
Black Level
Black Gamma
Knee
Color Depth
If you change [Gamma], the available ISO value range changes.
There may be more noise in dark parts depending on the gamma settings. It may improve by setting the lens compensation to
[Off].
When using S-Log2 or S-Log3 gamma, the noise becomes more noticeable compared to when using other gammas. If the noise
still is significant even after processing pictures, it may be improved by shooting with a brighter setting. However, the dynamic
range becomes narrower accordingly when you shoot with a brighter setting. We recommend checking the picture in advance by
test shooting when using S-Log2 or S-Log3.
Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In this case, perform
custom setup with a gamma other than [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], or [S-Log3] first, and then reselect [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2],
or [S-Log3] gamma.
Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] disables the [Black Level] setting.
If you set [Slope] to +5 in [Manual Set] under [Knee], [Knee] will be disabled.
S-Gamut, S-Gamut3.Cine, and S-Gamut3 are color spaces exclusive to Sony. However, this camera's S-Gamut setting does not
support the whole S-Gamut color space; it is a setting to achieve a color reproduction equivalent to S-Gamut.
Related Topic
Gamma Disp. Assist
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
406
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Soft Skin Effect
Sets the effect used for shooting the skin smoothly in the Face Detection function.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not use the [Soft Skin Effect] function.
On:
Uses the [Soft Skin Effect]. You can set the effect level by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel. ([On:
High]/[On: Mid]/[On: Low])
Note
[Soft Skin Effect] is not available when [
File Format] is [RAW].
[Soft Skin Effect] is not available for RAW images when the [
File Format] is [RAW & JPEG].
[Soft Skin Effect] is not available in the following situations.
When the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama]
When the shooting mode is set to [Landscape], [Sunset], or [Night Scene] in scene selection
When [Picture Effect] is set to [Posterization]
While using the digital zoom function
When recording movies, [Soft Skin Effect] is not available in the following situations.
[
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], and [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On].
[
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [ Record Setting] is set to [30p 100M] or [30p 60M], and [ 4K Output Select] is
set to [Memory Card+HDMI].
[
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], and [PC Remote] is set to [On].
[
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], and [Smartphone Connect] is in use.
[
File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD], and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].
When recording a movie with [
File Format] set to [XAVC S 4K], the effect is not applied to the image on the monitor during
recording, but it is applied to the recorded image.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Soft Skin Effect] → desired setting.
1
407
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Focus Magnifier
You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.
Unlike with [
MF Assist], you can magnify the image without operating the focus ring.
To use the focus magnifier function by touch operation
You can magnify the image and adjust the focus by touching the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.
When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can perform [Focus Magnifier] by double-tapping the area to focus on.
Hint
While using the focus magnifier function, you can move the magnified area by dragging it on the touch panel.
To exit the focus magnifier function, double-tap the monitor again. When [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the focus magnifier
function is ended by pressing the shutter button halfway down.
Related Topic
MF Assist (still image)
Focus Magnif. Time
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
AF in Focus Mag. (still image)
Touch Operation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].
1
Press the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the area you want to enlarge using
top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.
Each time you press the center, the magnification scale will change.
You can set the initial magnification by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Initial Focus Mag.].
2
Confirm the focus.
Press the
(Delete) button to bring the magnified position into the center of an image.
When the focus mode is [Manual Focus]
, you can adjust the focus while an image is magnified. If [ AF in
Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled when the shutter button is pressed
halfway down.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway down while an image is magnified during the auto-focusing,
different functions are performed depending on the [
AF in Focus Mag.] setting.
When [
AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [On]: Auto-focusing is performed again.
When [
AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off]: The [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled.
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings1) →
[Focus Magnif. Time].
3
Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.
4
408
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
409
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Focus Magnif. Time
Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the [
MF Assist] or [Focus Magnifier] function.
Menu item details
2 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 2 seconds.
5 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 5 seconds.
No Limit:
Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
MF Assist (still image)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif. Time] → desired setting.
1
410
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.
Menu item details
x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x5.9:
Displays a 5.9-times enlarged image.
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.
1
411
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
AF in Focus Mag. (still image)
You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While
the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.
Hint
Use of a tripod is recommended to accurately identify the location you want to magnify.
You can check the auto-focusing result by magnifying the displayed image. If you want to readjust the focus position, adjust the
focus area on the magnified screen and then press the shutter button halfway down.
Note
If you enlarge an area at the edge of the screen, the camera may not be able to focus.
The exposure and white balance cannot be adjusted while the displayed image is being magnified.
[
AF in Focus Mag.] is unavailable in the following situations:
In [Sweep Panorama] mode
During movie shooting
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and the shooting mode is set to other than [Program Auto], [Aperture Priority],
[Shutter Priority], or [Manual Exposure].
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting].
When using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately).
While the displayed image is being magnified, the following functions are unavailable:
[Eye AF]
[
Pre-AF]
[Face/Eye Priority in AF]
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ AF in Focus Mag.] → [On].
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].
2
Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the position using
top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.
The magnification scale changes each time you press the center.
3
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
The camera will focus on the position of
(plus mark) in the center of the screen.
4
Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.
The camera exits the magnified display after shooting.
5
412
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
MF Assist (still image)
Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier. This works in Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus shooting.
Hint
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif.
Time].
Note
You cannot use [
MF Assist] when shooting movies. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.
[
MF Assist] is not available when a Mount Adaptor is attached. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.
Related Topic
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Focus Magnif. Time
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ MF Assist] → [On].
1
Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.
The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing the center of the control wheel.
2
414
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Peaking Setting
Sets the peaking function, which enhances the outline of in-focus areas during shooting with Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus.
Menu item details
Peaking Display:
Sets whether to display peaking.
Peaking Level:
Sets the level of enhancement of in-focus areas.
Peaking Color:
Sets the color used to enhance in-focus areas.
Note
Since the product recognizes sharp areas as in focus, the effect of peaking differs, depending on the subject and lens.
The outline of in-focus ranges is not enhanced on devices connected via HDMI.
Related Topic
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Peaking Setting] → desired setting.
1
415
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Product Showcase Set
The camera settings are optimally configured for situations such as movie shooting for product reviews. The camera
tends to focus on objects that are closer to it.
Menu item details
On:
Shoots with optimal settings for product reviews. [Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.] is locked to [Off].
Off:
Shoots in the ordinary shooting mode.
Note
[Product Showcase Set] is not available in the following shooting modes:
[Sweep Panorama]
Each mode in scene selection
Settings for [Product Showcase Set] cannot be changed during movie recording.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the (Product Showcase Set) button to switch the [Product Showcase Set] function on or off.
You can also switch the [Product Showcase Set] function on or off by selecting MENU →
(Camera
Settings1) → [Product Showcase Set].
1
416
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Face Registration (New Registration)
If you register faces in advance, the product can focus on the registered face as a priority.
Note
Up to eight faces can be registered.
Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask,
sunglasses, etc.
Related Topic
Regist. Faces Priority
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [New Registration].
1
Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
2
When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].
3
417
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Face Registration (Order Exchanging)
When multiple faces are registered to be given priority, the face registered first will be given priority. You can change the
priority order.
Related Topic
Regist. Faces Priority
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Order Exchanging].
1
Select a face to change the order of priority.
2
Select the destination.
3
418
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Face Registration (Delete)
Deletes a registered face.
Note
Even if you execute [Delete], the data for registered face will remain in the product. To delete the data for registered faces from
the product, select [Delete All].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Delete].
If you select [Delete All], you can delete all registered faces.
1
419
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Regist. Faces Priority
Sets whether to focus with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Registration].
Menu item details
On:
Focuses with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Registration].
Off:
Focuses without giving higher priority to registered faces.
Hint
To use the [Regist. Faces Priority] function, set as follows.
[Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.]: [On]
[Subject Detection] under [Face/Eye AF Set.]: [Human]
Related Topic
Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)
Face Registration (New Registration)
Face Registration (Order Exchanging)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Regist. Faces Priority] → desired setting.
1
420
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Self-portrait/ -timer
You can change the angle of the monitor and shoot images while watching the monitor.
Hint
If you want to use a drive mode other than the 3-second self-timer mode, first set [Self-portrait/ -timer] to [Off], and then face the
monitor forward.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Self-portrait/ -timer] → [On].
1
Open the monitor transversely, face it forward, and then point the lens at yourself.
2
Press the shutter button. Alternatively, touch the subject on the monitor.
The product starts the self-timer shooting after three seconds.
3
421
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Shoot Mode (movie)
You can set the shooting mode for movie recording.
Menu item details
Intelligent Auto:
Allows you to shoot movies with automatic scene recognition.
Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
Recall Camera Set.:
Allows you to shoot after recalling often-used modes or numeric settings registered in advance.
Related Topic
About Scene Recognition
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the movie recording mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Shoot Mode] → desired shooting mode.
2
422
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Shoot Mode (S&Q)
You can set the shooting mode for slow-motion/quick-motion recording. You can change the shooting settings and
playback speed in [
S&Q Settings].
Menu item details
Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
Recall Camera Set.:
Allows you to shoot after recalling often-used modes or numeric settings registered in advance.
Related Topic
Shooting Slow-motion/Quick-motion movies (S&Q Settings)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Shoot Mode] → desired shooting mode.
2
423
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Livestreaming video and audio (USB Streaming) (movie)
You can connect a computer, etc. to the camera and use the camera video and audio for livestreaming or web-
conferencing services.
About USB cable connections
If the power of the camera is turned on while the USB cable is connected, [
USB Streaming] cannot be executed.
Unplug the USB cable, execute [
USB Streaming], and then reconnect the USB cable.
Hint
If you assign [
USB Streaming] to a custom key, you can launch [ USB Streaming] just by pressing the key.
The movie recording settings (focus, exposure, etc.) before executing [
USB Streaming] are applied to the livestreamed video.
Adjust the movie recording settings before you start streaming.
If you assign the shutter speed, ISO sensitivity, etc. to the control wheel or register them to the function menu, you can adjust
these values even during USB streaming.
If you assign [Product Showcase Set] or [Background Defocus] to [
Custom Key], you can use these functions even during
USB streaming.
The format of the streaming data is as follows.
Video format: MJPEG
Resolution: HD720 (1280×720)
Frame rate: 30 fps / 25 fps
Audio format: PCM, 48 kHz, 16 bit, 2 ch
During USB streaming, power is supplied to the camera from the computer. If you want to consume as little computer power as
possible, set [USB Power Supply] to [Off].
When using an external microphone, you can minimize deviations between your voice and the movements of your mouth by
connecting the microphone to the
(microphone) terminal of the camera.
Set the camera to a movie recording mode and set the exposure, focus, etc.
1
Select MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ USB Streaming].
[USB Streaming: Not Connect] will appear on the camera screen.
2
Follow the instructions on the screen to connect the camera to a computer or other device with a USB
cable.
[USB Streaming: Standby] will appear on the camera screen, and the camera will switch to the streaming standby
state.
Use a cable or adapter that matches the terminal on the device to be connected.
3
Start streaming from your livestreaming/web-conferencing service.
[USB Streaming: Output] will appear on the camera screen.
To exit [
USB Streaming], press the Still/Movie/S&Q button or the center of the control wheel. The camera
will return to the movie recording mode.
4
424
Note
You cannot do the following while [
USB Streaming] is running.
Recording the streaming video
Menu-screen operations
Transition to the playback screen
Capturing a custom white balance
PC Remote Function
Smartphone Connect
The following functions are disabled while [
USB Streaming] is running.
Power Save Start Time
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
425
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
File Format (movie)
Selects the movie file format.
Menu item details
XAVC S 4K:
Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160).
XAVC S HD:
Records movies in HD resolution (1920×1080).
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ File Format] → desired setting.
1
426
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Record Setting (movie)
Selects the frame rate and bit-rate for movie recording.
Menu item details
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]
MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Record Setting] → desired setting.
The higher the bit-rate, the higher the image quality.
1
Record Setting Bit-rate Description
30p 100M/ 25p 100M Approx. 100 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (30p/25p).
30p 60M/ 25p 60M Approx. 60 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (30p/25p).
24p 100M* Approx. 100 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).
24p 60M* Approx. 60 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC
*
Record Setting Bit-rate Description
60p 50M
/50p
50M
Approx. 50
Mbps
Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
60p 25M
/50p
25M
Approx. 25
Mbps
Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
30p 50M
/25p
50M
Approx. 50
Mbps
Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
30p 16M
/25p
16M
Approx. 16
Mbps
Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
24p 50M
*
Approx. 50
Mbps
Records movies in 1920×1080 (24p).
120p 100M/100p
100M
Approx. 100
Mbps
Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can record
movies in 120 fps or 100 fps.
You can create smoother slow-motion movies by using compatible editing
devices.
120p 60M/100p 60M
Approx. 60
Mbps
Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can record
movies in 120 fps or 100 fps.
You can create smoother slow-motion movies by using compatible editing
devices.
427
Note
Recording frame rates are indicated as the closest integer values. The actual corresponding frame rates are as follows:
24p: 23.98 fps, 30p: 29.97 fps, 60p: 59.94 fps, and 120p: 119.88 fps.
[120p]/[100p] cannot be selected for the following shooting modes.
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
Each mode in scene selection
The angle of view will be narrower under the following conditions:
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p]
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Record Setting] is set to [30p]
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC
*
428
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Shooting Slow-motion/Quick-motion movies (S&Q Settings)
You can record a moment that cannot be captured by the naked eye (slow-motion recording), or record a long-term
phenomenon into a compressed movie (quick-motion recording). For example, you can record an intense sports scene,
the moment when a bird starts to fly, a blooming flower, and a changing view of clouds or a starry sky.
The movie will be recorded in XAVC S HD format. Sound will not be recorded.
Menu item details
Record Setting:
Selects the frame rate of the movie.
Frame Rate:
Selects the shooting frame rate.
Playback speed
The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [
Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button (A) to select the slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode.
Each time you press the button, the shooting mode switches in the order of still image shooting mode, movie
recording mode, and slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode.
1
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Shoot Mode] → and select the desired setting of slow-
motion/quick-motion (Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).
2
Select MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [
Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
3
Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.
Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
4
Frame Rate Record Setting: 24p Record Setting: 30p Record Setting: 60p
120fps 5 times slower 4 times slower -
429
When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL
When [
Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps], you cannot set [ Record Setting] to [60p]/[50p].
Hint
For an estimation of recordable time, refer to “Recordable movie times.”
The bit-rate of a recorded movie varies depending on the settings for [
Frame Rate] and [ Record Setting].
Note
In slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this
happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.
During slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the following functions are not available.
[TC Run] under [TC/UB Settings]
[
TC Output] under [HDMI Settings]
[
4K Output Select]
Related Topic
Shoot Mode (S&Q)
Recordable movie times
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Frame Rate Record Setting: 24p Record Setting: 30p Record Setting: 60p
60fps 2.5 times slower 2 times slower Normal playback speed
30fps 1.25 times slower Normal playback speed 2 times quick
15fps 1.6 times quick 2 times quick 4 times quick
8fps 3 times quick 3.75 times quick 7.5 times quick
4fps 6 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick
2fps 12 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick
1fps 24 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick
Frame Rate Record Setting: 25p Record Setting: 50p
100fps 4 times slower -
50fps 2 times slower Normal playback speed
25fps Normal playback speed 2 times quick
12fps 2.08 times quick 4.16 times quick
6fps 4.16 times quick 8.3 times quick
3fps 8.3 times quick 16.6 times quick
2fps 12.5 times quick 25 times quick
1fps 25 times quick 50 times quick
430
431
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Proxy Recording
Sets whether to simultaneously record low-bit-rate proxy movies when recording movies. Since proxy movies are small
in file size, they are suitable for transferring to smartphones or uploading to websites.
Menu item details
On :
Proxy movies are simultaneously recorded.
Off :
Proxy movies are not recorded.
Hint
Proxy movies are recorded in the XAVC S HD format (1280×720) at 9 Mbps. The frame rate of the proxy movie is the same as
that of the original movie.
Proxy movies are not displayed on the playback screen (single-image playback screen or image index screen). (Proxy) is
displayed over movies for which a proxy movie was simultaneously recorded.
Note
Proxy movies cannot be played back on this camera.
Proxy recording is not available in the following situations.
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p]
Deleting/protecting movies that have proxy movies removes/protects both the original and proxy movies. You cannot
delete/protect only original movies or proxy movies.
Movies cannot be edited on this camera.
Related Topic
Movie recording formats
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
Memory cards that can be used
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Proxy Recording] → desired setting.
1
432
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
AF Transition Speed (movie)
You can set the transition speed of the focus when the target of auto-focusing changes while shooting a movie.
Menu item details
7 (Fast) / 6 / 5 / 4 / 3 / 2 / 1 (Slow):
Select a faster value to focus on the subject more quickly.
Select a slower value to focus on the subject more smoothly.
Hint
You can use the touch focus function to intentionally transition the AF.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ AF Transition Speed] → desired setting.
1
433
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
AF Subj. Shift Sens. (movie)
You can set the sensitivity for shifting the focus to another subject when the original subject moves out of the focusing
area while shooting a movie.
Menu item details
5(Responsive) / 4 / 3 / 2 / 1(Locked on):
Select a higher value when you want to shoot a quick-moving subject, or when you want to shoot multiple subjects while
switching the focus continually.
Select a lower value when you want the focus to remain steady, or when you want to keep the focus on a particular
target without being affected by other subjects.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ AF Subj. Shift Sens.]→desired setting.
1
434
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Auto Slow Shutter (movie)
Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the subject is dark.
Menu item details
On:
Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise
in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
Off:
Does not use Auto Slow Shutter. The recorded movie will be darker than when [On] is selected, but you can record
movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
Note
[
Auto Slow Shutter] does not function in the following situations:
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting
[Shutter Priority]
[Manual Exposure]
When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO]
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Auto Slow Shutter] → desired setting.
1
435
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Initial Focus Mag. (movie)
Sets the initial magnification scale for [Focus Magnifier] in the movie shooting mode.
Menu item details
x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x4.0:
Displays a 4.0-times enlarged image.
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.
1
436
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Audio Recording
Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies. Select [Off] to avoid recording the sounds of the lens and the
camera operating.
Menu item details
On:
Records sound (stereo).
Off:
Does not record sound.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → desired setting.
1
437
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Audio Rec Level
You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.
Menu item details
+:
Turns up the audio recording level.
-:
Turns down the audio recording level.
Reset:
Resets the audio recording level to the default setting.
Hint
When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record
more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a greater sound level to make
the sound easier to hear.
Note
Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.
[Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to movie mode.
[Audio Rec Level] is unavailable during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.
The [Audio Rec Level] settings are applied for both the internal microphone and the
(microphone) terminal input.
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Rec Level].
1
Select the desired level using the right/left sides of the control wheel.
2
438
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Audio Level Display
Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.
Menu item details
On:
Displays the audio level.
Off:
Does not display the audio level.
Note
The audio level is not displayed in the following situations:
When [Audio Recording] is set to [Off].
When DISP (Display Setting) is set to [No Disp. Info.].
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting
The audio level is also displayed while shooting stand-by in movie recording mode.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Level Display] → desired setting.
1
439
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Audio Out Timing
You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio
during HDMI output.
Menu item details
Live:
Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.
Lip Sync:
Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.
Note
Using an external microphone may result in a slight delay. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the
microphone.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Out Timing] → desired setting.
1
440
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Wind Noise Reduct.
Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise by cutting the low-range sound of the input audio from the built-in microphone.
Menu item details
On:
Reduces wind noise.
Off:
Does not reduce wind noise.
Note
Setting this item to [On] where wind is not blowing sufficiently hard may cause normal sound to be recorded with too low volume.
When an external microphone (sold separately) is used, [Wind Noise Reduct.] does not function.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Wind Noise Reduct.] → desired setting.
1
441
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
SteadyShot (movie)
Sets the [
SteadyShot] effect when shooting movies. When using a tripod (sold separately), setting [ SteadyShot]
to [Off] will result in a more natural image.
Menu item details
Active:
Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect using electronic SteadyShot.
Standard:
Provides a SteadyShot effect using lens-side SteadyShot. Use this setting under stable movie shooting conditions.
Off:
Does not use [
SteadyShot].
Note
If you set [
SteadyShot] to [Active], the angle of view will be narrower. It is recommended that you set [ SteadyShot] to
[Standard] when the focal length is 200 mm or more.
When a lens without a SteadyShot mechanism is attached, [Standard] cannot be selected.
If you intend to use the image stabilization function of the smartphone application Movie Edit add-on or the desktop application
Catalyst, set [
SteadyShot] to [Active] or [Off] on the camera.
The SteadyShot effect depends on the attached lens.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ SteadyShot] → desired setting.
1
442
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
SteadyShot Settings (movie)
You can shoot with an appropriate SteadyShot setting for the attached lens.
Menu item details
Auto:
Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
Manual:
Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal-length set using [
Focal Length]. (8mm-1000mm)
Check the focal-length index and set the focal-length.
Note
The SteadyShot function may not work optimally when the power has just been turned on or right after you point the camera
toward a subject.
When using a tripod, etc., make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because this can cause any malfunction when shooting.
[
SteadyShot Settings] will be unavailable when MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ SteadyShot] is set to [Off].
When the camera cannot obtain focal length information from the lens, the SteadyShot function does not work correctly. Set [
SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set [ Focal Length] to match the lens you are using. The currently set value for the
SteadyShot focal length will appear next to
(camera shake icon).
When using an SEL16F28 lens (sold separately) with a teleconverter, etc., set [
SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set the
focal length.
If a lens equipped with a SteadyShot switch is attached, the settings can only be changed using that switch on the lens. You
cannot switch the settings using the camera.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ SteadyShot] → [On].
1
[
SteadyShot Settings] → [ SteadyShot Adjust.] → desired setting.
2
443
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Marker Display (movie)
Sets whether or not to display markers set using [
Marker Settings] on the monitor while shooting movies.
Menu item details
On:
Markers are displayed. The markers are not recorded.
Off:
No marker is displayed.
Note
The markers are displayed during movie shooting standby, or while recording movies.
You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].
The markers are displayed on the monitor. (You cannot output the markers.)
Related Topic
Marker Settings (movie)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Display] → desired setting.
1
444
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Marker Settings (movie)
Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies.
Menu item details
Center:
Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen.
[Off]/[On]
Aspect:
Sets the aspect marker display.
[Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
Safety Zone:
Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV.
[Off]/[80%]/[90%]
Guideframe:
Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
[Off]/[On]
Hint
You can display several markers at the same time.
Place the subject on the cross point of the [Guideframe] to make a balanced composition.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Settings] → desired setting.
1
445
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Emph disp dur REC (movie)
Sets whether or not to display a red frame around the edges of the camera’s monitor while recording a movie. You can
easily check whether the camera is in standby or recording, even when you are looking at the camera monitor from an
angle or at a distance.
Menu item details
On:
Displays a red frame to indicate that recording is in progress.
Off:
Does not display a frame to indicate that recording is in progress.
Hint
The frame displayed by this function can also be output to an external monitor connected via HDMI. Set [HDMI Info. Display] to
[On].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Emph disp dur REC] → desired setting.
1
446
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
REC Lamp
You can choose whether or not the recording lamp lights up during recording.
Menu item details
On:
The recording lamp lights up during recording.
Off:
The recording lamp does not light up during recording.
Hint
Set [REC Lamp] to [Off] if the light of the recording lamp reflected by an object, such as glass, is captured by the camera.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [REC Lamp] → desired setting.
1
447
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Movie w/ shutter
You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button instead of the MOVIE (Movie) button.
Menu item details
On:
Enables movie recording using the shutter button when the camera is set to the movie recording mode or the slow-
motion/quick-motion recording mode.
Off:
Disables movie recording using the shutter button.
Hint
When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can still start or stop recording movies using the MOVIE button.
When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can use the shutter button to start or stop recording movies on an external
recording/playback device using [
REC Control].
Note
When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you cannot focus by pressing the shutter button halfway down during movie recording.
Related Topic
Shooting movies
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Movie w/ shutter] → desired setting.
1
448
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Silent Shooting (still image)
You can shoot images without the shutter sound.
Menu item details
On:
You can shoot images without the shutter sound.
Off:
[
Silent Shooting] is deactivated.
Note
Use the [
Silent Shooting] function on your own responsibility, while taking sufficient consideration to the privacy and portrait
rights of the subject.
Even if [
Silent Shooting] is set to [On], it will not be completely silent.
Even if [
Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the operating sound of the aperture and focus will sound.
When shooting still images using the [
Silent Shooting] function with low ISO sensitivity, if you point the camera at a very bright
light source, high intensity areas on the monitor may be recorded in darker tones.
When the power is turned off, the shutter sound may beep in rare occasions. This is not a malfunction.
Image distortion caused by the movement of the subject or the camera may occur.
If you shoot images under instantaneous lightning or flickering lights, such as the flash light from other cameras or fluorescent
lighting, a striping effect may occur on the image.
If you want to turn off the beep that sounds when the subject is in focus or the self-timer operates, set [Audio signals] to [Off].
Even if [
Silent Shooting] is set to [On], you may hear the shutter sound under the following circumstances:
When you capture a standard white color for the custom white balance
When you register faces using [Face Registration]
You cannot select [
Silent Shooting] when the shooting mode is set to other than [Program Auto], [Aperture Priority], [Shutter
Priority], or [Manual Exposure].
When [
Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the following functions are not available:
Flash shooting
Auto HDR
Picture Effect
Long Exposure NR
e-Front Curtain Shutter
Superior Auto Img. Extract.
BULB shooting
After you turn the camera on, the time in which you can start recording is extended by approximately 0.5 seconds.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Silent Shooting] → desired setting.
1
449
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
e-Front Curtain Shutter
The electronic front curtain shutter function shortens the time lag between when the shutter button is pressed and the
shutter is released.
Menu item details
On:
Uses the electronic front curtain shutter function.
Off:
Does not use the electronic front curtain shutter function.
Note
When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large-aperture lens attached, out-of-focus circle produced by the bokeh effect may
get cut off because of the shutter mechanism. If this happens, set [e-Front Curtain Shutter] to [Off].
When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set this function to [Off]. If you set
this function to [On], the correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness will be uneven.
When you shoot at high shutter speeds, the image brightness may become uneven depending on the shooting environment. In
such cases, set [e-Front Curtain Shutter] to [Off].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [e-Front Curtain Shutter] → desired setting.
1
450
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Release w/o Lens
Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached.
Menu item details
Enable:
Releases the shutter when no lens is attached. Select [Enable] when attaching the product to an astronomical telescope,
etc.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when a lens is not attached.
Note
Correct metering cannot be achieved when you use lenses that do not provide a lens contact, such as the lens of an
astronomical telescope. In such cases, adjust the exposure manually by checking it on the recorded image.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Lens] → desired setting.
1
451
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Release w/o Card
Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted.
Menu item details
Enable:
Releases the shutter even if no memory card has been inserted.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when no memory card has been inserted.
Note
When no memory card has been inserted, the images shot will not be saved.
The default setting is [Enable]. It is recommended that you select [Disable] prior to actual shooting.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Card] → desired setting.
1
452
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
SteadyShot (still image)
Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.
Menu item details
On:
Uses [
SteadyShot].
Off:
Does not use [
SteadyShot].
We recommend that you set the camera to [Off] when using a tripod.
Note
You cannot set the SteadyShot function when you are using an A-mount lens (sold separately), or when the name of the attached
lens does not contain the letters “OSS,” such as “E16mm F2.8.”
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ SteadyShot] → desired setting.
1
453
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Zoom Range
You can select the zoom setting of the product.
Menu item details
Optical zoom only:
Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set [
JPEG Image Size] to [M]
or [S].
ClearImage Zoom
:
Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. Even if the zoom range exceeds the optical zoom, the product magnifies
images using an image process with less deterioration.
Digital Zoom
:
When the zoom range of the Clear Image Zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies images to the largest scale.
However, the image quality will deteriorate.
Note
Set [Optical zoom only] if you want to magnify images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate.
Related Topic
The zoom features available with this product
About zoom scale
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Range] → desired setting.
1
454
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Zoom Lever Speed
Sets the zoom speed when using the W/T (zoom) lever of the camera. This can be set separately for shooting standby
and movie recording.
Menu item details
Zoom Speed
:
Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Zoom Speed
:
Sets the zoom speed during movie recording. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Hint
If a high speed is set for shooting standby and a slow speed is set for movie recording, the angle of view can be changed quickly
during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.
Note
The zoom speed does not change when you operate the zoom ring of the lens or the zoom lever of the power zoom lens.
If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.
Even if the setting value of the zoom speed is the same, the actual zoom speed varies depending on the attached lens.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Lever Speed] → desired setting.
1
455
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Custom Key Z. Speed
Sets the zoom speed when using the custom key to which [Zoom Operation (T)] / [Zoom Operation (W)] is assigned.
This can be set separately for shooting standby and movie recording.
Menu item details
Fixed Speed
:
Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Fixed Speed
:
Sets the zoom speed during movie recording. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Hint
If a high speed is set for [Fixed Speed
] and a slow speed is set for [Fixed Speed ], the angle of view can be changed
quickly during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.
Note
The zoom speed does not change when you operate the zoom ring of the lens or the zoom lever of the power zoom lens.
If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key Z. Speed] → desired setting.
1
456
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Remote Zoom Speed
Sets the zoom speed when performing zoom operations using the remote commander (sold separately) or [Smartphone
Connect]. This can be set separately for shooting standby and movie recording.
Menu item details
Speed Type:
Sets whether or not to lock the zoom speed. ([Variable]/[Fix])
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby when [
Speed Type] is set to [Fix]. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during movie recording when [
Speed Type] is set to [Fix]. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Hint
When [
Speed Type] is set to [Variable], pressing the zoom lever on the remote commander will increase the zoom speed
(some remote commanders do not support variable zoom).
If [
Speed Type] is set to [Fix], a high speed is set for [ Fixed Speed ], and a slow speed is set for [ Fixed Speed
], the angle of view can be changed quickly during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.
Note
The zoom speed does not change when you operate the zoom ring of the lens or the zoom lever of the power zoom lens.
If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Remote Zoom Speed] → desired setting.
1
457
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
DISP Button
Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected using DISP (Display Setting) in shooting mode.
Menu item details
Graphic Display :
Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows the shutter speed and aperture value.
Display All Info. :
Shows recording information.
No Disp. Info. :
Does not show recording information.
Histogram :
Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
Level :
Indicates whether the product is level in both the front-back (A) and horizontal (B) directions. When the product is level in
either direction, the indicator turns to green.
Note
If you tilt the product forward or backward by a large degree, the level error will be great.
The product may have a margin of error of almost ±1° even when the inclination is corrected by the level.
Related Topic
Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → desired setting → [Enter].
The items marked with
(check mark) are available.
1
458
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Zebra Setting
Sets a zebra pattern, which appears over part of an image if the brightness level of that part meets the IRE level that you
have set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust the brightness.
Menu item details
Zebra Display:
Sets whether to display the zebra pattern.
Zebra Level:
Adjusts the brightness level of the zebra pattern.
Hint
You can register values to check the correct exposure or overexposure as well as the brightness level for [Zebra Level]. The
settings for correct exposure confirmation and overexposure confirmation are registered to [Custom1] and [Custom2] respectively
in the default settings.
To check the correct exposure, set a standard value and the range for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear on
areas that fall within the range you set.
To check the overexposure, set a minimum value for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear over areas with a
brightness level equal to or higher than the value you set.
Note
The zebra pattern is not displayed on devices connected via HDMI.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Zebra Setting] → desired setting.
1
459
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Grid Line
Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.
Menu item details
Rule of 3rds Grid:
Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
Square Grid:
Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is useful for assessing the
composition when shooting landscapes, closeups, or when performing camera scanning.
Diag. + Square Grid:
Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Off:
Does not display the grid line.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Grid Line] → desired setting.
1
460
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Exposure Set. Guide
You can set whether to display a guide when you change the exposure.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not display the guide.
On:
Displays the guide.
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Exposure Set. Guide] → desired setting.
1
461
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Live View Display
Sets whether or not to apply the effects of settings such as exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative Style], and
[Picture Effect] to images on the screen.
Menu item details
Setting Effect ON:
Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of applying all your settings. This
setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while checking the results of the shot on the Live View screen.
Setting Effect OFF:
Displays Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative Style], or [Picture Effect].
When this setting is used, you can easily check the image composition.
Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in [Manual Exposure] mode.
When [Setting Effect OFF] is selected, the (VIEW) icon is displayed on the Live View screen.
Hint
When you use a third-party flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings. When
[Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], Live View Display will be displayed brightly, so that you can easily check the
composition.
Note
[Live View Display] cannot be set to [Setting Effect OFF] in the following situations:
When the still image shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], [Sweep Panorama], or each mode in scene
selection
In the movie recording mode or the slow-motion/quick-motion recording mode
When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], the brightness of the shot image will not be the same as that of the
displayed Live View.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Live View Display] → desired setting.
1
462
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Auto Review
You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set the display time for Auto
Review.
Menu item details
10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec:
Displays the recorded image on the screen right after shooting for the selected duration of time. If you perform a
magnifying operation during Auto Review, you can check that image using the magnified scale.
Off:
Does not display the Auto Review.
Note
When you use a function that performs image processing, the image before processing may be displayed temporarily, followed by
the image after processing.
The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review display.
Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Auto Review] → desired setting.
1
463
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
You can use the custom key function to assign the functions you use most frequently to easily operable keys. This lets
you skip the process of selecting items from MENU, so you can recall the functions more quickly. You can also assign
[Not set] to easily operable keys to prevent accidental operation.
You can separately assign functions to custom keys for the still image shooting mode (
Custom Key), movie shooting
mode (
Custom Key), and playback mode ( Custom Key).
Assignable functions vary depending on the keys.
You can assign functions to the following keys.
Hint
You can recall functions more quickly by using the Function menu to configure each setting directly from the Fn button, along with
the custom keys. Refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.
The following is the procedure for assigning the [Eye AF] function to the
(Product Showcase Set) button.
MOVIE Button1.
Custom Button 12.
Fn/
Button3.
Center Button /Left Button/Right Button/Down Button4.
Button5.
MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key].
If you want to assign a function to recall while shooting movies, select [
Custom Key]. If you want to assign a
function to recall while playing back images, select [
Custom Key].
1
Move to the [Rear] screen using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then, select [
Button] and press
the center of the control wheel.
2
Press the left/right side of the control wheel until [Eye AF] is displayed. Select [Eye AF], and then press the
center.
3
464
Hint
You can also assign shooting functions to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold
button.
Related Topic
Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
If you press the (Product Showcase Set) button in the still image shooting mode and eyes are detected,
[Eye AF] will activate, and the camera will focus on the eyes. Shoot images while holding down the
(Product Showcase Set) button.
465
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)
The Function menu is a menu of 12 functions that is displayed at the bottom of the screen when you press the Fn
(Function) button in the shooting mode. You can access frequently used functions more quickly by registering them to
the function menu.
Hint
You can register twelve functions to the Function menus for still image shooting and movie shooting, respectively.
You can recall functions more quickly by using the custom key function to assign frequently used functions to desired keys, along
with the function menu. Refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.
Press the Fn (Function) button in shooting mode.
1
Select the desired function by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.
2
Select the desired setting by turning the control wheel, and press the center of the control wheel.
3
466
To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens
Select the desired function in step 2, then press the center of the control wheel. The dedicated setting screen for the
function will appear. Follow the operating guide (A) to adjust settings.
To change the functions in the function menu (Function Menu Set.)
The following is the procedure for changing [Drive Mode] in the still image function menu to [Grid Line].
To change the movie function menu, select a movie function menu item in Step 2.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Some functions can be fine-tuned using the control dial.
MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Function Menu Set.].1.
Select
(Drive Mode) from among the twelve still image function menu items using the top/bottom/left/right
side of the control wheel, and then press the center.
2.
Move to the [Display/Auto Review] screen using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then, select [Grid Line] and
press the center of the control wheel.
(Grid Line) will be displayed in the former location of (Drive Mode) in the function menu.
3.
467
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Dial/Wheel Setup
You can switch the functions of the control dial and the control wheel.
Menu item details
SS F/no.:
You can change the shutter speed using the control wheel, and change the aperture value using the control dial.
F/no. SS:
You can change the aperture value using the control wheel, and change the shutter speed using the control dial.
Note
[Dial/Wheel Setup] is enabled when the shooting mode is set to [Manual Exposure].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Dial/Wheel Setup] → desired setting.
1
468
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Dial/Wheel Ev Comp
You can adjust the exposure compensation using the control dial or the control wheel.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not assign the exposure compensation function to the control dial or control wheel.
Wheel:
Assigns the exposure compensation function to the control wheel.
Dial:
Assigns the exposure compensation function to the control dial.
Note
If you assign the exposure compensation function to the control dial, the function that was originally assigned can be managed
using the control wheel, and vice versa.
When the shooting mode is set to [Manual Exposure] and ISO is set to [ISO AUTO], [Dial/Wheel Ev Comp] is disabled.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Dial/Wheel Ev Comp] → desired setting.
1
469
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Shutter
The camera automatically focuses on the point you touch and shoots a still image.
Set MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] to [On] in advance.
Hint
You can operate the shooting functions below by touching the monitor:
Shooting burst images using the touch shutter
When [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting], you can record burst images while touching the monitor.
Shooting burst images of sports scenes using the touch shutter
When the shooting mode is set to [Sports Action] in scene selection, you can record burst images while touching the monitor.
Shooting continuous bracket images using the touch shutter
The product shoots three images while automatically shifting the exposure from base, to darker, and then to lighter. When
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Bracket], keep touching the monitor until the shooting ends. After the recording you can select the
image you prefer.
Note
The [Touch Shutter] function is unavailable in the following situations:
During movie recording
During slow-motion/quick-motion recording
When the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama]
When [Focus Mode] is [Manual Focus]
When [Focus Area] is [Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Expand Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Tracking: Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]
While using the digital zoom function
While using the [ClearImage Zoom]
Related Topic
Touch Operation
Select MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Shutter].
1
Touch the icon inside the rectangle in the top right of the monitor while the shooting screen is
displayed.
The mark to the left of the icon turns orange, and the touch shutter function is activated.
To cancel [Touch Shutter], touch the
icon again.
The touch shutter function is canceled when the camera is restarted.
2
Touch the subject to focus on.
When the subject you touched is in focus, a still image is recorded.
3
470
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
471
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus
[Touch Focus] allows you to specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. This function is available
when [Focus Area] is set to a parameter other than [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]
. Select MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [On] beforehand.
Specifying the position where you want to focus in the still image mode
You can specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. After touching the monitor and specifying a
position, press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
Specifying the position where you want to focus in the movie recording mode (spot focus)
The camera will focus on the touched subject.
Hint
In addition to the touch focus function, touch operations such as the following are also available.
When [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible
Spot], the focusing frame can be moved using touch operations.
When the [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus], the focus magnifier can be used by double-tapping the monitor.
Note
The touch focus function is not available in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].
When using the digital zoom
When using the LA-EA4
Related Topic
Touch Operation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Focus].
1
Touch the monitor.
Touch the subject to focus.
To cancel focusing with touch operations, touch the
(Focus Cancel) icon or press the center of the control
wheel.
1.
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.
2.
Touch the subject on which you want to focus before or during recording.
When you touch the subject, the focus mode temporarily switches to manual focus and the focus can be adjusted
using the focus ring.
To cancel spot focus, touch the
(Focus Cancel) icon or press the center of the control wheel.
1.
472
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
473
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking
You can use touch operations to select a subject you want to track in the still image and movie recording modes.
Select MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [On] in advance.
Hint
To cancel tracking, touch the
(Tracking Cancel) icon or press the center of the control wheel.
Note
[Touch Tracking] is unavailable in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] in scene selection.
When shooting movies with [
Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p].
When the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].
When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On]
Related Topic
Touch Operation
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Tracking].
1
Touch the subject that you want to track on the monitor.
Tracking will start.
2
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.
3
474
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Dial / Wheel Lock
You can set whether the dial and wheel will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button.
Menu item details
Lock:
Locks the control dial and control wheel.
Unlock:
Does not lock the control dial or control wheel even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.
Hint
You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Dial / Wheel Lock] → desired setting.
1
475
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Audio signals
Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.
Menu item details
On:
Sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Sounds are not produced.
Note
If [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the camera will not beep when it focuses on a subject.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Audio signals] → desired setting.
1
476
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Smartphone Connect
You can adjust settings related to smartphone connection.
Menu item details
Smartphone Connection:
Sets whether to connect the camera and a smartphone. ([On] / [Off])
Connection:
Displays the QR Code or SSID used to connect the camera to a smartphone.
Cnct. while Power OFF:
Sets whether to accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off. ([On] / [Off])
Remote Shoot Setting:
Configures settings for images saved when performing remote shooting using a smartphone. ([Still Img. Save Dest.] / [
Save Image Size] / [ RAW+J Save Image])
Always Connected:
Sets whether to always connect the camera and a smartphone that has previously been connected. ([On] / [Off])
If this item is set to [On], once you connect the camera to a smartphone, you do not need to perform the connection
procedure on the camera again. If it is set to [Off], connect the camera and the smartphone manually when you want to
connect them.
Note
If [
Always Connected] is set to [On], the power consumption will be greater than when it is set to [Off].
Related Topic
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the QR Code
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the SSID and password
Cnct. while Power OFF
Using a smartphone as a remote commander
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU→
(Network) → [Smartphone Connect] → desired setting.
1
477
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Send to Smartphone Func.
You can transfer images to a smartphone by selecting images on the camera.
The following is the procedure for transferring the image currently displayed on the camera.
Menu item details
Send to Smartphone:
Selects images and transfers them to a smartphone. ([This Image] / [All Images in This Group] / [All with this date] / [All
with this date(
)] / [All with this date( )] / [Multiple Images])
The options displayed may differ depending on the View Mode selected on the camera.
If you select [Multiple Images], select the desired images using the center of the control wheel, then press MENU →
[Enter].
Size of Sending Image:
MENU →
(Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Size of Sending Image], [RAW+J Trans. Trgt.],
and [
Sending Target] → desired setting.
1
Display the image to be transferred on the playback screen.
2
MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Send to Smartphone] → [This Image].
The QR Code is displayed on the monitor of the camera.
You can also display the [Send to Smartphone Func.] screen by pressing the (Send to Smartphone) button.
3
Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone, and select [Connect with a new camera].
4
Scan the camera’s QR Code with your smartphone while displaying the [Connect using the camera QR
Code] screen on the smartphone.
Once the QR Code is read, [Connect with the camera?] will appear on the smartphone.
5
Select [OK] on the smartphone.
The camera and your smartphone will be connected, and the image will be transferred.
You can transfer multiple images at once by selecting a setting other than [This Image] in [Send to
Smartphone].
6
478
Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the smartphone. The original-sized JPEG file or a 2M-equivalent
JPEG file can be transferred. ([Original] / [2M])
RAW+J Trans. Trgt.:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to a smartphone when the images are shot with [
File Format] set to
[RAW & JPEG]. ([JPEG Only] / [RAW Only] / [RAW & JPEG])
Sending Target:
Sets whether to transfer the low-bit-rate proxy movie or the high-bit-rate original movie when transferring a movie to a
smartphone. ([Proxy Only] / [Original Only] / [Proxy & Original])
Hint
If you cannot connect your smartphone to the camera using the QR Code, use the SSID and password.
Note
Depending on the smartphone, the transferred movie may not be played back correctly. For example, the movie may not play
smoothly, or there may be no sound.
Depending on the format of the still image, movie, slow-motion movie, or quick-motion movie, it may not be possible to play it
back on a smartphone.
This product shares connection information for transferring images with devices that have permission to connect. If you want to
change the devices that are permitted to connect to the product, reset the connection information by following these steps. MENU
→
(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset]. After resetting the connection information, you must register the
smartphone again.
When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].
Related Topic
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the QR Code
Connecting the camera and a smartphone using the SSID and password
Airplane Mode
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
479
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)
Uses a Wi-Fi or USB connection, etc. to control the camera from a computer, including such functions as shooting and
storing images on the computer.
Select MENU →
(Network) → [Smartphone Connect] → [Smartphone Connection] → [Off] beforehand.
For details on [PC Remote Function], refer to the following URL:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/zv/zv-e10/l/pcremote.php
Menu item details
PC Remote:
Sets whether or not to use the [PC Remote] function. ([On] / [Off])
PC Remote Cnct Method:
Selects the connection method when the camera is connected to a computer using [PC Remote]
. ([USB]/[Wi-Fi
Direct]/[Wi-Fi Access Point])
Pairing:
When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point], pair the camera with the computer.
Wi-Fi Direct Info.:
Displays the information needed to connect to the camera from the computer when [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to
[Wi-Fi Direct].
Still Img. Save Dest.:
Sets whether or not to save still images to both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. ([PC
Only]/[PC+Camera]/[Camera Only])
RAW+J PC Save Img:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to [PC+Camera].
([RAW & JPEG]/[JPEG Only]/[RAW Only])
PC Save Image Size:
Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to [PC+Camera]. The
original-sized JPEG file or a 2M-equivalent JPEG file can be transferred. ([Original]/[2M])
How to connect the camera and the computer
When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [USB]
Connect the camera and the computer using a USB Type-C cable (supplied).
When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Direct]
Use the camera as an access point, and connect the computer to the camera directly via Wi-Fi.
Select MENU→
(Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [Wi-Fi Direct Info.] to display the Wi-Fi connection information
(SSID and password) for the camera. Connect the computer and the camera using the Wi-Fi connection information
displayed on the camera.
When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point]
MENU →
(Network) → [PC Remote Function] → Select an item to set, and then select the desired setting.
1
Connect the camera to the computer, and then launch Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote) on the computer.
You can now operate the camera using Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote).
The connection method between the camera and the computer depends on the setting for [PC Remote Cnct
Method].
2
480
Connect the camera and the computer via Wi-Fi using a wireless access point. The camera and the computer need to be
paired in advance.
Select MENU→
(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [WPS Push] or [Access Point Set.] to connect the camera to the
wireless access point. Connect the computer to the same wireless access point.
Select MENU → (Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [Pairing] on the camera, and then use Imaging Edge
Desktop (Remote) to pair the camera and the computer. Select [OK] on the pairing confirmation screen displayed on the
camera to finish pairing.
Pairing information is deleted when you initialize the camera.
Note
When an unrecordable memory card is inserted into the camera, you cannot record still images even if [Still Img. Save Dest.] is
set to [Camera Only] or [PC+Camera].
When [Camera Only] or [PC+Camera] is selected and no memory card is inserted into the camera, the shutter will not be
released even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].
[RAW+J PC Save Img] can only be selected when [
File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
481
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Airplane Mode
When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-related functions including Wi-Fi.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Network) → [Airplane Mode] → desired setting.
If you set [Airplane Mode] to [On], an airplane mark will be displayed on the screen.
1
482
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push
If your access point has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily.
Note
[WPS Push] works only if the security setting of your access point is set to WPA or WPA2 and your access point supports the Wi-
Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method. If the security setting is set to WEP or your access point does not support the Wi-Fi
Protected Setup (WPS) button method, perform [Access Point Set.].
For details about the available functions and settings of your access point, see the access point operating instructions or contact
the administrator of the access point.
A connection may not be possible or the communication distance may be shorter depending on the surrounding conditions, such
as the type of wall material and the presence of obstructions or radio waves between the product and access point. In this case,
change the location of the product or move the product closer to the access point.
Related Topic
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Network) →[Wi-Fi Settings] → [WPS Push].
1
Push the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button on the access point to connect.
2
483
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.
You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point,
security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point
operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.
Other setting items
Depending on the status or the setting method of your access point, you may want to set more items.
WPS PIN:
Displays the PIN code you enter into the connected device.
Priority Connection:
Select [On] or [Off].
IP Address Setting:
MENU →
(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Access Point Set.].
1
Select the access point you want to register.
When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the desired access point.
When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select [Manual Setting] and set the access
point.
If you select [Manual Setting], input the SSID name of the access point, then select the security system.
2
Input the password, and select [OK].
Access points without the (lock) mark do not require a password.
3
Select [OK].
4
484
Select [Auto] or [Manual].
IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the set address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway:
If you have set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.
Note
To give the registered access point priority in the future, set [Priority Connection] to [On].
Related Topic
Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push
How to use the keyboard
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
485
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Wi-Fi Settings: Display Wi-Fi Info.
Displays Wi-Fi information for the camera such as the MAC address, IP address, etc.
Hint
Information other than the MAC address is displayed under the following conditions.
[PC Remote] is set to [On] and [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point] under [PC Remote Function], and a
Wi-Fi connection has been established.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Display Wi-Fi Info.].
1
486
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset
This product shares connection information with devices that have permission to connect when connecting to a
smartphone or establishing a Wi-Fi Direct connection with a computer. If you want to change which devices have
permission to connect, reset the connection information.
Note
If you connect this product to a smartphone after resetting the connection information, you must make the settings for the
smartphone again.
If you connect this product to a computer with Wi-Fi Direct after resetting the connection information, you must reconfigure the
settings of the computer.
Related Topic
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset] → [OK].
1
487
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Bluetooth Settings
Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander via a Bluetooth
connection.
If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information link function, refer to “Location
Info. Link Set..”
If you want to perform pairing in order to use a Bluetooth remote commander, refer to “Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl.”
Menu item details
Bluetooth Function (On/Off):
Sets whether to activate or not the Bluetooth function of the camera.
Pairing:
Displays the screen for pairing the camera and smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander.
Disp Device Address:
Displays the BD address of the camera.
Related Topic
Location Info. Link Set.
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → desired setting.
1
488
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Location Info. Link Set.
You can use the application Imaging Edge Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected
with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting
images.
Preparation in advance
To use the location information linking function of the camera, the application Imaging Edge Mobile is required.
If “
Location Information Linkage” is not displayed on the top page of Imaging Edge Mobile, you need to perform the
following steps beforehand.
Operating procedure
: Operations performed on the smartphone
: Operations performed on the camera
Install Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone.
You can install Imaging Edge Mobile from the application store of your smartphone. If you have already installed
the application, update it to the latest version.
1.
Transfer a pre-recorded image to your smartphone using the [Send to Smartphone] function of the camera.
After you transfer an image recorded using the camera to your smartphone, “Location Information Linkage” will
appear on the top page of the application.
2.
: Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen. In steps 2 to 7, the pairing
operation is performed using the camera and the application Imaging Edge Mobile.
If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing
and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application
Imaging Edge Mobile.
1.
: On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].2.
: On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing].3.
: Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed, follow the steps in “Preparation in advance” above.
4.
: Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge
Mobile.
5.
: Follow the instructions on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge Mobile, and then
select your camera from the list.
6.
: Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera.
Pairing of the camera and Imaging Edge Mobile is complete.
7.
489
Menu item details
Location Info. Link:
Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
Auto Time Correct.:
Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Auto Area Adjust.:
Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Icons displayed when obtaining the location information
(Obtaining location information): The camera is obtaining the location information.
(Location information cannot be obtained): The camera cannot obtain the location information.
(Bluetooth connection available): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is established.
(Bluetooth connection unavailable): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is not established.
Hint
Location information can be linked when Imaging Edge Mobile is running on your smartphone even if the smartphone monitor is
off. However, if the camera has been turned off for a while, location information may not be linked immediately when you turn the
camera back on. In this case, location information will be linked immediately if you open the Imaging Edge Mobile screen on the
smartphone.
When Imaging Edge Mobile is not operating, such as when the smartphone is restarted, launch Imaging Edge Mobile to resume
location information linking.
If the location information linking function does not work properly, see the following notes and perform pairing again.
Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in Imaging Edge Mobile.
Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.
For more detailed instructions, refer to the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/iem/btg/
Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. Before performing pairing again, first delete the pairing
information for the camera registered in the smartphone's Bluetooth settings and Imaging Edge Mobile.
The location information will not be recorded when it cannot be obtained, such as when the Bluetooth connection is
disconnected.
The camera can be paired with up to 15 Bluetooth devices, but can link the location information with that of only one smartphone.
If you want to link the location information with that of another smartphone, turn off the [Location Information Linkage] function of
the smartphone that is already linked.
If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired smartphone.
When pairing the camera and your smartphone, be sure to use the [Location Information Linkage] menu on Imaging Edge
Mobile.
To use the location information linkage function, set [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [Off].
The communication distance for Bluetooth or Wi-Fi may vary depending on the conditions of use.
Supported smartphones
Refer to the support page for the latest information.
: On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [ Location Info. Link Set.] → [Location Info. Link] → [On].
(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information
obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.
8.
490
https://www.sony.net/iem/btg/
For details on Bluetooth versions compatible with your smartphone, check the product website for your smartphone.
Related Topic
Functions available with a smartphone (Imaging Edge Mobile)
Bluetooth Settings
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
491
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
You can operate the camera using a Bluetooth remote commander (sold separately). For details on compatible remote
commander, visit the Sony web site in your area, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.
Select MENU →
(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On] in advance. Refer to the
instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander as well.
Menu item details
On:
Enables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Off:
Disables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Hint
The Bluetooth connection is only active while you are operating the camera using the Bluetooth remote commander.
Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To use the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing
again.
If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired Bluetooth remote commander.
You cannot use the following functions while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].
Linking location information with a smartphone
Power-save function
If the function does not work properly, check the following notes and then try pairing again.
Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.
On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] → [On].
If there is no Bluetooth device currently paired with the camera, the screen for pairing as described in Step 2 will
appear.
1
On the camera, select MENU →
(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing] to display the screen for
pairing.
2
On the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing.
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander.
3
On the camera, select [OK] on the confirmation screen for the Bluetooth connection.
Pairing is complete, and you can now operate the camera from the Bluetooth remote commander. After pairing
the device once, you can connect the camera and the Bluetooth remote commander again in the future by
setting [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [On].
4
492
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Edit Device Name
You can change the device name for Wi-Fi Direct, [PC Remote], or Bluetooth connections.
Related Topic
Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)
How to use the keyboard
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Network) → [Edit Device Name].
1
Select the input box, then input the device name→[OK].
2
494
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Security(IPsec)
Encrypts data when the camera and a computer communicate via a Wi-Fi connection.
Menu item details
IPsec ([On]/[Off]):
Sets whether or not the [Security(IPsec)] function is used.
Dest. IP Address:
Sets the IP address of the device to connect using the [Security(IPsec)] function.
Shared Key:
Sets the shared key used by the [Security(IPsec)] function.
Note
Use at least eight and no more than 20 alphanumeric characters or symbols for [Shared Key].
For IPsec communications, the device to connect must be compatible with IPsec.
Depending on the device, communications may not be possible or the communication speed may be slow.
On this camera, IPsec operates in transport mode only and uses IKEv2.
The algorithms are AES with 128-bit keys in CBC mode/Diffie-Hellman 3072-bit modp group/PRF-HMAC-SHA-256/HMAC-SHA-
384-192.
The authentication expires after 24 hours.
Encrypted communications can only be made with devices that are configured correctly. Communications with other devices are
not encrypted.
For details on the IPsec configuration, consult the administrator of the network for your device.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Network) → [Security(IPsec)] → desired setting.
1
495
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Protecting images (Protect)
Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The
(Protect) mark is displayed on protected images.
Menu item details
Multiple Img.:
Applies the protection of the selected multiple images.
(1) Select the image to be protected, then press the center of the control wheel. The
(check) mark is displayed in
the check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to clear the check box.
(2) To protect other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].
All in this Folder:
Protects all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Protects all images taken on the selected date.
Cancel All in this Folder:
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected folder.
Cancel All with this date:
Cancels the protection of all images taken on the selected date.
All Images in This Group:
Protects all the images in the selected group.
Cancel All in This Group:
Cancels the protection of all the images in the selected group.
Hint
If you assign [Protect] to the key of your choice using MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], you can protect
images or cancel protection by simply pressing the key.
If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be protected. To select and protect particular images within
the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.
Note
The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Protect] → desired setting.
1
497
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Rotating an image (Rotate)
Rotates a recorded image counter-clockwise.
Note
Even if you rotate a movie file, it will be played back horizontally on the monitor of the camera.
You may not be able to rotate images shot using other products.
When viewing rotated images on a computer, the images may be displayed in their original orientation depending on the
software.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Display the image to be rotated, then select MENU →
(Playback) → [Rotate].
1
Press the center of the control wheel.
The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The image rotates as you press the center.
If you rotate the image once, the image remains rotated even after the product is turned off.
2
498
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
You can delete multiple selected images. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to
be deleted beforehand.
Menu item details
Multiple Img.:
Deletes the selected images.
(1) Select the images to be deleted, then press the center of the control wheel. The
(check) mark is displayed in the
check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to clear the check box.
(2) To delete other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].
All in this Folder:
Deletes all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Deletes all images taken on the selected date.
All Other Than This Img.:
Deletes all images in the group except the selection.
All Images in This Group:
Deletes all images in the selected group.
Hint
Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.
To display the desired folder or date, select the desired folder or date during playback by performing the following procedure:
(Image Index) lever → select the bar on the left using the control wheel → select the desired folder or date using the
top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be deleted. To select and delete particular images within
the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.
Note
The protected images cannot be deleted.
The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.
Related Topic
Display as Group
Deleting a displayed image
Format
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Delete] → desired setting.
1
499
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Rating
You can assign ratings to recorded still images on a scale of the number of stars (
- ) to make it easier to find
images.
Combining this function with [Image Jump Setting] allows you to find a desired image quickly.
Hint
You can also assign ratings when playing back images by using the custom key. Assign [Rating] to the desired key using [
Custom Key] beforehand, and then press the custom key while playing back an image to which you want to assign a rating. The
level of
(Rating) changes each time you press the custom key.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Rating].
The image rating selection screen will appear.
1
Press the left/right sides of the control wheel to display an image to which you want to assign a rating, and
then press the center.
2
Select the level of
(Rating) by pressing the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center.
3
Press the MENU button to exit the rating setting screen.
4
500
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Sets the available number of stars (
) when rating images with the key to which you have assigned [Rating] using [
Custom Key].
Related Topic
Rating
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Rating Set(Custom Key)].
1
Add a
(check) mark to the level of (Rating) that you want to activate.
You can select the checked number when setting [Rating] using the custom key.
2
501
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Specifying images to be printed (Specify Printing)
You can specify in advance on the memory card which still images you want to print out later. The
(print order)
icon will appear on the specified images. DPOF refers to “Digital Print Order Format.”
DPOF setting will be retained after the image is printed. We recommend that you cancel this setting after printing.
Menu item details
Multiple Img.:
Selects images to order printing.
(1) Select an image and press the center of the control wheel. The
(check) mark is displayed in the check box. To
cancel the selection, press the center again and clear the check box.
(2) Repeat step (1) to print other images. To select all the images from a certain date or in a certain folder, select the
check box for the date or folder.
(3) MENU → [OK].
Cancel All:
Clears all DPOF marks.
Print Setting:
Sets whether to print the date on images registered with DPOF marks.
The position or size of the date (inside or outside of the image) may differ depending on the printer.
Note
You cannot add the DPOF mark to the following files:
RAW images
The number of copies cannot be specified.
Some printers do not support the date print function.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Specify Printing] → desired setting.
1
502
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Photo Capture
Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback
to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.
Related Topic
Shooting movies
Playing back movies
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.
1
MENU →
(Playback) → [Photo Capture].
2
Play back the movie and pause it.
3
Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse slow playback, displays the next frame, and
displays the previous frame, and then stop the movie.
4
Press
(Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.
The scene is saved as a still image.
5
503
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarges the image being played back. Use this function to check the focus of the image, etc.
Hint
You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.
You can change the initial magnification and initial position of enlarged images by selecting MENU →
(Playback) → [
Enlarge Initial Mag.] or [ Enlarge Initial Position].
You can also enlarge an image by double-tapping the monitor. In addition, you can drag and move the magnified position on the
monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.
Note
You cannot enlarge movies.
Related Topic
Touch Operation
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Display the image you want to enlarge, and slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the T side.
When the image is enlarged too much, slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the W side to adjust the zoom scale.
By rotating the control dial, you can switch to the previous or next image while keeping the same zoom scale.
The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera focused during shooting. If the focus location
information cannot be obtained, the camera will zoom in on the center of the image.
1
Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel.
2
Press the MENU button or the center of the control wheel to exit the playback zoom.
3
504
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.
Menu item details
Standard. Mag.:
Displays an image with the standard magnification.
Previous Mag.:
Displays an image with the previous magnification. The previous magnification is stored even after exiting the playback
zoom mode.
Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Position
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] → desired setting.
1
505
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Enlarge Initial Position
Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback.
Menu item details
Focused Position:
Enlarges the image from the point of focus during shooting.
Center:
Enlarges the image from the center of the screen.
Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Mag.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [ Enlarge Initial Position] → desired setting.
1
506
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Cont. PB for Interval
Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.
You can create movies from still images produced by interval shooting using the computer software Imaging Edge
Desktop (Viewer). You cannot create movies from the still images on the camera.
Hint
On the playback screen, you can start continuous playback by pressing the down button while displaying an image in the group.
You can resume play or pause by pressing the down button during playback.
You can change the playback speed by turning the control dial or the control wheel during playback. You can also change the
playback speed by selecting MENU →
(Playback) → [PB Speed for Interval].
You can continuously play back images shot with continuous shooting as well.
Related Topic
Interval Shoot Func.
PB Speed for Interval
Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Cont. PB for Interval].
1
Select the image group that you want to play back, and then press the center of the control wheel.
2
507
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
PB Speed for Interval
Sets the playback speed for still images during [Cont. PB for
Interval].
Hint
You can also change the playback speed by turning the control dial or the control wheel during [Cont. PB for
Interval].
Related Topic
Cont. PB for Interval
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [PB Speed for Interval] → desired setting.
1
508
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)
Automatically plays back images continuously.
Menu item details
Repeat:
Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous loop, or [Off], in which the product exits the slideshow
when all the images are played back once.
Interval:
Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec], [3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10 Sec] or [30 Sec].
To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback
Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the slideshow.
Hint
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel.
You can activate a slideshow only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View] or [Folder View(Still)].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Slide Show] → desired setting.
1
Select [Enter].
2
509
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)
Sets the View Mode (image display method).
Menu item details
Date View:
Displays the images by date.
Folder View(Still):
Displays only still images.
XAVC S HD View:
Displays only XAVC S HD-format movies.
XAVC S 4K View:
Displays only XAVC S 4K-format movies.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [View Mode] → desired setting.
1
510
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.
To change the number of images to be displayed
MENU →
(Playback) → [Image Index] → desired setting.
Menu item details
9 Images/25 Images
To return to single-image playback
Select the desired image and press the center of the control wheel.
To display a desired image quickly
Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control wheel, then press the top/bottom sides of the
control wheel. While the bar is being selected, you can display the calendar screen or folder selection screen by pressing
the center. In addition, you can switch View Mode by selecting an icon.
Related Topic
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the W side while the image is being played back.
1
Select the image by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel or turning the control
wheel.
2
511
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Display as Group
Sets whether or not to display continuously shot images or images shot using interval shooting as a group.
Menu item details
On:
Displays images as a group.
Select a group and press the center of the control wheel to play back images in the group.
Off:
Does not display images as a group.
Hint
The following images are grouped.
Images shot with [Drive Mode] set to [Cont. Shooting] (One sequence of images shot continuously by holding down the shutter
button during continuous shooting becomes one group.)
Images shot with [
Interval Shoot Func.] (Images shot during one session of interval shooting become one group.)
On the image index screen, the
(Display as Group) icon is displayed over the group.
Note
Images can be grouped and displayed only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View]. When it is not set to [Date View], images
cannot be grouped and displayed, even if [Display as Group] is set to [On].
If you delete the group, all the images in the group will be deleted.
Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Interval Shoot Func.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Display as Group] → desired setting.
1
512
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)
Selects the orientation when playing back recorded images.
Menu item details
Auto:
When you rotate the camera, the displayed image rotates automatically by detecting the orientation of the camera.
Manual:
Images shot vertically are displayed vertically. If you have set the image orientation using the [Rotate] function, the image
will be displayed accordingly.
Off:
Images are always displayed horizontally.
Note
Movies shot vertically are played back horizontally during movie playback.
Related Topic
Rotating an image (Rotate)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Display Rotation] → desired setting.
1
513
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)
Sets which dial and method to use for jumping between images during playback. This function is useful when you want
to find one of many recorded images. You can also quickly find protected images or images set with a particular rating.
Menu item details
Select Dial/Wheel:
Selects the dial or wheel to use for jumping between images.
Image Jump Method:
Sets the method for playing back with Image Jump.
Note
A group is counted as one image when [Image Jump Method] is set to [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images].
When [Image Jump Method] is set to a parameter other than [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images], Image Jump will
only be available if [View Mode] is set to [Date View]
. If [View Mode] is not set to [Date View], the camera will always play back
every image without jumping when you use the dial selected with [Select Dial/Wheel].
When you use the Image Jump function and [Image Jump Method] is set to a parameter other than [One by one], [By 10 images],
or [By 100 images], movie files are always skipped.
Related Topic
Rating
Protecting images (Protect)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Playback) → [Image Jump Setting] → desired item.
1
514
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Monitor Brightness
Adjust the brightness of the screen.
Menu item details
Manual:
Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.
Sunny Weather:
Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.
Note
The [Sunny Weather] setting is too bright for shooting indoors. Set [Monitor Brightness] to [Manual] for indoor shooting.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Monitor Brightness] → desired setting.
1
515
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Gamma Disp. Assist
Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range.
Movies with the HLG gamma are assumed to be displayed on HDR-compatible monitors. They are therefore displayed in
low contrast during shooting, and may be difficult to monitor. However, you can use the [Gamma Disp. Assist] function to
reproduce contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when
playing back movies on the camera’s monitor.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not apply [Gamma Disp. Assist].
Auto:
Displays movies with an [S-Log2→709(800%)] effect when the gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [S-Log2], and with an [S-
Log3→709(800%)] effect when the gamma is set to [S-Log3]
. Displays movies with an [HLG(BT.2020)] effect when the
gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2] or [HLG3], and [Color Mode] is set to [BT.2020].
Displays movies with an [HLG(709)] effect when the gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2] or [HLG3],
and [Color Mode] is set to [709].
S-Log2→709(800%):
Displays movies with an S-Log2 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
S-Log3→709(800%):
Displays movies with an S-Log3 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
HLG(BT.2020):
Displays movies after adjusting the image quality of the monitor to a quality that is almost the same as when movies are
displayed on an [HLG(BT.2020)] compatible monitor.
HLG(709):
Displays movies after adjusting the image quality of the monitor to a quality that is almost the same as when movies are
displayed on an [HLG(709)] compatible monitor.
Note
Movies with the [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3] gamma are displayed with an [HLG(BT.2020)] effect or [HLG(709)] effect
depending on the movie’s gamma value and color mode. In other situations, movies are displayed according to the gamma
setting and color mode setting in [Picture Profile].
[Gamma Disp. Assist] is not applied to movies when displayed on a TV or monitor connected to the camera.
Related Topic
Picture Profile
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Gamma Disp. Assist].
1
Select the desired setting using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
2
516
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Volume Settings
Sets the sound volume for movie playback.
Adjusting the volume during playback
Press the bottom side of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the operation panel, then adjust the
volume. You can adjust the volume while listening to the actual sound.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Volume Settings] → desired setting.
1
517
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Delete confirm.
You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as a default on the delete confirmation screen.
Menu item details
"Delete" first:
[Delete] is selected as the default setting.
"Cancel" first:
[Cancel] is selected as the default setting.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Delete confirm.] → desired setting.
1
518
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Display Quality
You can change the display quality.
Menu item details
High:
Displays in high quality.
Standard:
Displays in standard quality.
Note
When [High] is set, battery consumption will be higher than when [Standard] is set.
When the temperature of the camera rises, the setting may become locked to [Standard].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Display Quality] → desired setting.
1
519
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Power Setting Option
You can perform camera power settings.
Menu item details
Power Save Start Time:
Sets time intervals to automatically switch to the power-save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent
wearing down the battery pack.
Power Save by Monitor:
Sets whether or not to enable power-save linkage when the monitor is opened or closed facing inward.
Auto Power OFF Temp.:
Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to [High],
you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal.
Setting the power-save start time
Off/30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min/10 Sec
Note
Turn off the camera when you do not plan to use it for a long time.
The power-save function is deactivated in the following situations:
During [
USB Streaming]
While power is being supplied via USB
While playing back slideshows
While recording movies
While connected to a computer or TV
When [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On]
Setting the power-save linkage with the monitor
Both Linked:
Enables power-save linkage with the monitor. The camera returns from power saving mode when the monitor is opened,
and enters power saving mode when the monitor is closed facing inward.
Open: Return:
The camera returns from power saving mode when the monitor is opened.
Close: Power Save:
The camera enters power saving mode when the monitor is closed facing inward.
Does Not Link:
Disables power-save linkage with the monitor.
MENU →
(Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → select an item that you want to set.
1
MENU →
(Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [Power Save Start Time] → desired setting.1.
MENU →
(Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [Power Save by Monitor] → desired setting.1.
520
Setting the auto power-off temperature
Standard:
Sets the standard temperature for the camera to turn off.
High:
Sets the temperature at which the camera turns off to higher than [Standard].
Notes when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]
Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand. Use a tripod.
Using the camera while holding it in your hand for a long period of time may cause low-temperature burns.
Note
Even if [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High], depending on the conditions or the temperature of the camera, the recordable
time for movies may not change.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [Auto Power OFF Temp.] → desired setting.1.
521
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
NTSC/PAL Selector
Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.
Note
When you perform [NTSC/PAL Selector], and the setting is changed from the default one, a message "Running on NTSC." or
"Running on PAL." will appear on the start-up screen.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [NTSC/PAL Selector] → [Enter]
1
522
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Cleaning Mode
If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to
an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens,
follow the steps below to clean the image sensor quickly.
Hint
For how to check the amount of dust on the image sensor, and for further details on cleaning methods, please refer to the
following URL.
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/www/support/ilc/sensor/index.php
Note
Make sure that the remaining battery level is
(3 remaining battery icons) or more, before performing the cleaning.
Do not use a spray type blower as it may scatter water droplets inside the camera body.
Do not put the tip of a blower into the cavity beyond the lens mount area, so that the tip of the blower does not touch the image
sensor.
Do not subject the product to any shock during cleaning.
When cleaning the image sensor with a blower, do not blow too hard. If you blow the sensor too hard, the inside of the product
may be damaged.
If the dust remains even after you cleaned the product as described, consult the service facility.
Confirm that the battery has been charged sufficiently.
1
MENU →
(Setup) → [Cleaning Mode] → [Enter].
2
Turn off the product following the instructions on the screen.
3
Detach the lens.
4
Use the commercially available blower to clean the image sensor surface and the surrounding areas.
Hold the camera slightly face downward so that the dust falls out.
5
Attach the lens.
6
523
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Touch Operation
Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.
Menu item details
On:
Activates the touch operation.
Off:
Deactivates the touch operation.
Related Topic
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Shutter
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Touch Operation] → desired setting.
1
525
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
TC/UB Settings
The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies.
Menu item details
TC/UB Disp. Setting:
Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
TC Preset:
Sets the time code.
UB Preset:
Sets the user bit.
TC Format:
Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
TC Run:
Sets the count up format for the time code.
TC Make:
Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
UB Time Rec:
Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
How to set the time code (TC Preset)
Note
When the monitor is flipped to shoot a self-portrait, the time code and user bit are not displayed.
How to reset the time code
How to set the user bit (UB Preset)
How to reset the user bit
MENU →
(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → setting value you want to change.
1
MENU →
(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].1.
Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
The time code can be set between the following range.
When [60p] is selected: 00:00:00.00 to 23:59:59.29
2.
When [24p] is selected, you can select the last two digits of the time code in multiples of four from 0 to 23 frames.
When [50p] is selected: 00:00:00.00 to 23:59:59.24
*
Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.3.
MENU →
(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].1.
Press the
(Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00.00).2.
MENU →
(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].1.
Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.2.
Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.3.
526
How to select the recording method for the time code (TC Format
*1
)
DF:
Records the time code in Drop Frame
*2
format.
NDF:
Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.
The setting is fixed to [NDF] when recording in 4K/24p or 1080/24p.
How to select the count up format for the time code (TC Run)
Rec Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The time code is recorded sequentially from
the last time code of the previous recording.
Free Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the camera operation.
The time code may not be recorded sequentially in the following situations even when the time code advances in
[Rec Run] mode.
When the recording format is changed.
When the recording medium is removed.
How to select how the time code is recorded (TC Make)
Preset:
Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.
Regenerate:
Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium and records the new time code
consecutively from the last time code. The time code advances in [Rec Run] mode regardless of the [TC Run] setting.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].1.
Press the
(Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).2.
MENU →
(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Format].1.
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*1
The time code is based on 30 frames per second. However, a gap between the actual time and the time code will occur during extended periods
of recording as the frame frequency of the NTSC image signal is approximately 29.97 frames per second. Drop frame corrects this gap to make
the time code and actual time equal. In drop frame, the first 2 frame numbers are removed every minute except for every tenth minute. The time
code without this correction is called non-drop frame.
*2
MENU →
(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Run].1.
MENU →
(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Make].1.
527
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution
When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately),
you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.
Menu item details
Auto:
The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
2160p/1080p:
Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
Note
If the images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select either [1080i], [1080p] or [2160p/1080p], based on which
TV is to be connected.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → desired setting.
1
528
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60p compatible models)
You can set 1080/24p or 1080/60p as the HDMI output format when [
Record Setting] is set to [24p 50M ], [24p
60M] or [24p 100M].
Menu item details
60p:
Movies are output as 60p.
24p:
Movies are output as 24p.
Related Topic
Record Setting (movie)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → [1080p] or [2160p/1080p].
1
MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ 24p/60p Output] → desired setting.
2
529
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display
Selects whether to display the shooting information when this product and the TV are connected using an HDMI cable
(sold separately).
Menu item details
On:
Displays the shooting information on the TV.
The recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on the TV, while nothing is displayed on the camera’s
monitor.
Off:
Does not display the shooting information on the TV.
Only the recorded image is displayed on the TV, while the recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on
the camera’s monitor.
Note
When the camera is connected to an HDMI device while [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], the setting switches to [Off].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Info. Display] → desired setting.
1
530
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie)
Sets whether or not to layer the TC (time code) information on the output signal via the HDMI terminal when outputting
the signal to other professional-use devices.
This function layers the time code information on the HDMI output signal. The product sends the time code information
as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The connected device can then refer to the digital data to
recognize the time data.
Menu item details
On:
Time code is output to other devices.
Off:
Time code is not output to other devices.
Note
When [
TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In such cases, set [
TC Output] to [Off].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ TC Output] → desired setting.
1
531
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)
If you connect the camera to an external recorder/player, you can remotely command the recorder/player to start/stop
recording using the camera.
Menu item details
On:
(STBY) The camera can send a recording command to an external recorder/player.
(REC) The camera is sending a recording command to an external recorder/player.
Off:
The camera is not able to send a command to an external recorder/player to start/stop recording.
Note
Available for external recorders/players compatible with [
REC Control].
When you use the [
REC Control] function, set the camera to the movie recording mode.
When [
TC Output] is set to [Off], you cannot use the [ REC Control] function.
Even when
(REC) is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work properly depending on the settings or status of
the recorder/player. Check if the external recorder/player works properly before use.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ REC Control] → desired setting.
1
532
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI
When connecting this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can
operate this product by aiming the TV remote control at the TV.
Menu item details
On:
You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Off:
You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Note
If you connect this product to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.
[CTRL FOR HDMI] is available only with a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV. Also, the SYNC MENU operation differs depending on
the TV you are using. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.
If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the product is connected to another
manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [Off].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → desired setting.
1
Connect this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV.
The input of the TV is switched automatically and images on this product are displayed on the TV screen.
2
Press the SYNC MENU button of the TV’s remote control.
3
Operate this product using the TV’s remote control.
4
533
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
4K Output Select (movie)
You can set how to record movies and perform HDMI output when your camera is connected to 4K-compatible external
recording/playback devices, etc.
Menu item details
Memory Card+HDMI:
Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(30p):
Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(24p):
Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(25p)
*
:
Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
Note
This item can be set only when the camera is in movie mode and connected to a 4K-compatible device.
When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p)] or [HDMI Only(25p)] is set, [HDMI Info. Display] will temporarily be set to [Off].
A 4K movie is not output to the connected 4K-compatible device during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.
When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p)] or [HDMI Only(25p)] is set, the counter does not move forward (the actual recording
time is not counted) while the movie is being recorded on an external recording/playback device.
When shooting 4K movies using the setting [Memory Card+HDMI], the movies will not be output to a device connected by HDMI
cable if you simultaneously record a proxy movie. If you want to perform HDMI output, set [
Proxy Recording] to [Off]. (In this
case, if you set [
Record Setting] to other values except [24p], the image will not be displayed on the screen of the camera).
When [
File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and the camera is connected via HDMI, the following functions are partially
restricted.
[Face/Eye Priority in AF]
[Face Priority in Multi Metering]
Tracking function
Related Topic
HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)
File Format (movie)
Record Setting (movie)
HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display
Press the Still/Movie/S&Q button to select the movie recording mode.
1
Connect the camera to the desired device via an HDMI cable.
2
MENU →
(Setup) → [ 4K Output Select] → desired setting.
3
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL.
*
534
5-028-017-12(2) Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
535
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
USB Connection
Selects the USB connection method when this product is connected to a computer, etc.
Select MENU →
(Network) → [Smartphone Connect] → [Smartphone Connection] → [Off] beforehand.
Also, set MENU → (Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [PC Remote] → [Off].
Menu item details
Auto:
Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be
connected.
Mass Storage:
Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product and a computer or other USB device.
MTP:
Establishes an MTP connection between this product and a computer or other USB device.
Note
It may take some time to make the connection between this product and a computer when [USB Connection] is set to [Auto].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [USB Connection] → desired setting.
1
536
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
USB LUN Setting
Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.
Menu item details
Multi:
Normally, use [Multi].
Single:
Set [USB LUN Setting] to [Single] only if you cannot make a connection.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [USB LUN Setting] → desired setting.
1
537
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
USB Power Supply
Sets whether to supply power via the USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or an USB device.
Menu item details
On:
Power is supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.
Off:
Power is not supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc. If you use the
supplied AC Adaptor, power will be supplied even when [Off] is selected.
Operations available while supplying power via a USB cable
The following table shows you which operations are available/unavailable while supplying power via a USB cable.
Note
Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [USB Power Supply] → desired setting.
1
Operation Available / Unavailable
Shooting images Available
Playing back images Available
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connections Available
Charging a battery pack Unavailable
Turning the camera on without a battery pack inserted Unavailable
538
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Date/Time Setup
The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on this product for the first time or when the internal
rechargeable backup battery has fully discharged. Select this menu when setting the date and time after the first time.
Menu item details
Daylight Savings:
Selects Daylight Savings [On]/[Off].
Date/Time:
Sets the date and time.
Date Format:
Selects the date and time display format.
Hint
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack, and leave the product for 24 hours or more
with the power off.
If the clock resets every time the battery is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out. Consult your
service facility.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Date/Time Setup] → desired setting.
1
540
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Format
When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the
camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory
card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable data on a computer, etc.
Note
Formatting permanently erases all data including protected images and registered settings (from M1 to M4).
The access lamp lights up during formatting. Do not remove the memory card while the access lamp is lit up.
Format the memory card on this camera. If you format the memory card on the computer, the memory card may not be usable
depending on the format type.
It may take a few minutes to complete formatting, depending on the memory card.
You cannot format the memory card if the remaining battery charge is less than 1%.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Format].
1
542
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Select REC Folder
If [Folder Name] under [
File/Folder Settings] is set to [Standard Form] and there are 2 folders or more, you can select
the folder on the memory card to which images are to be recorded.
Note
You cannot select the folder when [Folder Name] under [
File/Folder Settings] is set to [Date Form].
Related Topic
File/Folder Settings (still image)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU→
(Setup)→[Select REC Folder]→desired folder.
1
543
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
New Folder
Creates a new folder on the memory card for recording still images. A new folder is created with a folder number one
greater than the largest folder number currently used. Images are recorded in the newly created folder.
Note
When you insert a memory card that was used with other equipment into this product and shoot images, a new folder may be
automatically created.
Up to 4,000 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new folder may be automatically
created.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU→
(Setup)→[New Folder].
1
544
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
File/Folder Settings (still image)
Sets file names for still images to be shot, and specifies folders for storing the shot still images.
Menu item details
File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to still images.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers for each folder.
[Reset]: Resets file numbers for each folder.
Set File Name:
You can specify the first three characters of the file name.
Folder Name:
You can set how folder names are assigned.
[Standard Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + MSDCF”.
Example: 100MSDCF
[Date Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + Y (the last digit of the year)/MM/DD”.
Example: 10010405 (Folder number: 100; date: 04/05/2021)
Note
Only capital letters, numbers, and underscores can be used for [Set File Name]. Underscores cannot be used for the first
character.
The three characters specified using [Set File Name] are only applied to files recorded after the setting is made.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [ File/Folder Settings] → desired setting.
1
545
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
File Settings (movie)
Configure settings for the file names of recorded movies.
Menu item details
File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to movies.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers even if the memory card is changed.
[Reset]: Resets the file number when the memory card is changed.
Series Counter Reset:
Resets the series counter used when [File Number] is set to [Series].
File Name Format:
You can set the format for movie file names.
[Standard]: The file name of the recorded movie starts with “C.” Example: C0001
[Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+File number.”
[Date + Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Date+Title+File number.”
[Title + Date]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+Date+ File number.”
Title Name Settings:
You can set the title when [File Name Format] is set to [Title], [Date + Title], or [Title + Date].
Note
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be input for [Title Name Settings]. Up to 37 characters can be entered.
Titles specified using [Title Name Settings] are only applied to movies recorded after the setting is made.
You cannot set how folder names are assigned for movies.
If you are using an SDHC memory card, [File Name Format] is locked to [Standard].
If you insert a memory card used with [File Name Format] set to one of the following into another device, the memory card may
not function properly.
[Title]
[Date + Title]
[Title + Date]
If there are unused numbers due to file deletion, etc., these numbers will be reused when the movie file number reaches “9999.”
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [ File Settings] → desired setting.
1
546
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Recover Image DB
If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image database file. In such cases, the images
on the memory card will not be played back on this product. If these problems happen, repair the file using [Recover
Image DB].
Note
If the battery pack is extremely depleted, image database files cannot be repaired. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.
Images recorded on the memory card are not deleted by [Recover Image DB].
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Recover Image DB] → [Enter].
1
547
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Display Media Info.
Displays the recordable time of movies for the inserted memory card. Also displays the number of recordable still images
for the inserted memory card.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Display Media Info.].
1
548
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Version
Displays the version of this product’s software. Check the version when updates for this product’s software are released,
etc.
Also displays the version of the lens if a lens compatible with firmware updates is attached.
The version of the Mount Adaptor is displayed in the lens area if a Mount Adaptor compatible with firmware updates is
attached.
Note
Updating can be performed only when the battery level is
(3 remaining battery bars) or more. The use of a sufficiently
charged battery or the AC Adaptor (sold separately) is recommended.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Version].
1
549
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Setting Reset
Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform [Setting Reset], the recorded images are retained.
Menu item details
Camera Settings Reset:
Initializes the main shooting settings to the default settings.
Initialize:
Initializes all the settings to the default settings.
Note
Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.
The value set with [AF Micro Adj.] will not be reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed.
Settings of [Picture Profile] will not be reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed.
Related Topic
AF Micro Adj.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(Setup) → [Setting Reset] → desired setting.
1
550
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Add Item
You can register the desired menu items to
(My Menu) under MENU.
Hint
You can add up to 30 items to
(My Menu).
Note
You cannot add the following items to
(My Menu).
Any item under MENU →
(Playback)
Related Topic
Sort Item
Delete Item
Using MENU items
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(My Menu) → [Add Item].
1
Select an item that you want to add to
(My Menu) using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control
wheel.
2
Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
3
551
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Sort Item
You can rearrange the menu items added to
(My Menu) under MENU.
Related Topic
Add Item
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(My Menu) → [Sort Item].
1
Select an item that you want to move using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
2
Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
3
552
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Delete Item
You can delete menu items added to
(My Menu) of MENU.
Hint
To delete all the items on a page, select MENU →
(My Menu) → [Delete Page].
You can delete all the items added to
(My Menu) by selecting MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete All].
Related Topic
Delete Page
Delete All
Add Item
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(My Menu) → [Delete Item].
1
Select an item that you want to delete using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then
press the center to delete the selected item.
2
553
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Delete Page
You can delete all the menu items added to a page under
(My Menu) in MENU.
Related Topic
Add Item
Delete All
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(My Menu) → [Delete Page].
1
Select a page that you want to delete using the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center of the control wheel to delete the items.
2
554
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Display From My Menu
You can set My Menu to appear first when you press the MENU button.
Menu item details
On:
My Menu appears first when you press the MENU button.
Off:
The most recently displayed menu appears when you press the MENU button.
Related Topic
Add Item
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
MENU →
(My Menu) → [Display From My Menu] → desired setting.
1
556
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Precautions
Refer also to “Notes on use” in the Startup Guide (supplied) for this product.
On the data specifications described in this manual
The data on performance and specifications in this manual are based on an ordinary ambient temperature of 25ºC
(77°F), except where otherwise indicated.
For the battery pack, the data are based on a battery pack that was fully charged until the charge lamp turned off.
On operating temperatures
Shooting in extremely cold or hot environments that exceed the operating temperature range is not recommended.
Under high ambient temperatures, the temperature of the camera rises quickly.
When the temperature of the camera rises, the image quality may deteriorate. It is recommended that you wait until
the temperature of the camera drops before continuing to shoot.
Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the camera may become unable to record movies or the power
may turn off automatically to protect the camera. A message will be displayed on the screen before the power turns
off or you can no longer record movies. In this case, leave the power off and wait until the camera and battery
temperature goes down. If you turn on the power without letting the camera and battery cool sufficiently, the power
may turn off again, or you may still be unable to record movies.
Notes on recording for long periods of time or recording 4K movies
Especially during 4K movie shooting, the recording time may be shorter under low temperature conditions. Warm up the
battery pack or replace it with a new battery.
Notes on playing movies on other devices
XAVC S movies can be played back only on XAVC S-supported devices.
Notes on recording/playback
Before you start recording, make a trial recording to make sure that the camera is working correctly.
Playback of images recorded with your product on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with
other equipment on your product are not guaranteed.
Sony can provide no guarantees in the event of failure to record, or loss of or damage to recorded images or audio
data, due to a malfunction of the camera or recording media, etc. We recommend backing up important data.
Once you format the memory card, all the data recorded on the memory card will be deleted and cannot be restored.
Before formatting, copy the data to a computer or other device.
Backing up memory cards
Data may be corrupted in the following cases. Be sure to back up the data for protection.
When the memory card is removed, the USB cable is disconnected, or the product is turned off in the middle of a
read or write operation.
When the memory card is used in locations subject to static electricity or electrical noise.
Database file error
If you insert a memory card that does not contain an image database file into the product and turn on the power, the
product automatically creates an image database file using some of the memory card’s capacity. The process may
take a long time and you cannot operate the product until the process is completed.
557
If a database file error occurs, export all images to your computer, and then format the memory card using this
product.
Do not use/store the product in the following places
In an extremely hot, cold or humid place
In places such as in a car parked in the sun, the camera body may become deformed and this may cause a
malfunction.
Storing under direct sunlight or near a heater
The camera body may become discolored or deformed, and this may cause a malfunction.
In a location subject to rocking vibration
It may cause malfunctions and an inability to record data. In addition, the recording media may become unusable,
and recorded data may be corrupted.
Near strong magnetic place
In sandy or dusty places
Be careful not to let sand or dust get into the product. This may cause the product to malfunction, and in some cases
this malfunction cannot be repaired.
In places with high humidity
This may cause the lens to mold.
In areas where strong radio waves or radiation are being emitted
Recording and playback may not function correctly.
On moisture condensation
If the product is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, moisture may condense inside or outside the
product. This moisture condensation may cause a malfunction of the product.
To prevent moisture condensation when you bring the product directly from a cold to a warm location, first put it in a
plastic bag and seal it to prevent air from entering. Wait for about an hour until the temperature of the product has
reached the ambient temperature.
If moisture condensation occurs, turn off the product and wait about an hour for the moisture to evaporate. Note that
if you attempt to shoot with moisture remaining inside the lens, you will be unable to record clear images.
Precaution on carrying
Do not hold, hit, or apply excessive force to the following parts, if your camera is equipped with them:
The lens part
The movable monitor part
The movable flash part
The movable viewfinder part
Do not carry the camera with the tripod attached. This may cause the tripod socket hole to break.
Do not sit down in a chair or other place with the camera in the back pocket of your trousers or skirt, as this may
cause malfunction or damage the camera.
Notes on handling the product
Before you connect the cable to the terminal, be sure to check the orientation of the terminal. Then, insert the cable
straight. Do not insert or remove the cable forcefully. This may cause the terminal part to break.
The camera uses magnetic parts including magnets. Do not bring objects affected by magnetism, including credit
cards and floppy disks, close to the camera.
The recorded image may be different from the image you monitored before recording.
On storing
For lens-integrated cameras
Always attach the lens cap when you are not using the camera. (Only for models supplied with a lens cap)
For interchangeable-lens cameras
Always attach the lens front cap or body cap when you are not using the camera. To prevent dust or debris from
getting inside the camera, remove dust from the body cap before attaching it to the camera.
If the camera is dirty after use, clean it. Water, sand, dust, salt, etc. left in the camera may cause a malfunction.
558
Notes on using lenses
When using the power zoom lens, be careful not to get your fingers or any other objects caught in the lens. (Only for
models with a power zoom feature or interchangeable lens cameras)
If you must place the camera under a light source such as sunlight, attach the lens cap to the camera. (Only for
models supplied with a lens cap or interchangeable lens cameras)
When you shoot with backlighting, keep the sun sufficiently far away from the angle of view. Otherwise, the sunlight
may enter the focus inside the camera and cause smoke or fire. Even if the sun is slightly away from the angle of
view, it may still cause smoke or fire.
Do not directly expose the lens to beams such as laser beams. That may damage the image sensor and cause the
camera to malfunction.
If the subject is too close, the image may show any dust or fingerprints on the lens. Wipe the lens with a soft cloth,
etc.
Notes on the flash (Only for models with a flash)
Keep your fingers away from the flash. The light-emitting part may get hot.
Remove any dirt from the surface of the flash. Dirt on the surface of the flash may emit smoke or burn due to heat
generated by the emission of light. If there is dirt/dust, clean it off with a soft cloth.
Restore the flash to its original position after using it. Make sure that the flash portion is not sticking up. (Only for
models with a movable flash)
Notes on the Multi Interface Shoe (Only for models with a Multi Interface Shoe)
When attaching or detaching accessories such as an external flash to the Multi Interface Shoe, first turn the power to
OFF. When attaching the accessory, confirm that it is firmly fastened to the camera.
Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that applies voltages of 250 V or more or has
the opposite polarity of the camera. It may cause a malfunction.
Notes on the viewfinder and flash (Only for models with a viewfinder or a flash)
Take care that your finger is not in the way when pushing the viewfinder or flash down. (Only for models with a
movable viewfinder or a movable flash)
If water, dust or sand adheres to the viewfinder or flash unit, it may cause a malfunction. (Only for models with a
movable viewfinder or a movable flash)
Notes on the viewfinder (Only for models with a viewfinder)
When shooting with the viewfinder, you may experience symptoms such as eyestrain, fatigue, travel sickness, or
nausea. We recommend that you take a break at regular intervals when you are shooting with the viewfinder.
In case you may feel uncomfortable, refrain from using the viewfinder until your condition recovers, and consult your
doctor if necessary.
Do not forcibly push down the viewfinder when the eyepiece is pulled out. It may cause a malfunction. (Only for
models with a movable viewfinder and an eyepiece that can be pulled out)
If you pan the camera while looking into the viewfinder or move your eyes around, the image in the viewfinder may
be distorted or the color of the image may change. This is a characteristic of the lens or display device and is not a
malfunction. When you shoot an image, we recommend that you look at the center area of the viewfinder.
The image may be slightly distorted near the corners of the viewfinder. This is not a malfunction. When you want to
see the full composition with all its details, you can also use the monitor.
If you use the camera in a cold location, the image may have a trailing appearance. This is not a malfunction.
Notes on the monitor
Do not press against the monitor. The monitor may be discolored and that may cause a malfunction.
If the monitor has drops of water or other liquids on it, wipe it with a soft cloth. If the monitor stays wet, the surface of
the monitor may change or deteriorate. This may cause a malfunction.
If you use the camera in a cold location, the image may have a trailing appearance. This is not a malfunction.
When you connect cables to the terminals on the camera, the rotating range of the monitor may become limited.
Notes on the image sensor
559
If you point the camera at an extremely strong light source while shooting images with a low ISO sensitivity, highlighted
areas in the images may be recorded as black areas.
On image data compatibility
This product conforms with DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan
Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association).
Services and software provided by other companies
Network services, content, and the [operating system and] software of this Product may be subject to individual terms
and conditions and changed, interrupted or discontinued at any time and may require fees, registration and credit card
information.
Notes on connecting to the Internet
Connect the camera to the network via a router, or connect to a LAN port with the same function. If you connect using a
different method, security problems may occur.
Optional accessories
It is recommended that you use genuine Sony accessories.
Some Sony accessories are only available in certain countries and regions.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
560
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
On cleaning
Cleaning the lens
Do not use a cleaning solution containing organic solvents, such as thinner, or benzine.
When cleaning the lens surface, remove dust with a commercially available blower. In case of dust that sticks to the
surface, wipe it off with a soft cloth or tissue paper slightly moistened with lens cleaning solution. Wipe in a spiral
pattern from the center to the outside. Do not spray lens cleaning solution directly onto the lens surface.
Cleaning the camera body
Do not touch the parts of the product inside the lens mount, such as a lens signal contact. To clean inside the lens
mount, use a commercially available blower* to blow any dust off.
Cleaning the product surface
Clean the product surface with a soft cloth slightly moistened with water, then wipe the surface with a dry cloth. To
prevent damage to the finish or casing:
Do not expose the product to chemical products such as thinner, benzine, alcohol, disposable cloths, insect repellent,
sunscreen or insecticide.
Do not touch the product with any of the above on your hand.
Do not leave the product in contact with rubber or vinyl for a long time.
Cleaning the monitor
If you wipe the monitor firmly using tissue paper, etc., the monitor may be scratched.
If the monitor becomes dirty with fingerprints or dust, gently remove the dust from the surface, and then clean the
monitor using soft cloth, etc.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Do not use a spray-type blower as doing so may cause a malfunction.
*
561
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Cleaning Mode
If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to
an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens,
follow the steps below to clean the image sensor quickly.
Hint
For how to check the amount of dust on the image sensor, and for further details on cleaning methods, please refer to the
following URL.
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/www/support/ilc/sensor/index.php
Note
Make sure that the remaining battery level is
(3 remaining battery icons) or more, before performing the cleaning.
Do not use a spray type blower as it may scatter water droplets inside the camera body.
Do not put the tip of a blower into the cavity beyond the lens mount area, so that the tip of the blower does not touch the image
sensor.
Do not subject the product to any shock during cleaning.
When cleaning the image sensor with a blower, do not blow too hard. If you blow the sensor too hard, the inside of the product
may be damaged.
If the dust remains even after you cleaned the product as described, consult the service facility.
Confirm that the battery has been charged sufficiently.
1
MENU →
(Setup) → [Cleaning Mode] → [Enter].
2
Turn off the product following the instructions on the screen.
3
Detach the lens.
4
Use the commercially available blower to clean the image sensor surface and the surrounding areas.
Hold the camera slightly face downward so that the dust falls out.
5
Attach the lens.
6
562
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Number of recordable images
When you insert a memory card into the camera and turn the camera on, the number of images that can be recorded
(should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the screen.
Note
When “0” (the number of recordable images) flashes in orange, the memory card is full. Replace the memory card with another
one, or delete images from the current memory card.
When “NO CARD” flashes in orange, it means no memory card has been inserted. Insert a memory card.
The number of images that can be recorded on a memory card
The table below shows the approximate number of images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this
camera. The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing.
The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.
[
JPEG Image Size]: [L: 24M]
[ Aspect Ratio]: [3:2]
*1
(Units: Images)
Note
Even if the number of recordable images is higher than 9999 images, “9999” will appear.
The numbers shown are when using a Sony memory card.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
JPEG Quality/ File Format 64 GB 128 GB
JPEG Standard 10000 20000
JPEG Fine 6400 12000
JPEG Extra fine 3100 6300
RAW & JPEG (Compressed RAW)
*2
1700 3400
RAW (Compressed RAW) 2300 4600
When [
Aspect Ratio] is set to other than [3:2], you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above. (except when [RAW]
is selected)
*1
[
JPEG Quality] when [RAW & JPEG] is selected: [Fine]
*2
564
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Recordable movie times
The table below shows the approximate total recording times using a memory card formatted with this camera. The
values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.
(h (hour), min (minute))
The recording times when [
Proxy Recording] is set to [Off].
The duration of time available for movie recording varies depending on the file format/recording settings for movies,
memory card, ambient temperature, Wi-Fi network environment, condition of the camera before you start recording,
and condition of the charging of the battery.
The maximum continuous recording time for a single movie shooting session is approximately 13 hours (a product
specification limit).
Note
The recordable time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit-Rate), which automatically adjusts
image quality depending on the shooting scene. When you record a fast-moving subject, the image is clearer but the recordable
time is shorter because more memory is required for recording. The recordable time also varies depending on the shooting
conditions, the subject or the image quality/size settings.
The times shown are recordable times using a Sony memory card.
Notes on continuous movie recording
High-quality movie recording and high-speed continuous shooting require large amounts of power. Therefore, if you
continue to shoot, the temperature inside the camera will rise, especially that of the image sensor. In such cases, the
camera will turn off automatically because the surface of the camera is heated to a high temperature or the high
temperature affects the quality of the images or the internal mechanism of the camera.
The duration of time available for continuous movie recording when the camera records with the default settings after
the power has been turned off for a while is as follows. The values indicate the continuous time from when the
camera starts recording until the camera stops recording.
When [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [Standard]
File Format Frame rate Bit-rate 64 GB 128 GB
XAVC S 4K 30p/25p
100M 1 h 15 min 2 h 30 min
60M 2 h 4 h
XAVC S HD 60p/50p
50M 2 h 20 min 4 h 40 min
25M 4 h 20 min 8 h 50 min
File Format XAVC S HD XAVC S 4K
Ambient temperature: 25°C (77°F) Approx. 30 minutes Approx. 20 minutes
Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F) Approx. 30 minutes Approx. 20 minutes
565
When [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]
XAVC S HD: 60p 50M/50p 50M, when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi
XAVC S 4K: 24p 60M/25p 60M, when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi
The duration of time available for movie recording varies with the temperature, file format/record setting for movies,
Wi-Fi network environment, or condition of the camera before you start recording. If you frequently recompose or
shoot images after the power is turned on, the temperature inside the camera will rise and the recording time
available will be shorter.
If
(Overheating warning icon) appears, the temperature of the camera has risen.
If the camera stops movie recording due to a high temperature, leave it for some time with the power turned off. Start
recording after the temperature inside the camera drops fully.
If you observe the following points, you will be able to record movies for longer periods of time.
Keep the camera out of direct sunlight.
Turn the camera off when it is not being used.
Related Topic
Battery life and number of recordable images
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
File Format XAVC S HD XAVC S 4K
Ambient temperature: 25°C (77°F) Approx. 60 minutes Approx. 30 minutes
Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F) Approx. 60 minutes Approx. 30 minutes
566
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Using the AC Adaptor/battery charger abroad
You can use the battery charger (sold separately) and the AC Adaptor (supplied) in any country or region where the
power supply is within 100 V to 240 V AC and 50 Hz/60 Hz.
Depending on the country/region, a converting plug adaptor may be needed to connect to a wall outlet (wall socket).
Consult a travel agency, etc., and prepare one in advance.
Note
Do not use an electronic voltage transformer as doing so may cause a malfunction.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
567
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
License
Notes on the License
This product comes with software that are used based on licensing agreements with the owners of that software. Based
on requests by the owners of copyright of these software applications, we have an obligation to inform you of the
following. Licenses (in English) are recorded in the internal memory of your product. Establish a Mass Storage
connection between the product and a computer to read licenses in the “PMHOME” - “LICENSE” folder.
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A
CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR
WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE HTTPS://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
On GNU GPL/LGPL applied software
The software included in this product contains copyrighted software that is licensed under the GPLv2 and other licenses
which may require access to source code. You may find a copy of the relevant source code as required under the GPLv2
(and other licenses) at https://www.sony.net/Products/Linux/.
You may obtain the source code as required by the GPLv2 on a physical medium from us for a period of three years after
our last shipment of this product by applying through the form at https://www.sony.net/Products/Linux/.
This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
568
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Specifications
Camera
[System]
Camera Type
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
Lens
Sony E-mount lens
[Image sensor]
Image format
APS-C size (23.5 mm × 15.6 mm), CMOS image sensor
Effective pixel number of camera
Approx. 24 200 000 pixels
Total pixel number of camera
Approx. 25 000 000 pixels
[Auto focus system]
Detection system
Phase-detection system/Contrast detection system
Sensitivity Range
–3 EV to +20 EV (at ISO 100 equivalent, F2.0)
[Monitor]
LCD monitor
7.5 cm (3.0 type) TFT drive, touch panel
Total number of dots
921 600 dots
[Exposure control]
Metering method
1 200-zone evaluative metering
Metering Range
–2 EV to +20 EV (at ISO 100 equivalent with F2.0 lens)
ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images: ISO 100 to ISO 32 000 (Extended ISO: Minimum ISO 50, maximum ISO 51 200), [ISO AUTO] (ISO 100 to
ISO 6 400, Maximum/Minimum can be set.)
Movies: ISO 100 to ISO 32 000 equivalent, [ISO AUTO] (ISO 100 to ISO 6 400 equivalent, Maximum/Minimum can be
set.)
Exposure compensation
±5.0 EV (switchable between 1/3 EV and 1/2 EV steps)
569
[Shutter]
Type
Electronically-controlled, vertical-traverse, focal-plane type
Speed range
Still images: 1/4 000 second to 30 seconds, BULB
Movies: 1/4 000 second to 1/4 second (1/3 EV step)
1080 60p-compatible devices: up to 1/60 second in AUTO mode (up to 1/30 second in Auto slow shutter mode)
1080 50p-compatible devices: up to 1/50 second in AUTO mode (up to 1/25 second in Auto slow shutter mode)
Flash sync speed
1/160 second (when using a flash manufactured by Sony)
[Continuous shooting]
Continuous shooting speed
(Continuous Shooting: Hi+): Maximum of approx. 11 images per second/ (Continuous Shooting: Hi):
Maximum of approx. 8 images per second/
(Continuous Shooting: Mid): Maximum of approx. 6 images per second/
(Continuous Shooting: Lo): Maximum of approx. 3 images per second
Based on our measurement conditions. The speed of continuous shooting can be slower, depending on the shooting
conditions.
[Recording format]
File format
JPEG (DCF Ver. 2.0, Exif Ver. 2.32, MPF Baseline) compliant, RAW (Sony ARW 2.3 format)
Movie (XAVC S format)
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 XAVC S ver.1.0 format compliant
Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio: LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 16 bit)
[Recording media]
Memory Stick, SD cards
[Input/output terminals]
USB Type-C terminal
SuperSpeed USB 5Gbps (USB 3.2)
HDMI
HDMI type D micro jack
(Microphone) terminal
Ø 3.5 mm Stereo mini jack
(Headphones) terminal
Ø 3.5 mm Stereo mini jack
[Power, general]
Rated input
7.2 V
Power consumption (while shooting)
Using an E PZ 16-50mm F3.5-5.6 OSS: Approx. 2.0 W
Operating temperature
0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)
Storage temperature
–20 to 55 °C (–4 to 131 °F)
Dimensions (W/H/D) (Approx.)
570
115.2 × 64.2 × 44.8 mm
4 5/8 × 2 5/8 × 1 13/16 in.
Mass (Approx.)
343 g (12.1 oz) (including battery pack, SD card)
Microphone
Stereo
Speaker
Monaural
Exif Print
Compatible
DPOF
Compatible
PRINT Image Matching III
Compatible
[Wireless LAN]
Supported format
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Frequency band
2.4 GHz
Security
WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Connection method
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)/Manual
Access method
Infrastructure mode
[Bluetooth communications]
Bluetooth standard Ver. 4.1
Frequency band
2.4 GHz
AC Adaptor AC-UUD12/AC-UUE12
Rated input
100 – 240 V
, 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A
Rated output
5 V
, 1.5 A
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50
Rated voltage
7.2 V
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
571
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Trademarks
Memory Stick and
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sony Corporation.
XAVC S and
are registered trademarks of Sony Corporation.
Mac is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
iPhone and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
USB Type-C® and USB-C® are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum.
The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google LLC.
Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks or trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Sony Corporation is under license.
QR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.
In addition, system and product names used in this manual are, in general, trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective developers or manufacturers. However, the ™ or ® marks may not be used in all cases in this
manual.
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
572
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Troubleshooting
If you experience trouble with the product, try the following solutions.
Related Topic
Setting Reset
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
Remove the battery pack, wait for about one minute, re-insert the battery pack, then turn on the power.
1
Initialize the settings.
2
Consult your dealer or local authorized service facility. Additional information on this product and answers
to frequently asked questions can be found at our Customer Support Website.
https://www.sony.net/
3
573
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Warning messages
Set Area/Date/Time.
Set the area, date and time. If you have not used the product for a long time, charge the internal rechargeable
backup battery.
Power insufficient.
The image sensor cleaning function will not operate because the remaining battery level is low. Recharge the battery
pack.
Unable to use memory card. Format?
The memory card was formatted on a computer and the file format was modified. Select [Enter] and then format the
memory card. You can use the memory card again, however, all previous data in the memory card is erased. It may
take some time to complete the format. If the message still appears, change the memory card.
Memory Card Error
An incompatible memory card is inserted.
Formatting has failed. Format the memory card again.
Unable to read memory card. Reinsert memory card.
An incompatible memory card is inserted.
The memory card is damaged.
The terminal section of the memory card is dirty.
Memory card locked.
You are using a memory card with a write-protect switch or a delete-protect switch with the switch set to the LOCK
position. Set the switch to the record position.
Cannot open the shutter since the memory card is not inserted.
No memory card has been inserted.
To release the shutter without inserting a memory card into the camera, set [Release w/o Card] to [Enable]. In this
case, images will not be saved.
This memory card may not be capable of recording and playing normally.
An incompatible memory card is inserted.
Processing...
When performing noise reduction, the reduction process takes place. You cannot do any further shooting during this
reduction process.
Unable to display.
Images recorded with other products or images modified with a computer may not be displayed.
Processing on the computer such as deletion of the image files may cause inconsistencies in the image database
files. Repair the image database files.
574
Check that a lens is mounted. For an unsupported lens, set "Release w/o Lens" in the menu to "Enable".
The lens is not attached properly, or the lens is not attached. If the message appears when a lens is attached,
reattach the lens. If the message appears frequently, check whether the contacts of the lens and product are clean or
not.
When attaching the product to an astronomical telescope or similar instrument, or using an unsupported lens, set
[Release w/o Lens] to [Enable].
The SteadyShot function does not work. You can continue to shoot but the SteadyShot function will not work. Turn
the product off and on again. If this message does not disappear, consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony
service facility.
The retractable lens with power zoom is retracted. Turn off the product and eject the battery pack, then reinsert the
battery pack.
Unable to print.
You tried to mark RAW images with a DPOF mark.
Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.
The product has become hot because you have been shooting continuously. Turn the power off and cool the product
and wait until the product is ready to shoot again.
(Overheating warning)
You have been recording images for a long time, the product temperature has risen.
(Database file full)
The number of images exceeds that for which date management in a database file by the product is possible.
(Database file error)
Unable to register to the database file. Import all the images to a computer and recover the memory card.
Image DataBase File error
There is something wrong in the Image Database File. Select [Setup] → [Recover Image DB].
System Error
Camera Error. Turn power off then on.
Remove the battery pack, and then re-insert it. If the message appears frequently, consult local authorized Sony
service facility.
Image Database File error. Recover?
You cannot record and play back a movie because the Image Database File is damaged. Recover the Image
Database File following the on-screen instructions.
Unable to magnify.
Unable to rotate image.
Images recorded with other products may not be enlarged or rotated.
Cannot create more folders.
A folder in the memory card has the first three digits “999.” You cannot create any more folders on this camera.
575
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ZV-E10
Recommended pages
Looking for valuable information, such as essential points on shooting (Tutorials)
This website introduces convenient functions, ways of usage, and setting examples. Refer to the website when you
set up your camera. (Another window will open.)
ZV-E10 lens compatibility information
This website provides the lens compatibility information. (Another window will open.)
5-028-017-12(2)
Copyright 2021 Sony Corporation
577
